Denali

ÐÏࡱá1111111111111111;11þÿ 111111111111 111 1111111111111 111þÿÿÿ11111111{111ü111} 11þ 1 1t11õ11v11÷11l 11ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿýÿÿÿù11þÿÿÿ111þÿÿÿ111111111 111 111 111

222 222

D.S. Brown Twin Lane DENALI

120686 words First N.A. Rights

4030

CHAPTER 1 He gazed at the far off mountain with its mist covered center, like a halo surrounding a ghostly giant. He remembered the stories of the past. The story of work, growth and success. Karl Cain was many things, but he was no fool or idle dreamer. When this man from Texas wanted to do something he did it with no hesitation. This had gotten Karl into trouble on more than one occasion, but this time something was different.

She leaned her back into him as he held her in his arms. Sharyn Morgan tried to see, to feel what he was feeling at that moment. She knew that part of what he saw was from some distant memory, and she longed to share that memory with him, even for an instant.

Karl smelled her sweetness and he stirred inside. Her hair was full and fine with its soft feel and lustrous reds and golds. With the colors running through it now, it looked every bit like a brilliant sunset. She was about a head shorter than he was, possessing an inner glow that gave him a helpless feeling. His coloring was dark and rich, almost like the natives of this vast land, but with the look of the plains and the Southwest about him; a mixture of the past and the present. He was tall and muscular with a walk like a cat. Karl looked at her and then back to the mountain in the far distance. He yearned for the world beyond this city surrounded by mountains. For now he must make the trip to the mountain. He had met her only a few short months before and had been strangely drawn to her, as if they had always been close. He was thirty one and she was the same age. Sharyn had a maturity about her that made him feel good. She was not the flighty kind that he had always seemed to attract in the past. Their last few two months were spent in a warm, close and tender relationship. When he told her of his feelings, Sharyn smiled shyly and reached for his strong hands. When he said that he was going to Alaska, a cold empty feeling and a heaviness came over her. She seemed to realize that they would be parting soon. He would not be taking her, and she felt a sadness like she had never before experienced. When Karl asked her if she wanted to go she squealed with delight. Sharyn always squealed when she was happy. She knew that this was the start of their life together. Holding her now the feeling that drew them together returned. Slowly he let the day's care melt from him, like a great weight being lifted from his body. A peace came over him and he felt life surging anew throughout his body. Karl thought of the past and the future he thought could never be, and yet she was with him here and now. He needed to tell her the story of the mountain but not of the rock and the bird. That was a time far beyond this time.

CHAPTER 2 The canoe was beached next to a freshly fallen tree. That was lucky he thought. The gods were watching over him for here were trees that had the bark that he needed to mend their little craft. The river was calm now, but not last night. They were tossed and carried by churning, grabbing waves that threw them through the water. Several times during that fearful night he wondered if they should have left the tribe to start a new life in some place that no one had ever been to before, at least no one ever talked about the land beyond the ice flow. The air was soft and warm, with a sweet gentle breeze coming down from the mountains where the sun god lived. Circles broke forth in the river as fish jumped for food. He wondered what the fish ate and would there be some for them. Most of their possessions were lost in the raging river the previous night. He could see the tops of the mountains glistening in the light of

the long day. This was the time when the sun god stayed with them and never slept. It was like that for about six moons. The air was warm and the yellow flowers danced in a rhythm all their own that spoke of peace and warmth and fulfillment of the land. He looked at the holes in the sides of the canoe and wondered how they had gotten this far. He was hungry and wondered if the one with bones coming out of his head would be near. He knew that she would like the meat and that she could make covers and clothes out of the skin. She was so kind, so caring. Never complaining. When he told her of his plan to cross the ice and see the other side of the world she shyly smiled, took his hand and waited for him to ask her to come along. He thought of the little white animal with the big feet that ran around on the soft white ground when day was not there. He looked for something to make a snare to catch small animals. Perhaps if he could spear a big animal he could use the parts that were strong and thin to make his traps. He had learned well, sitting with his father and the other men as they talked of the great hunts that lasted for many suns. He was smart and learned how to make all of the things that he would need to live forever. Now here he was far from any of the things that he had back there. He thought again of the little animal and he remembered that this was one of her favorite meats. Before starting to work on the canoe he emptied it, and carried their possessions to a place where they would be safe from storms, a place that would be home for that period when the snow god came. He wondered where she had gone. He had not seen her for some time, but he was not worried for she could take care of herself. She had hunted with him many times and even gotten game when he did not.

While he was going about the tasks before him, she silently approached so as not to scare him. She knew he was worried about where they were and what they were going to do now that they were here. She had been out gathering all the dry wood she could carry for she knew they would be too tired that day to go and look later. She came to him, put the wood down and looked into his eyes. They were warm and came alive as she touched his arm. Silently she gathered up some of the small pieces of wood and reached into a little bag tied to her waist. From the skin bag she pulled out some dry moss and scratched out a fire. This was the time when all was bright and the air was warm. Because of this she was able to quickly find lots of dry wood under the huge trees that covered the land so thickly that she could not see for more than three or four rows of the giants. Quickly she made the fire bigger and felt its warmth reach into all parts of her body. Somehow she had always been able to find dry moss, even when the white powder came from the sky. She had told him that was her magic, finding dry moss. She set about picking berries to eat and glancing at him she saw that he was looking at her in a way that made her feel warm inside. She smiled shyly and knew that he liked her now more than ever. Both were shy and tried not to show their feelings, but could not hold back what was in their eyes. For him, as the man, this was something that was not done. The man had to be strong and fearless. Later in the long day she would find tender shoots of tall grass by the river while he hunted for the meat. She would make a

warm drink for them and cook some shoots to go with whatever he brought to their camp. She had no doubt that he would catch something. She had watched him with the other boys and the men and he was the one that seemed to bring in the best meat, the biggest string of fish or the choicest birds. She thought that if he speared a big animal she would be able to make a special snare to catch fish and also to start to make the warm clothes they would need for the time when there was no sun. She saw that they were able to save little from their boat. He looked at her with quiet eyes, wondering how he had ever lived without her. Before going out to try and get the food that they would need he came to her, and pulling her to him he held her close, smelling her hair. Gentleness and warmth was all that he felt. He laid out the skins they had saved so that they could dry. Then he headed into the deep forest. She started her search for the roots and berries that were to be used for their dinner.

CHAPTER 3 It was difficult going in the forest, for the trees covered most of the warm light by the rivers edge. There was no straight path through the trees like there was back home. Here and there he heard the sounds of a giant bird. As he moved quietly, he wondered if the boneheaded one even lived over here in this world. Suddenly there was a sound like he had never heard. It was a deep throaty rumble that came from behind him. He turned and there before him was an animal unlike anything he had ever seen before; tall and straight with huge finger-like objects coming from his hands and feet. His face was short and seemed to go into his neck. He stood so high that he had to push the lower branches aside so that he could walk. Eigak guessed that the animal stood twenty of his hands spread on each other. It was much bigger than the boned one, he wondered if it was as fast. As he looked again at the animal he noticed that it had deep brown fur. Its color was much like the little fish animal that swam on its back and had nice fur. The skin of the big animal would give them a cover to keep them warm, if only he could get it before it got him. The large brown one growled and dropped to all fours and started towards him. He saw two trees a little behind him that were close enough together so that the big one could not get through. He thought that if he were able to get behind them then when the big one went for him he could push his spear between the trees and kill the beast. At that moment the big one started to run even faster toward him. He ran for the trees. He could smell the big one's breath as he got to the trees and stood between the two trunks. The big one lunged toward him, again standing on its hind legs. The giant claws raked the trees causing them to rock back and forth. As the big one put its giant head through the trees, Eigak's spear hit home. With a howl and then a strange cry the

big one was down and rolling from side to side. Eigak came over to the animal and pulled the spear out of the head. Shaking from the experience he sat down near the huge animal waiting for it to die. After the animal was dead he went over, bent down and grabbed one of the feet to pull it back to their camp. She would be happy to have the skin, and what if the meat tasted good. That would be something extra for them. This looked like a good start for them in this new world. Try as he might he was not able to move the animal, he went back to the little camp and got her to come and help him. The two of them could not move the huge animal. Telling her to go back to camp and bring him his bone knife he decided that he would take off the skin and cut as much meat as they could carry. They would dig a hole near the camp and bury the unused meat in the cool ground. While she carried the skin to the camp, he set about cutting the meat. As he did he noticed that there was a large amount of fat, not unlike the large fish with big teeth they would spear back home. He remembered that the women of his village would take the fat and heat it in a pot until it was liquid. They would store it for the cold time to give them light in their hut. Slowly he cut the fat away and then began on the meat. He cut it into large chunks and thin strips, putting the meat in-between pieces of bark. As he did he also found that the beast had long muscles that would make for good fishing material. He took off the mighty claws and thought how they could be used for small spears and also for making holes in the skin to tie it together. After they had gotten all of the materials together they made two trips bringing all of the meat back to their camp. He had taken some of the big bones to make her a new knife and new spearheads for future hunting. He realized that with animals this size he would have to have more than one hunting tool with him when he went out to get game. Together, without words, the two young people quickly built their first little hut using the skins that they had brought with them, and the bark from the giant trees. This would keep the rain gods away from them. The warm winds told them they did not need to be covered when they slept. The new skin would be warm and was big enough to cover them both when the winds blew cold. The light god would be with them for a long time and would help them to build their new home in this land of the tall trees and mountains. This was good, he thought, for he would be able to store up the meats and fish for the cold times when the dark god would be with them. She would gather the berries and the wood and roots and her dry moss. Looking at the boat he realized he would have to fix it soon, both because of fishing and in case they had to move away from this land. After their meal, she cleaned up the area and he went about getting the strips of spruce bark to rebuild their little boat. As he cut the bark and fashioned it to the craft he looked out in the water and saw a great red fish leap on his way up the river. This was strange he thought, he had never seen a fish go up a river. They had always gone down streams and rivers. He wondered at the marvel that had come into his sight. Truly, he thought, this is a wonderful place. A place that they could live together and raise their children. It had not been the time to talk to her about a family. He had wanted to when they lived in the village but since they were going to leave he had kept the thought to himself. Now he could talk to her about a family.

CHAPTER 4 The man and woman had just come back from seeing the great birds nesting. The sun god was with them most of the time now. The gods had been good to them in the years since they had come to the great river where they had first landed, and where they had continued to live. Yes, the man thought, all of the gods had been good to them and they had three fine boys and a daughter. A few years later one of the boys, Shugak went with Eigak along the coast towards the top of the world. As they looked out across the waters, on a bright day, he pointed out the direction where he and the boy's mother had come from, so many years ago. After six or seven suns they came to a place where there were several huts. The people of the small village were amazed to find that there were others on this side of the far land. The older man and his son were also surprised though the two of them had talked of such a thing. Not speaking the same language they started exchanging talk by sign and gestures. A beautiful young girl came near the fire as the men spoke. Shugak was in awe of this creature. Shugak had never seen another woman except for his mother and his little sister. The man smiled at the boy and then went about sign talking to the other men for some time. After a few days another man came into the camp. The new one spoke the language of both groups, and when Eigak asked him for more details he told him that he had lived with this group since he had left his home across the sea, where they had all come from. He came across the waters with them and he and his woman were the speakers for the group. The man asked if there were others nearby and he was told that another group lived several suns below where his family lived. Eigak saw that they did not have the goods that he and his woman, Mugash, had built up through hard work. When the boys got older they helped and were taught the many tasks that would make it possible to survive in this lonely place. The parents had wished for others to be around, even though they cared as much for each other now as when they first landed that stormy night so long age. Their thoughts were for their children and the future. As Eigak and his son Shugak were about to leave he invited the speaker and his family down to visit. He gave him the water route and the cove's entrance. Then he and Shugak left. When they arrived back home they unloaded the big bark boat that they had used. This was the craft that they also used to catch the big fish and the large slippery black half fish, half animal. The man had much to say to his woman about the people he had met and what he had found out about the others that lived several suns below them. He told her of how, when the

beautiful young woman came into the hut, Shugak started to show himself off to the girl. The boy turned away, knowing that his father was right, even though he thought no one noticed. The old man told his wife that he had invited the one who spoke both words to bring his family to visit them at the next moon. Eigak and Mugush were older now and the days had been good to them. Each of the children took on characteristics of their parents. Shugak was the one who now did most of the hunting, sometimes with the old man, but more often by himself. Rangak, the next oldest, looked just like his father. He was also somewhat of a dreamer who talked about the beautiful city he would build. It was he who had set about making this a permanent home for his parents and his brothers and sister. Shugak often talked in the night to Rangak about the girl he had seen at the other camp. He was not prepared to deal with the thought that there were other women. Since he had only his mother and sister to compare, he could not understand what gave him the warm feelings in his body. He started to notice that his sister was physically different from him in many ways. He also had this funny feeling inside when he and Umlak went off to bathe in the rock pool he had built. When he told this to Rangak he nodded in agreement. For now Rangak built the huts and boats. He also made a large pot out of a tree trunk. The trunk came up to his chest and was hollow for the rain god who would fill it so that they had water without going to the river. He made a hole near the bottom, on the side that faced his parents hut. The hole was filled with a branch that had to be pulled out to let the water flow. In the cold dark time he would fashion a skin over the top so that they could get some of the white powder when it fell from the sky. When the older man looked at his wife he saw her eyes dance with pride whenever Rangak was close by. Eigak, Shugak and Rangak had killed many of the big ones with the long bones and Rangak made them into a frame that he covered first with bark and then skins tied to the bones. Now all were warm and safe at the times of the great cold and the big winds. The little village that Eigak and his son first visited now knew of Rangak's boats and they came to trade fish and skins for well built crafts. Umlak, the girl was much like her mother, both in looks and in abilities. She was strong and capable, but had a shyness about her. Only with her father was she outgoing and playful. There were times that she went hunting with her oldest brother and often brought home meals for all of them. Still she was her father's girl. She was always able to get her father to do things for her. The two of them laughed together, seemingly about anything, as if they had their own special secrets. She also had the gift of her mother. She had that special magic. Toomgak was the youngest boy. He was different from the rest of the family. He was short and wiry with a much darker complexion. His eyes were as black as the night and they could look right through you. Many times he went to the ocean and seemed to talking to the fish or the large birds that circled overhead. He did little work around their home and then grumbled about it when he did work. Always he would go into the forest by himself, without a large weapon. When he was asked by his father about this he just smiled and said that they would do him no good. "I do not need them. The animals are my friends." At dinner he would seem to sit apart from the family with a far off look in his

eyes. He would be gone for long periods went or what he did. His ability seemed could help the hurt creatures that came came to him for healing, even the great

of time, never saying where he to lie in the fact that he into their area. The animals eagle.

CHAPTER 5 Sometime later the old man, along with Shugak and Rangak, made the trip to find the people who lived below their home. Toomgak had told them that he was not going because he needed to be near the animals. The speaker they met on their first voyage to the north village told them that the trip would take several suns. It was on this trip that Rangak had his first taste of the open sea. He had heard about it from his father and from Shugak, but he thought they were trying to put fear in him for some reason. Before going to the sea they travelled upstream first. This was for a two-fold reason. First they had to make sure that the boat had no leaks or cracks, and second the father wanted to make sure the younger boy was up to the trip. The boat and the boy both held up well. After returning to their home for the night they set out for the lower camp. As they came around the end of the cove that led to the open waters Rangak heard sounds like he had never heard before. A roaring greeted his ears and made them hurt. The water hurled itself against the little craft and it began to swing wildly. The old man yelled an order and the two boys dug their paddles deeper into the water holding the boat in a straight line as they moved slowly toward the open sea and calmer waters. Rangak was afraid for this was something he could not control. He prayed to the water god to leave them alone. The tops of the water were like the soft powder that fell during the long night, but with a greater force. Just as it had begun the noise and the high waves stopped. He looked back and saw the shore that they had just come from, peaceful and quiet. As the sun moved to the west the day was growing colder and the three of them looked for a place to beach their craft. Suddenly a giant fish came to the surface of the water directly ahead of them. It was as long as one of the bark trees back home. As the tail of the fish came crashing down on the waters the little boat was turned to the side and swept towards the shore as the monster disappeared from view. Startled the three men paddled for the shore while the sea carried them even faster. The little craft hurtled toward the shore. Rangak prayed to the spirit god that they would be safe. As the water slowed, the craft turned slightly to the left and started a long glide to the shore. The sandy beach was warm and safe and they gave thanks to the spirit god for saving them. After resting on the shore for several minutes they took out their supplies from the boat and looked for the best place to spend the night. This was Rangak's job, and while he was doing this the older man went in search of wood. Shugak took this time to get his weapons together and go to see if he could get some food so that they would not have to go into their supplies. After what had happened they felt they needed to conserve their foodstuff's as long as possible. While the other two were doing their tasks, Rangak, after finding a place for them, pulled out their skins, from the bottom of the boat, to make sure they were not too wet and then went back to check the boat for little leaks. Rangak discovered several places that were in need of

repair. He was proud of the boat and knew that no one else would have made a boat that would take this punishment. He showed the spots to be repaired to his father and then set about finding the bark and the vines that he would need for the repairs. After he had found what he needed he reached into the pouch that was tied to his waist, and took out some of the sharp fingers of the great beast that his brother had killed several moons ago. He had fashioned a hole in one end to run the vine through the bark. With quick hands he pulled the thin shaft through the bark and wove it into the good bark still on the boat. It did not take him long to complete his task and when he was done he saw that the old man had gathered up wood and was making a fire. The father came over and looked at the work of his second son and said, "Rangak, you are the best boat maker that I have ever seen. Perhaps you should find all of the other people who live by the water and make your living in this way." Rangak was pleased that his father would say this and it was strange for this had been on his mind for some time now that he could make many things and sell or trade to others. At about the same time Shugak came back to their campsite with two of the white-footed animals that tasted so good. They would eat well this night and use little of their supplies. The bark was put into the sea and then the meat was wrapped in the wet bark and cooked on the coals. In the morning they would wrap the remaining meat in the wet bark and take it with them as they travelled south. Life was good that day and the spirit god had again watched over them. For now there was only the warm fire and the slowcooked meat on the coals. The following day a great wind blew and the men were unable to continue their journey. During this time the two boys went into the forest to look around. They were surprised to see that there was little difference in this area and where they lived, except for the sandy white beach. Their beach area at home was filled with stones and bits of sharp black rocks. After walking the tree-line for several minutes they struck off for the interior. The tall trees seemed to have lessened the wind inside the forest. Suddenly they came across a large clearing. Larger than anything they had ever seen. The ground here was also different. It was soft and almost black. Little flowers seem to pop up everywhere. The flowers were white and yellow and the grass in the clearing was a bright green. Shugak was looking for the tracks of animals while Rangak searched the trees for a sign of the giant bird with the white head and the large black wings. Neither saw anything that said there was life here. Shugak thought that this would make a wonderful place to live. The air was sweet and the smell of the forest was good. Also, he thought, the land could be used to plant some other things that might grow and bring food. Since they were going to be here for the day the boys decided to go on past the clearing and see what was ahead. To their left they found a river, but saw no fish jumping nor did they see the tracks of any bird or animal. After several minutes the boys noticed that the air was drier and the trees did not seem as tall and were spaced further apart. As they moved along the river they were pleased that they had

landed here for this was something they could talk about. They marvelled at the stillness of the trees while by the boat the wind was making great noise in the trees by the beach. Still there was no sign of either birds, fish or animals. Shugak was starting to think of the time when he would settle down with someone, like his mother. He thought of the girl he had seen many moons ago in the other village. Suddenly Rangak let out a shout and as Shugak looked up to where his brother was pointing he saw a new sight. A giant rock that seemed to up to the clouds. The top of it was covered with a shiny white substance not unlike that which would come down during the long night. This was the first time either had seen a big mountain. The boys started to go to the rock when they heard a sound unlike anything they had ever heard before. The sound was close to the ground and Shugak tried to pinpoint its location. Whatever it was, the short panting like sounds seemed to be running along their path. Not having any of their large weapons with them the boys turned back towards the place where their father was gathering the little crystals that tasted so good. When they reached camp they told the old man what they had seen and what they had heard. The old man remembered that sound. It came from the fast moving creatures they called "wolf." The next day dawned bright and clear, with just enough of a breeze to make paddling out to sea work for the three of them. It was difficult getting over the waves and to the open sea but after what seemed a long time they were free of the wind and the waves, and they headed towards the village they were seeking. The sea was calm and they found the paddling easy for the current helped to carry them and the water was warm. The next day was much like the day before with just a hint of a breeze. The men were able to take turns paddling and keeping the boat in the current. Rangak did a good job of repairing the craft. Rangak had come up with an idea that if he stretched tightly laced skins over the boat and secured them to the sides that the inside would stay dry and they could carry more things that would not be hurt by the sea. For now all of this was talk and it served to occupy the time while they headed to the village below. Two more days passed before they saw a cluster of huts on the shoreline ahead. They were excited to find so many people in one place. The man who spoke both words did not tell them how many were there and they thought that it would be like the first village; but this was different for there were twenty or thirty huts set back from the shore. The older man gave orders for the boys to pull to the shore. Once ashore they pulled their craft up onto the beach, past where the water god came each night. It was strange as they pulled the boat up no one came out to meet them or even to look from the huts at them. It was like the camp was empty. From the first moment that Shigashu, the leader of the village, saw the boat he knew that it was not the man who spoke both words. When he saw that there were three strangers in the boat he had all of the people of the village follow him into the trees. Here they would stay until Shigashu could find out who they were, what they wanted and where they came from. They knew that no one else lived near them for they had journeyed three days in all directions looking for others like them to make their camp even more secure from the large beasts that came into their camp and attacked the people.

" Who were these men and what did they want," Shigashu asked to no one in particular. No one answered as the three men came onto the beach. They did not have any weapons with them. They made no effort to go into any of the huts, except for the smallest of the men, who looked carefully at the way they were built and seemed delighted with their condition. Perhaps they came from the land of the Chugachi's. The big island that they sometimes rowed near when they were fishing. They had seen the fires and heard the loud war cries coming from the big island. For now he would have to play the waiting game and see what the three men were going to do to his home. The old man looked at Rangak and said, "What do you think of the way that they live?" The boy replied, "the huts are well built, much like the design that I have made for my own when I leave to start my own life." They seem to have good things to eat with and they have small tree trunks to drink from." At this point Shugak said, "There are no weapons in the camp. I think they're in the trees and are watching us to see what we shall do. If we build a fire and make up some food they might come out. If not then I will try to find them. The man of both words said they speak our words so we might call to them and tell them we are visitors." The old man thought for a few minutes while the boys brought up some supplies from the boat. When the boys were back he told them that he would walk to the edge of the trees and call back to the boys. This way the people, if they were near, would know that they all came from the same land. At that point he got up and walked towards the trees. Shigashu did not know what to make of the new ones. They did not seem hostile. In fact they did not even take food from any of the huts. If only he could understand what they were talking about. They showed no weapons and seemed peaceable but he did not want his people caught in case there were others following. It was then that he saw the older man get up and start his way. Had he left tracks? He could see none. What was the old man doing? He had no weapon as he came their way. The people saw this and they moved further back into forest. When the old man got to the edge of the trees he called back to the boys, telling them not to do any damage to the campsite or the huts. Shigashu was surprised. This man was speaking their language. Are these people who had just come from across the water? The old man kept talking and suddenly he heard a noise to his side. An older man, older than he, came quietly out of the forest, and called to him. "Who are you and why are you here?" The father looked at him and said," My name is Eigak. I am the father of the boys down at your village. We come from the man who speaks both words. He has told us of your village and it is much larger than where we are, many suns away. Also there are others who do not speak our words who live above us by several suns." This was long conversation for Eigak who had not spoken to anyone but his family, with the exception of the man of both words, for many years. Shigashu listened patiently and then called to his followers to come out of the woods. Eigak was surprised to see so many. There must have been thirty or forty men women and children. They came carefully forward, not knowing what to expect. As they did Shugak and Rangak also came to meet them, but Eigak stopped them with a wave.

As they approached the two men they could hear them talking in their own language. This was a good sign for now they knew that they would be able find out many things about the area and about their own people. Eigak came back to his sons and told them of his talk with the man. He told them that they had been asked to stay for a while in the village and get to know the people there. Rangak was overjoyed for this meant that he could study the houses in greater detail. Shugak was not so happy, for it was on his mind that he needed to start his own family and the thoughts of the beautiful girl that he had seen in the other camp were more frequent. He had a strange feeling in his body when he thought of the girl. He became warm all over. This was the time that he needed to find his own way. The trio stayed for several days. They were amazed to find out that the villagers seemed to have an endless supply of food. The three men were going to use what they had brought but there was no need for the people of the village fed them with fish, and shrimp as well as bird and meat. They also seemed to have plenty of greens for them to eat and the women fixed it exactly like their mother would when they were home. Rangak found that they had made the huts just like he was planning to do and he asked who designed them. A young girl was brought to him and he was told that she was the one who came up with the idea of a round top so that the snow would not pile up and cave in the hut. Rangak and the girl spent many hours together building a hut using both of their ideas. The girl's name was Jumuha and she was about the same age as Rangak. Before he left he told Jumuha he would look at their boats. Looking over their boats he found that they were badly in need of repair. He showed the girl how he sowed new bark into the good bark still good on the boat. That night the three of them made their decisions, decisions that would forever change the land. It was decided that Shugak and Eigak would go back to get their sister, brother and mother and they would get all of their things and move to this area. The village would make a good place for them and the older ones would have others to talk with and the younger ones would be able to set up their lives to live as they pleased and perhaps find a mate. Rangak decided to stay and would build the huts, one for his parents and one each for his brothers and sister. Jokingly he said to Shugak, that he would make him an extra large one for he had to bring back the girl he had seen and build a large family. The next morning the two men left for their home with the promise that they would be back soon.

CHAPTER 6 Rangak and Jumuha started in to explore the surrounding area. Bonoha, the girls brother, went with them each day, both to keep an eye on his sister and because he really liked Rangak. He saw that Rangak could do things that he could not, and was hoping that the older boy would stay with them, teaching him how to make and fix the boats. Rangak had already checked the boats. They were in bad shape and he asked Bonoha why the boats were in such bad condition. Everything else was in good shape and he marveled at the way that the people had built and prepared the land. Bonoha told him that someone in the village had fixed one of the boats and had gone out to fish in it and never came back. They repaired a second boat and it too disappeared. From then on all the fishing was from the beach or up the river just a short walk from the village. Rangak and the girl spent much time together. As they walked he marveled at the fact that the land was so flat. He wondered if he would be able to see the white tops of the earth that he had seen when they had made the first landing, in the days before they came to this village. That far country seemed so nice, so empty and peaceful. Would he ever see it again, he wondered. For now, however, he was going to set about making a home for his parents, brothers, sister and himself. He was spending more time now with Jumuha. In fact it seemed as if she was always with him. Her father also noticed and set about to talk to the young man. He liked Rangak and felt that he would be a fine mate for his daughter. Everyone in the village seemed to like him as well. One day Shigashu asked Rangak to take a walk with him, and during their walk he asked him if he was going to stay with them and if so what about Jumuha. Rangak thought for several minutes and as they walked he realized that she was someone who would make a good mother for his children. Someone to lie down with at night and wake up with in the morning. Rangak and the old man came to a pile of rocks and sat down. Rangak told the old man how he felt about the girl, and then, looking at the other man said, "I have decided to make my life here. I will ask Jumuha to make the life with me; but first I have a task to perform. I am going to repair one of the boats and then I am going to take it out to sea. I will bring it back to you and the curse will be off the sea and the village." The older man smiled to himself and thought that the gods had indeed blessed the village, for here was one to give all of them a new heart. The old man agreed and told him that he would not say anything to the girl until Rangak had finished what he was about to do. Rangak had to build the huts for his family, and the girl was a big help. She knew where to find the materials that were needed. He added something new to the huts. When a group of small animals were brought in to eat he asked if he could have the skins. Puzzled the villagers brought him many; in fact so many he laughingly told them, "Save some of the animals for next year." He was told that they killed so many now so that they could bury them in the cold ground and have them during the dark times. Rangak noted that the days were getting shorter and there was a little time when it was dark. He quickly scraped the skins and got the long pieces of muscle

and used that to weave the skins together. When that was done he gathered some tree limbs, lashed them together and then tied the skins to the frame. He placed this on the inside of the hut in such a way as to be able to slide it to either side. He told them that this would keep the cold white powder from the huts and that all they had to do was slide it to either side and go out. He showed them that when it started to get cold how it would help to keep the heat in their huts. The villagers marveled at the young man and what he was doing for them. The next day found all the village people making their covers for their huts. Jumuha watched him with happy eyes, pleased that he liked her, and that he was helping her people. When they were alone he would hold her in his arms and tell her how good she looked. He told her how smart she was and that one day she would be a good mate to someone. She laughed and said, "When I find that mate you will be the first to know." Rangak finished the huts for his family during the next several days. Now it came time to find out what was out in the sea that had taken the lives of the villagers. He took the boat that had the best frame and taking fresh bark from the trees in the area, fashioned a strong craft. The people came and looked at it and nodded at the fine workmanship. Jumuha was proud of Rangak and thought that he was going to find out very soon who her mate would be. As the little craft and it's lone occupant headed for the sea a great calm appeared. It was as if the sea knew that Rangak was coming and wanted him to feel at peace. There was something different about this boat than others. The top of the boat was covered with the hide of the big one with the bone growing from his head. It was tied down to the boat itself and woven into the sides at the top. Rangak sat in the center hole with a new kind of paddle that had a blade on both ends. Rangak had planned this boat before and this was the chance to test it out in the great waters of the ocean. All of his possessions for the trip were under the covering and he noticed that they seemed to stay dry. This was good, the young man thought, for it meant that he would be able to bring in dry materials over the water. He could bring them to the village. He had decided that when he came back from trying to find the others and the great fish he would ask Jumuha to be his mate; to be the mother of his children and to live with him always. He would stay near her village until they moved on to another part of this great land. After what had seemed hours, Rangak noticed that the water seemed a different color. It seemed to have more blue to it. Also the spray seemed to be warmer on his face. Perhaps, he thought, this is the reason the others had not come back. They kept on going looking for the warm land. Without warning the sea erupted with a loud roar. From the very depths of the sea a great monster rose and crashed down towards him. His little craft swayed and bounced in the turbulent waters. The monster slowly started to go under when its gigantic tail flattened out and hit the water with a loud slap, causing the little boat to toss and turn wildly in the swirl it made. Rangak felt as if both he and the boat would be pulled under the water. In that instant he realized what

had happened to the others. If his little boat had not been covered it would have filled with water and sunk and the force would have pulled him down as well. At that moment another monster appeared, but not as large as the first. This one made for the little boat and Rangak. Suddenly the giant fish went under the boat and came up with the boat on its back. Swiftly down it went and created a swirl that seemed to pull the little craft down. Was this to be the end, thought Rangak as he went down. But just as suddenly the boat shot back up and leveled out. The current made by the waves and the trough of water had carried him far away from the land that he could see in the distance. He was sure that no one could see the boat from there. Twice more the two monster fish came up behind him as if pushing him away from his world. Suddenly without warning the calm returned and the little craft and it's lone occupant were free. It must have been hours since he left the village and the day was getting darker. He paddled toward the shore hoping to make a camp for the rest that he needed. Tomorrow, he thought, he would start the trip back and tell the others in the village what had happened. For the better part of three hours he paddled until finally he was able to beach the boat. He took out some food and sticks to build a fire. The land was rocky and barren and there was no life to be seen in any direction. Rangak made his fire. He thanked the gods for his life. After he had eaten his meal he looked over the boat to see what damage had been done. To his delight and amazement there were no signs of damage and the inside has stayed quite dry. He remembered some words that he had heard his father use and he called the craft a "Kayak". As he looked over the little craft he thought of his family. What had happened to his father and his brother on the way back to their home? Did they make it? Were they all alive. What about the others in the village? Did they see the giant fish and think that he was dead? As these questions raced through his mind he felt suddenly like a great weight had been put on him. He could never remember being this tired. Quickly he spread his sleeping hide and fell into a deep sleep. He had been having the same dream for several months now. It was a strange dream, one that troubled him. He dreamt of a great mountain, rising out of the land. The top was covered with snow with large rocks on the sides. Part of the way up there were trees but they stopped before the mountain was half way out of the ground. The top glistened with a bright sun spreading it's warmth, warmth that he could feel.At the foot of the giant peak stood a girl.

CHAPTER 7 Rangak and Jumuha had wanted a child for many years now. They had

performed the rites of marriage almost as soon as he returned to the village from his trip to find the others from the village. The old ones, now long dead had come to the village along with Shugak and Umlak, his sister and Rokal, the girl that Shugak had met at the other camp. Toomgak had stayed behind to take care of his "friends," the animals and birds. Bonoha had married Umlak. The others had already had children and the camp had become a village. People from the camp to the North had come to their camp and now they had the men to do all of the things necessary to build a permanent place in this country. Shugak and Rangak had become leaders and their wisdom was welcomed by all who came to their home. Shugak was the builder and planner for the area and for the crafts that they now used to gather large quantities of fish. The villagers were never hungry. Several times, in the past moons, they had seen large boats with sails on the horizon. So far they had not come near their home. Rangak had taken all of the young men and had taught them the ways of his father, in the use of knives, spears and the bow. He had made a new bow for each person and soon as they learned how to use the ones that he supplied. They all learned to make the arrows used for the hunt. The men of the village now were taking longer trips into the land to search for others as well as for food. Many times they had heard the sounds of animals but could not find them. What they did find were the footprints of a man. The prints never seemed to come towards the village; but moved farther inland following the slopes of the mountains that covered the backside of their land. Out on the horizon where the water met the sky, the large boats with great sails were seen more often but they never came close to the land. One day, as was his custom, Rangak went to sea, going towards where he had seen the giant fish. He had brought back much fish from this part of the sea. As he turned to the south and headed for the bay where he had landed that first terrible day, he saw one of the boats coming towards the shore. Using all of his strength he headed for the little bay. The giant ship came hurtling through the sea towards him. As he maneuvered into the bay he was hidden from the ship for several minutes. During that time he was able to get his little craft ashore and out of sight. The big ship came to a stop at the mouth of the bay and lowered several boats into the water and started to the shore. Rangak ran into the forrest with his bow, arrows and spears. On his waist he wore his long knife. He stopped for a minute to see the men who were searching for him. He could hear them talking in a language he had never heard. As he rested he saw two of the men coming up the path he had taken. He quickly hid in the brush and as the men passed he was able to see their features. Not only did they talk differently they looked different! Their skin was much lighter and they had large hairs growing out of their faces. Over their shoulders they carried a large object that he had never seen before. They had no bows or spears and their knives were very short. They wore much body coverings and seemed to be uncomfortable with all the weight they carried. Suddenly Rangak heard the sounds that had become familiar to those in their village who had travelled to the mountains for food. It was the man-animal! The strangers heard this sound and it threw them into a great

deal of confusion and fright. The leaders of the men yelled some words and the men ran forward toward the sounds. After several minutes no one came near Rangak and he started to go inland, away from the bay and away from the strange animal sounds. Moving quickly and silently he started towards the big rock that he had seen from the beach. When the dark gods came for their brief visit he could still hear the strangers and could see their fires behind him. He knew that he could not go back to his little boat. Rangak had lived forty-seven seasons of the light god and was not as quick as he once was, but he did have his mind and now he set about using it. First he had to get his bearings and then try to find an inland way back to the village. After several hours he started deeper into the forrest, hoping that he was also moving towards the village. He was good at moving in the darkness, though the sky was only a dark color and there was still light so that he could move with some ease though not at the speed he once moved. Suddenly he heard the sound of something in front of him. Rangak froze and the sound became steps. A stranger stepped in front of him and pointed to a path between some large trees. The man made a shrill sound much like the giant white topped bird. In a few seconds there was the rush of wings above him. Rangak had known fear in his life, but not the terror that he felt at that moment. Again the man pointed to the path and Rangak started through the trees. He turned to the man but no one was there. Rangak was a leader because he could think things through to a logical conclusion, but this seemed not to have a conclusion that he could figure out. He had been walking for several hours and the light god was back and he noticed that the path seemed to be getting broader and that he was going uphill. His pace had slowed as the climb became more difficult. After a few hours he rested and reached into his pouch for something to eat. He had forgotten how hungry he really was and how little he was able to take with him from his boat. As he made his fire and started to eat his flood he saw a small animal about ten paces away. It was much like the big footed little ones that they caught and ate. Taking out an arrow and tightening his bow he steadied himself and took the shot. The animal dropped and he went to get him. After preparing him he wrapped the little meats in bark and put it into his pouch. He decided that this was the time for him to get some rest and he lay down off the path and in the hollow of a giant tree. Sleep came quickly and with it the dream of the mountain and the girl. Now the mountain seemed much closer. When Rangak woke up he knew that something was different. Looking around he discovered that someone had come to where he was sleeping and had left him fresh roots and berries. He had also left water that was clear. That was strange he thought since he had seen no springs or ponds during the time he had been walking. After he had eaten and packed up his precious food and the water in it's little bag of skin he again started up the soft ground that made up the path. He was still climbing but now he could see the mountains around him through the breaks in the trees.

For three days Rangak followed the path, wondering where he was going, and would he ever see his wife and the village again. The path was clear and he was able to cover much ground each day until the fourth day when a large storm came upon him. He tried to keep going, hoping to find a shelter from the wind and the rain and the first dropping of snow. The storm lasted for several days and when it was over he decided that he would return to the beach. He was sure that the others would have left and returned to the big boats. Something made him look in front of him, as he was getting ready to leave. There in a clearing he could see the mystery man and beyond him a large mountain glistening in the light of the gods. Without taking time to think. Rangak started toward the man and the mountain. It seemed that with each step he took the mountain got closer but the man kept moving away up the path. Rangak had been traveling for several hours when he heard the sound of water rushing over the rocks just as the sea sounded when it crashed against rocks. "What will I tell the others about this trip," he said to himself. Then he heard the sound of the giant bird and looked up in time to see it go over the hump in the trail he had been following. Going up to the hump he found that the pathway narrowed so that he could look down and see a large river with foaming white water cascading over the rocks in a brilliant display of colors as the light hit the water. Looking ahead he saw the mysterious man up the narrow trail and sitting on a branch next to his him was the giant bird with the white head. The man made a shrill sound and the bird flew out over the water, dove and was lost from view. Moments later the bird flew just overhead, his wings fanning Rangak. Something dropped from its beak and a fish, still wriggling fell at his feet. Rangak was stunned. Who was this person with the long hair who was ahead of him? How did he talk to the bird? Where was he? All of these questions raced through his mind and at the same time he realized that he was very hungry. In fact he had not eaten since the dark god came and went and now was coming again. Rangak continued to move forward, looking for a place to eat and sleep. The path appeared narrow for some distance. Suddenly there was a wide spot where he could make a fire. It was close to the water and this was good he thought for he had not had much to drink for the past few days. He had taken the fish to eat and now was the time. After he had eaten and satisfied his thirst he sat back and looked around. A weariness set in and he fell asleep still sitting against the tree. Something forced Rangak to open his eyes. It was a feeling, for he saw nothing in front of him. He looked up and saw that he had been sleeping for a very long time. In the tree he sat against, was the big bird. Rangak stretched and started to move about when he saw the mysterious man sitting in the shadows of a giant tree across the clearing. Going over to the man he sat down, and thinking that the man would not understand him, he started to draw pictures in the dirt. The man smiled at him and drew answers. Time went by and the mystery man suddenly got up, motioned for Rangak to follow him and he started off toward the middle of the mountains. Rangak had no idea of where he was or how he would get back to his village so he followed the man and the bird. On the third day there was quite a change in the land. Now they

started down the back of the mountains. Rangak thought that they were heading back to the village and he quickened the pace. After several hours Rangak realized that they were still following the river and that the land was flat and the river was narrower than before. Ahead of him he could see another range of mountains. That night as they slept, he had the dream again. This time he could make out the girl. It was not Jumuha. Two more days passed and they came to a wide spot on the north side of the river. Since they were on the South side Rangak could not tell how far the river went into the wide spot. Directly in front of them he could see the mountains again starting their climb to the sky. These days the dark god was there almost half of the time. The man motioned for him to move on and follow him. Around the next bend Rangak found out why they were going in this direction. There was a cluster of huts in a beautiful clearing surrounded by large trees. There were several of the big birds sitting in the trees and calling to each other. From the huts came men and women and children. Why did so many of them look familiar to him? As he stood there puzzled he heard his name called. "Rangak, don't you think we can stop drawing pictures in the dirt and talk to each other?" Rangak was taken back first by the words and then by the fact that someone knew him. Turning he saw that it was the man who had brought him here. "Why didn't you talk to me back where we met? Who are you?" he said. "Surely you did not forget your brother, Toomgak, did you?" the man said. Rangak was stunned. How could this be he thought? Who were the others here? As if Toomgak read his mind the younger brother said, "I suppose you want to know all about all of this so let us sit in my house and we will talk, only with words." He laughed as he said this last part. The two talked for many hours, each asking the other about the family and what had happened over the past years. Rangak told him of the village and of the people who lived there. When he told him of the death of the old ones Toomgak became quiet and a sad look came across his face. Toomgak in turn told him that when the old ones and Shugak decided to go to the village he had already made up his mind that he was going to live in the forest with the birds and the animals. He said that he had lived there, and had learned the ways of the birds and the animals. He also had learned to eat from bushes and trees and grass instead of the fish and animals that the family had for their meals. He still ate some of other food but only when it was clear that the fish or animal or bird would not live. Rangak was curious about this village. He said that so many looked so familiar. Toomgak told him of how he had been moving around the forest until he found this river and started to follow it to se where it would lead. After several days he ﾁ 222222‚222222ƒ222222„222222… 222222†222222‡222222ˆ222222‰222222Š222222‹222222Œ222222222222Ž222222 222222222222‘222222’222222“222222”222222•222222–222222— 222222˜222222™222222š222222›222222œ222222 222222ž222222Ÿ222222222222¡222222¢222 222 £2 2222 2¤2 2222 2¥2

3232 3¦232323§232323¨232323©232323ª232323«2 32323¬232323232323®232323¯232323°232323±232323²232323³232323 ´2 3232 3µ232323¶232323·232323¸232323¹232323º232323»2 3232 3¼232323½232323¾232323¿232323À232323Á232323Â232323Ã232323Ä232323Å232323Æ 232323Ç232323È232323É232323Ê232323Ë232323Ì232323Í232323Î232323Ï232323Ð23 2323Ñ232323Ò232323Ó232323Ô232323Õ232323Ö232323×232323Ø232323Ù232323Ú2323 23Û232323Ü232323Ý232323Þ232323ß232323à232323á232323â232323ã232323ä232323 å232323æ232323ç232323è232323é232323232323ë232323ì232323í232323î232323ï 232323ð232323ñ232323ò232323ó232323ô232323õ232323ö232323÷232323ø232323ù23 2323ú232323û232323ý232323ýÿÿÿþ232323ÿ23232323 2323came to where they were now. He had found several people here and was surprised to find that they spoke the same language. He was also surprised to find that they came from the same place over the waters that his parents had come from so many years ago. He soon met a girl and they decided to live together and raise a family. He found out that the people were here even before his family had come to this shore. During his time in this village he had become it's leader. It was he who had taught them to grow the foods that he had gotten from the giant birds. The birds had brought him seeds of different plants and these he planted to help him live. The people found in him a kind and gentle person, always ready to help and yet not willing to go on the hunts for the foods to carry them through the dark times. He was different they realized but he was good and they listened when he spoke. He told them of his family and of the place that they were going to and the place where the others who did not speak their language lived. Rangak listened to all of this and told him how he missed his wife and how he had been hunted by the strange men with the light skin. He told him of the storm and how he could not find his way back to the sea or to the village. Toomgak told him that he did not know where the village was but that it must be a far distance that none of them had travelled. He told him that the dark god was upon them and that he would have to wait until the coming of the light god before he could find his way back to either the sea or the village. Rangak knew this and he agreed to stay with his brother for the time of the dark god. Back at the Rangak's village plans had been made to start a search for him. Some of the men, including Shugak paddled down to the little bay where they found Rangak's boat. Searching the land they found no trace of Rangak; but did they find things that said someone had been there. Shugak and the party returned to the village and a great sadness came over the village. Shortly after the return of the search party, several large sail boats appeared off the coast. They seemed to locate the village and sent some smaller boats close to the shore but returned back to the mother ships and left. CHAPTER 8 It was the time when the dark god was with them and a great

eruption took place at Shugak"s village. The earth shook and trembled and large parts of the land opened up. When it was over the land had settled below the coast line and the village was flooded, both by the sea and the torrential rains that came with this storm. No one was spared and the village ceased to exist. When the light god again started to be with them for several hours, Rangak and his brother set out to find the village. They too had felt the earth shake but it was not as violent and caused only some trees to become uprooted. Toomgak knew the land much better than his older brother and it was he who led the way. When they came to the wide spot in the river that Rangak had seen before, the waters were much calmer. It was here that they crossed to the North side of the stream, and continued on in a fairly straight line leaving the river below. The mountains again went up to the sky. The going was much slower than when he had come from the bay. The white powder was deep and it was hard for them to walk for long periods of time. Since the dark god was still with them for much of the time they did not cover much ground. As they continued Toomgak noticed that there were no animals or birds making sounds. Many trees had been pulled from the ground as if by a giant hand. There were also holes in the ground that stretched from one path to another. The two men discussed this and did not know what had happened to cause this terrible picture of destruction. Rangak had become comfortable with his brother making decisions and he had seen how well he looked after the people of his village. Rangak had asked him if the village was there long before the old ones came to this land. Toomgak said that all he was able to find out was that they had been there before his parents but he did not know how much before. He did ask if any of them knew his family or the name of the place where they had come from. No one knew but they did say that they had given the village a name just before Toomgak came to them. They called the village Galena. To them it was a sacred word they used to protect the village from the evil spirits. So far it seemed to be working. As the light god stayed with them for longer periods of time they were able to make better time and cover more distance each day. Many days later they reached the top of the mountains and started down to the waters of the sea. As they travelled they saw much more damage to the land and it seemed to upset Toomgak. After three or four days he started to make the shrill cries that Rangak had first heard so many days ago. That time there was a bird with him, but this time there was no answer. Time and again he called and time after time he made new and different calls with the same result. The light god was now with them most of the time and they travelled to the distant shoreline. Finally they arrived at the shore and started down the coast looking for the village. Rangak saw some familiar landmarks but most of the land was different than he had ever seen it. Toomgak, who had travelled over the interior of this land, also could barely find his way. He continued to call to the birds and the animals but there were no answers. The two boys spent much time looking at what had happened and one day while going out in the bay Rangak stepped on something soft and strange. He lifted it from the rocky sand and it was a coat of fur. He recognized it as one that he had made for his wife, Jumuha. Rangak was surprised at this and started to walk through the waters very carefully, looking for what he did not know. Toomgak came back from

down the coast and said that he had not seen a thing. Rangak showed him the coat. Both started to cover the ground around the bay in a systematic manner. Toomgak decided one afternoon to swim out to a rock in the middle of the bay. After he had gone about half way he suddenly went under the water. When he came up he raced back to the shore. "Rangak, Rangak, come quick," he yelled at the top of his voice. When Rangak came to his brother, Toomgak said, "I have found the village." Before Rangak could say anything, Toomgak said, "The village is under the water. It is no more. It is a terrible sight under the water and all are dead. The great spirit that did this is the one that hurt the land." Rangak was stunned. His wife, his brother all of the ones who had depended on him were lost. A great cry of despair burst from his lungs, tears fell from his eyes and he started tearing at his flesh. Toomgak quickly put his arms around his brother and held him close until the sobs became low, soft moans. What was he to do now. All of his family was gone. No, he still had family. He had Toomgak! The time went slowly for Rangak. His body was stronger than ever but his mind was clouded with sadness. His loss could not be measured by words. All that he knew was that he had no wife, no friends and no home. He was here with his only living family, his brother. Toomgak tried to make him feel as if he belonged to the village, but his heart was heavy. Toomgak called a meeting of the men of the village to talk about the situation. He was worried that such an attitude could infect the village and that the evil spirits could become part of their village. Noongak, the oldest member of the village and one whose words were studied with much care, suggested that Toomgak help him to build a hut of his own. Toomgak gave this a great deal of thought and finally went to his older brother and said, "Rangak, I think that it would be better if you had a place of your own. It is time for all of us to get on with our lives. Nothing can be done for those who are gone. We have prayed to the gods for their souls and now we must go on with our lives and those around us." Rangak said nothing. At first light after the dark god had left for the day he started to build a frame for his place. For the past several days he had been looking at their huts and he knew he could build one that was much better. When he had finished the frame he called to one of the men to help him get some skins. He said to the man, "Where are the big animals that walk on their back legs and have the brown fur?" The man said that there were some only a short ways from their camp; but he said, "We do not have the weapons to kill them and they have gotten into our foods and chased our people. Everyone thinks they are an evil god." Rangak said to the man, "If you will help me build my hut I shall help you make a weapon that will kill the big one." Over the next few days he added some new ideas to the hut. One was a large hole in the center of the top area. Everyone asked him about it and he just smiled and said, "wait until it is finished." Rangak took the other man and one or two more to look for some small saplings that were of the kind that bent but did not break easily. After they had found some he looked for some straight branches from the giant trees. When they had gotten everything they went back to camp. Carefully with his knife he split the young saplings and set

about taking the bark off of one of the split pieces. He then took a flat stone that he had gotten down by the river and proceeded to run it over the flat side of the sapling. He told the others that this would take off all of the rough spots so that they wouldn't get pieces of wood in their hands. He did the same with the rounded side until all of the bark had disappeared. The people in the village were delighted. They had wanted some to teach them how for a long time. The only weapon like this belonged to Toomgak, who used it only on the animals he had to kill. This was much stronger than Toomgak's but they still had nothing to shoot at the big one. Next Rangak took the long branches and cut them until they were about four hands higher than he was when he was standing. He ran the rock over the branch until it was smooth all over. He told the others to do the same with the branches he had brought them. While they were working he went down to the waters edge and looked for some flat stones that were very light. After finding several of the stones he went back to the village where the others were busy working on the long branches. It was a funny sight to see them work for a few minutes and then hand the rock to another for a short time. This happened until all had done some and then the rock went back to the first person. They kept this up until all the branches were scraped clean. They showed them proudly to Rangak who smiled and told them they had done a good job. While they had been doing their work Rangak had been rubbing the stones until all had been made into a sharp pointed object. He got his branch and at one end he cut out, from the center, a place to set the sharpened stone. Rangak took some of the pieces of the cords they had taken out of the little animal with the big feet. He used this to tie the rock on so that it set firmly into the branch. He had figured this kind of a spear out when he was with his wife. The thoughts and memories came flooding back and he realized that he had to do something, and do it soon. When all of the preparations were made he told the men to take their hunting weapon with them and show him where the big one was to be found. They all took their big sticks, with the rocks on the end, and went to find the big one. There was a path that led out of the village and continued toward the back of the mountains. They had been travelling two days when they heard the sound of the big one. It was a mighty roar, one that frightened all of the men. Rangak had been taught the way to kill the big one from his father and he looked for two trees that he could get behind and hold his spear. The men now realized that they had made strong spears, and were ready to try them out. Rangak explained the plan. First they were all to find trees like his. He told them this was important because the big one could chase them to the tree but could not get through it and they could place their spear through the big one. He told them that they had to push the spear in as far as they could and that it had to be in an eye or the soft area at the base of the big one's neck. If they only hurt the animal he would be even more dangerous and they might be killed. Again they heard the sound of the large beast. This time Rangak told them where to go and he went out alone to try and lure the animal into the trap. It did not take long for the animal to see Rangak. First it was curious about this little animal that also walked on it's hind

legs. He had come into his land and he had fought for many years to keep his valley. He would get this animal and maybe have something good to eat, he thought. The big one chased Rangak, and this time Rangak thought that he might not make it to the two trees. He could feel the hot breath of the beast when he saw the trees. He put on one last burst of speed and got his spear up into position as the animal came charging. As with his father, Rangak held the spear in close to his body and as the animal tried to get between the trees he thrust it as hard as he could through the eye and deep into the head of the huge beast. A mighty roar filled the little valley and the men thought that Rangak had been killed. As they came out of their hiding places they found the big one slowly rolling on the ground. Rangak took his knife and cut the giant beasts throat. The beast lay still. All of the men were impressed and were happy for they knew that they no longer had to fear the trips through the mountains. Rangak carefully cut some bark from some trees and set it on the ground with the inside up. He was careful not to hurt the trees and only took the bark from the outside layer. The he cut the huge beast up being careful not to hurt the skin. He cut the skin away from the legs leaving the fur legs with a skinned body. He scraped the skin until all of the wet part was cut lose. Then he slit the leg skins and did the same. He told the men that these small pieces would be very important to them later. After he had gathered all of the fur parts together he started to cut up the meat. He gave some to each of the men to take to their family, and kept a small amount for himself. While cutting the meat he was careful to take out the long white cords. These the men saw were like the ones that they had gotten from the little animal with the big legs. Rangak was very careful with these cords. He found some loose wood and wrapped the cords around them so that they would not get tangled. Just as he was ready to put his meat in the bark they heard another one of the big beasts. Rangak turned to Elask, one of the men, "Now it is your turn. Let's see if you can get this one. He will not come to this tree for he will smell the death of that one." He pointed to the dead remains. Elask was one of the younger men who had followed Rangak. He had just taken a wife and they were living with his family. He had made plans to build his own hut. Elask talked to Toomgak about all of this and Toomgak told him to ask Rangak to help him. He said, "Rangak was the builder in our family. Don't you see what he is doing to build his own hut. He can teach you all you will need to know." That very morning Elask had asked Rangak for his help and Rangak told him to wait until after the hunt and they would talk some more.

CHAPTER 9 Elask started toward the noise while the rest, including Rangak followed at a distance.

Suddenly from the side

nearest the mountain came the beast. It was much larger than the one that Rangak had killed and the man was afraid that Elask would not be able to kill the big one. Elask saw the size of the animal and had also found where he would have two trees to make the animal come through. He saw that as large as the animal was it would never get through the trees. After drawing the animal's attention Elask got another surprise. The animal started toward him on all fours and was running much faster than he was supposed to, according to Rangak. Elask turned and sprinted to the trees with the giant beast gaining at every stride. Suddenly, in front of him were the trees. To make sure that the animal saw where he went he ran through the trees rather than around. He turned and planted his spear. The animal charged the trees and threw one giant leg through the opening, his claws raking Elask. The beast backed up and charged again, this time without putting his giant front leg through the opening. With surprising speed Elask moved forward and at the same time drove the spear through the folds of skin below the jaws. He pushed as hard and as far as he had the strength to do so, and the great one fell to the ground. All of the men cheered. Elask slumped to the ground. He had been able to do this with the wounds dripping blood. The others hurried over and one of them ran down to the river nearby and brought water, in his pouch, to clean the wounds. They were not very deep and Elask was glad of the attention he was getting. He knew that the story of what he did would be always told around the tribal campfire. Following the advice of Rangak he cleaned the skin, stored the meat, and wound the long cords as Rangak had. Everyone was in great spirits. Even Rangak felt good. He had taught them to make a weapon and to gather meat for food. He would next show them how to finish the bow and to make the arrow to use to kill smaller game and fish. He had promised Toomgak that he would never kill the great bird with the white head. There was still one part of the animal they had not gathered and that was the bones. Rangak carried his to the river and cleaned them and told Elask to do the same. When Elask asked him why he said, "There are many things that can be made with these and when we get back I will show you what to do with them." When everyone returned to the village there was much celebrating. All but Toomgak, who realizes his animal friends were no longer safe. He decided that he would talk to all of them after a few days and hope that they would listen. The next morning Rangak called Elask over to him and asked him to help work on the hut. Elask was as curious as the rest about this hut which was different than anything anyone had ever seen. First Rangak said to the young man, "Bring me the large skin that you got. The young man was saddened by this for he had thought that it would be his to use to cover he and his wife when it rained and the soft snow fell from the sky. Still he did as he was told. He was then told to bring the large bones of the beast. This he also did, though he was now more than a little angry since he had been the one to kill the beast. Rangak climbed up to the top of the frame and had Elask pass him up eight of the rib bones. These he fashioned into a circle, taking one of the leg skins and lashing it to the circle, piercing the skin with each of the ribs and tying them where they met the skin.

Elask marveled at this sight for he had never seen any one do what Rangak was doing. He still did not understand why he used his material and not his own. Next Rangak told Elask to climb up the back side with the skin rolled up. This Elask did and when he got to the top Rangak told him to spread the skin, with the fur on the outside over as much of the top as he could, working it down and tying it at each brace in the frame. While Elask was doing this Rangak went and got his skin and set it where the other skin stopped, overlapping it so that there could be no leak. All of this only covered about a fourth of the hut. Rangak said to Elask, "We will go tomorrow and try to get some more. The days are starting to grow shorter and soon the dark god will be with us for a long time. We must finish my hut before there are three more periods." Elask turning to him said, Why your hut? I have killed the beast and done the cleaning and carried the parts home. I was the one who will have the scars with me for the rest of my life." Rangak listened to all of this and then said, " We will leave at first light tomorrow and let us hope that we can get what we need to finish. Bring two spears with you." With that Rangak turned and went to find Toomgak. The next day the two headed out along the same trail but at the end of the first day they turned at a narrow spot in the river and crossed to the other side. "All of the smells will be fresh and maybe the big ones will be here as well." Rangak said. They had only traveled a short distance when they heard the now familiar sound of the giant animal. As they moved closer they saw three of the animals picking over some fish they had gotten from the river. Suddenly one looked up and sniffed at the wind. Making a low growl it shuffled slowly their way. Both of the men looked quickly for the trees and soon they found what they needed. Rangak went first and as the animal caught his scent he stood up looking every bit as tall as some of the trees. Rangak made some movement to attract the giant and it came forward at a run. Rangak ran between the trees and set himself to kill the animal. This time the unexpected happened! As the beast came at him it pushed one of the trees down! Rangak was both stunned and frightened. He yelled for Elask to find a safe place as he ran behind a much bigger tree. The animal charged but Rangak moved quickly still looking for another forked tree. Without warning he tripped over a root and fell to the ground. The huge animal seeing him down charged at him. Rangak raised his spear, planting it's butt firmly on the ground. The animal lunged forward and Rangak guided the spear to the animal's soft throat. The animal fell on the spear and it's force pushed the spear through the flesh at the back of the head. The dying beast fell on Rangak forcing the air out of his lungs. Elask came running and tried to roll the huge animal off of Rangak. When he couldn't he thought about what to do. Suddenly he had an idea. He called to Rangak but got no answer. Was he dead? Why doesn't he answer? Elask thought about what to do and he came to a decision. Following what he was taught by Rangak; cutting the animals skin off from the top he decided to see if cutting off the legs would take off enough weight so that he could move it off of Rangak.

He heard a muffled cry from under the animal and called to Rangak to stay still and then cut off the beast's legs. He called to Rangak to push to his knife side as he pushed the animal off the downed man. Rangak sat up and went down to the river and washed himself off so that he would not have the scent on him as they went after some more of the animals. Also he needed to rest and let the energy flow back into his body. It did not take the beasts long to find the two men. Both men quickly found trees and went about their work. The two men set about to do the cutting and cleaning up and the wrapping of the meat and the skins. Rangak sent Elask back to the village to get some help in carrying everything back to the huts. The people would eat good during the dark time. Elask wasted no time and was back within two days. While he was gone Rangak quickly got another of the animal's, cleaned it and tied all of the skins together. Then he tied the bones and wound the cords that were left. He sat down and soon was lost in thought. What was he going to do? Where was he going? Why was he going anywhere? Soon he fell asleep. Again the dream and again the huge mountain with it's top through the clouds. Again the beautiful girl with hair of red and gold. When he awoke he knew what he had to do. Elask and three others returned and they made their way back to the village. The next day Elask again was called to help Rangak. This time he did it with no complaints. The other man was teaching him more than he could ever learn by himself. After they had finished there was still a space that was not covered. Rangak smiled to himself. All was like he had planned. Quickly he lashed a frame together slightly bigger than the opening. When it was finished he laced the top into skin above the opening. He loosely tied one of the leg bones to the bottom of the flap which was about six inches below the hole. Then he took the skins of the smaller animals that they had killed with their new arrows. When it was done he pulled the loose bone in and rested it against the wall. The flap was closed. Next he did the same thing, making a frame out of ribs for the front door. For a covering, again he used the skins of the little ones and fashioned it so that it could be tied down from the inside. After it was done Rangak asked Toomgak and Elask to come into the hut so that they could see what he had been up to on the inside. When they came in it was dark except for the candlefish burning in the middle of the room on some kind of a stand. Around it were smaller stands. Rangak laughed at their faces and then and went over and braced the covering over the open space so that the light and the air came in to cool them. He showed them his idea about the roof. He took hold of the ribs that hung down and soon pushed them up so that the smoke rose and went out through the opening. Rangak said, "This is a way to let the smoke out of the hut when the dark times are here. The skins will keep the cold and rain out as well as the snow. The heat will stay in so that a person will be able to stay warm when the white powder falls from the sky. To keep the food cold I have dug a hole out next to the door that closes in the hut. The hole has a stick next to it to push the white powder off the covering." Then he showed them his newest idea. The candle-fish was on a long piece of wood and around it there were smaller planks of wood lashed together with the animal cord. Rangak sat on one of the wooden

pieces and showed them how they were set in a flat side with the ribs also lashed in such a way to form a basket. All they had to do was take the flat piece of tree and put it on the basket of ribs. The other two men turned their attention to a strange object in the far corner of the hut. The huge leg bones had been tied together much like the piece where the candle fish rested. Tied tightly to the eight legs were skins. Rangak went over to the object and sat on it and then he lay down so that they could see how it was used. "This keeps me off of the ground and I am always dry.", he said. On the other side of the room, near the covered opening was his fire pit. He had his wood stacked dry on the inside. The fire pit was lined with rocks from the river. Rangak explained that the rocks kept the pit warm and he would not need as much wood to keep a his food hot. Over the next few days all of the village came to see Rangak's hut, and they marveled at this man's work. Toomgak knew that they would soon ask him to let Rangak be their leader. He would have to say "yes." Rangak again had his dream. Now it was clearer and came almost every night and stayed with him most of the day. He had to make several decisions. He knew that they wanted him to be their leader and after the dark time, which was with them now, they would ask. He was confused for he knew that Toomgak would do what was right for the people. He also knew that his ways were not the same as his brother. He would have to take time to think this through before he could make any decision. When he awoke after a restless sleep he knew what that decision would be. He had to find the mountain. He was a dreamer but also a person of great belief. Was the mountain a god or was it a spirit calling to him to come.

CHAPTER 10 Karlek never tired of hearing the stories of his grandfather, Rangak. He wanted to be like him more than anyone else in the world. Perhaps because he had heard the story of grandfather's dream. He had the same dream when he was a small boy. He never told anyone about the dream because the villagers would laugh at him and call him "liar." They always teased him. The light hair of his grandmother was his also and this made him stand out with the dark skin and black hair of the rest of the village. He remembered the story of how grandfather came through the high mountains and across the big river that was next to their village. Grandfather was sick from the travelling in the cold dark days. It was told that he had been found by strangers who were going down river, back from where he had come. When they came to this spot there were a few families that had come earlier by dugout canoe and had settled in, starting a village. Here they left Rangak. He heard the story of how there was one woman in the village that had very light hair and that Rangak knew when he saw her that she was the woman in the dreams. She was gentle and warm and nursed him back to health. After he was well they lived together, and in the custom of the tribe he was taught to make a totem for his ancestors and hers. One of the first things grandfather did was to make a fine place to live. Karlek and his parents lived in the last house that

grandfather made. They still had his tables and chairs. These were things that the white eyes had marvelled over when they first came to the village, to trade with the men of the village. The traders told them that there were chairs and tables made of wood in the homes of all of the white people. These men were different than any the villagers had ever seen. They were much bigger than the people of the village, and they had heavy fur on their faces. Their skin was much lighter than that of the villager's, which pleased Karlek and drew him closer to them. They did not seem to be fighters, like the tribes to the East. They had funny musical things that had strings and they sang and danced for long periods when it was dark and all they had was a fire. They wore clothing different from the people of the village; clothes of heavy cloth. When they walked in the snow they had round things on their feet that helped them to stay on top of the soft powder, much like the ones of his tribe. The men had stayed for most of the period of the light god. During this time they traded with the villagers especially with Natchusek, who had many furs and skins that he had made into coats and foot coverings. While they were there some of the tribe learned their language as did the outsiders learn the language of his people. Karlek learned quickly. Soon the traders had gathered the skins and were ready to leave. Thanking the villagers they told them they would return when the light came back,in what they called a year. This was a period of time they used. The village started to use it as well as a few of the words of the white people. A year had gone by and in the late spring the men came back. This time Karlek tried to find a way to learn what they wrote and more of their language. His parents were proud for this would show everyone that Karlek was more than different; he would be looked on as a leader. Many of the young men in the village also realized this as well and they made secret plans to get the strangers to take Karlek with them when they left. Karlek, often spent hours looking at the distant range of mountains that could be seen to the southeast. On certain days he thought he could see the giant mountain that had appeared in his dream. The same mountain that his grandfather had told Karlek's father and mother about many times before he had died. Rangak's woman also would tell how they had left the village and tried to find the mountain but were never able to go far because of the driving winds and snows. Karlek was very good with his hands and had made a new style dugout shortly before his fifteenth birthday. The craft was much wider than the others in the village and rode higher on the water. It could carry more furs and food than the others. He would sit lower in the little boat and used a longer paddle that pushed the boat through the rapids and streams much faster than the older boats. He would spend long hours in the forests across the river looking for the giant bird that he had only seen once, when he was about eight. The bird was like the one that his grandfather had told his father

about and his father had passed down the story to him. He remembered that the giant bird was black with a beak that was the color of the sun, a white tail that fanned out and a white head down to it's neck. He remembered that the bird had swooped low before him, it's wings fanning him as it flew off into the trees on the other side of the river. The bird had never been seen again and many had forgotten that it was ever at the village. Karlek did not. He was sure that this was the bird that had guided his grandfather through the mountains to the west and north. The boy thought that he would find a way to get to the mountain and to stand at it's base as his grandfather and his father had wanted to for so many years. The boy had spent much time around the visitors to their village, trying to learn their ways and customs. One of the men, Leonid, had taken an interest in Karlek and started to teach him how to write and helped him with the words. Karlek could now talk easily with the strangers and many times he would act as the go between with the villagers and the outsiders. Liamuk and Natchusek knew what Karlek wanted and they felt for him as they saw him being pulled in two directions; one the old ways of the village and the other, the ways of the outsiders. How often the boy had thought of talking to his friend Leonid about going with him back to his village. He knew that if he did go he would probably never return. As he lay on his bed thinking about this, he fell asleep. The mountain was clear. It towered over the land and was consumed by the clouds and then rose above them to reach toward the sky. The land at the bottom was green, waterfalls jettisoned from the sides of the great mountain, below the clouds, crashing on the rocks and falling into a lake. He could see the ones with the great horns on their head and the big brown one that stood on it's back legs. He saw the great bird with it's wings glistening in the bright light that shown down from the lofty peaks. The mountain towered over the other peaks and seemed to look down on the land as if it were the ruler of all it saw. At the base of the mountain there was a girl. She had light color hair, bright like the sun, with red like a sunset. Her eyes sparkled and there was a glow about her much like the bright lights that appeared in the sky once in a great while during the dark times. Next to the woman was a man but he could not see what he looked like. He only knew that the man had light hair. Karlek woke from the dream with a start. What was this dream? Had he dreamt the same dream that his grandfather had so many times? More than that there seemed to be a meaning in the dream that he had to understand. Karlek talked to his family about the dream and he also told Leonid. To his surprise Leonid told him that there was such a mountain and that he had been near it many times when they went on the hunt and came to their village. Using dogs Leonid told him they pull a sled similar to the one that Leonid used in Mother Russia, they were able to get to the mountain from their village in about three days. Karlek was excited when he heard all of this and ran to tell his father. Natchusek listened to the story his son told him, then called a

meeting of the men of the village. He also asked Leonid and some of the other traders to come, along with Karlek. For Karlek this was more than a surprise. None of the boys could come to the meetings. They first had to reach their eighteenth year and go through the tribal rites. The others also wondered why this boy was brought before them and told to sit with them. Natchusek told them that this was no ordinary meeting. He reminded them of the story that Rangak told of his dream. Most of them, who were older, remembered the story of his grandfather. Still they were puzzled about why it came up at this meeting and again why the boy and the traders were here. Natchusek told Karlek to tell of the dream he had two nights ago. After Karlek told the men, Leonid stood before the group. "What you have just heard about the mountain is true," he said. "It is the way that Karlek has described it. We passed it on the way here and we will pass it on the way back. This is not a dream. It is a sign that you had better study," Leonid said. "Karlek has the special gift that we do not have and he should be able to use it. But first he must go to the mountain," said Leonid. There were murmurs among the tribal men and finally his father told him to leave the meeting and go home. It was a clear night and Karlek walked toward his home wondering if he would ever be able to see either the great bird or the mighty mountain. What about the girl, he wondered. Was this the girl that was his grandmother, or was this someone that was meant for him? His mind brought back the dream as he walked slowly in the faded light that was the only darkness at this time of the year. Suddenly from the air above he heard a shrill cry, and there in the dim light he saw the giant bird. The men in the meeting heard it also and ran out of the meeting hut to see what it was that made such a noise. There it was just as Karlek, and his grandfather had spoke about. The bird came closer to the village and then, as if it were expected, it flew down next to Karlek and landed at his feet. Everyone was dumfounded. Here was the proof that the men of the village needed to make their decision. Still the bird had not moved and Karlek went to touch it's silky wings. A cry went up from Karlek's mother as she saw what he was going to do. She was afraid that the bird would attack and hurt the boy, maybe kill him. The bird ruffled his feathers but did not move, except to turn and stare into the boy's face. Then without a cry the bird lifted himself off of the ground, circled the village once and came back fanning the boy with his wings, just as in the dream, and flew off across the river and into the forest. The village was astounded. All of the boys ran to Karlek, who now was their new found hero. No more teasing or calling of names. This was one of them that the bird came to; not one of the adults. The men of the village murmured among themselves as they returned to the meeting. There were decisions that had to made, and conditions that had to be put on Karlek. They knew that he had to leave and find the mountain. He had to search the world that they had not seen; but they wanted him to come back and tell them what he found. The conditions were set and the next day Karlek was again brought back to the tribal council to hear the words of the leaders. Natchusek told Liamuk about the meeting both before the coming of the bird and after. He knew she would be like him, both happy and sad.

They were about to see their son leave before his time, for he had not yet passed the rites of manhood, yet he was going to do things that no others, from their village, had ever done. He would come back because of the orders of the tribal leaders--but when. The rules were clear. He could go and live with Leonid and his family. He could try and find the mountain and stand at it's foot. He must try and find the girl and bring her back to their village. He must learn all that he can of the ways of the others so that he would be able to take his place as a leader and be able to speak for them in matters that were the ways of the outsiders. He must always be good for he represented the village and his family. He should always remember his roots. The stories of the old ones. The stories of the totem poles. There was much to be done before Leonid and his people would leave. More furs were gathered and the trading started to wind down for the year as the white powder again fell. Liamuk made more pants and shirts for him. His father made an extra set of the round shoes they wore under their leggings when they walked in the deep snows. Karlek made himself another set of leggings and also made two more knives out of the bone of the big one. One was for him and the other was safely stored in his pack, both for safety and for a gift. For the rest of the time before they were to leave, the boy was busy with all of his new friends. He now knew he was special, very special. The older girls looked at him shyly and blushed when he looked back at them. The boys played their games but he was always the one to say what game and he was always the leader, the one to turn to for advice. The men of the village met frequently with the traders and Karlek. The rules were repeated over and over. One day while the sun still stayed out for most of the day, though it was now showing less and less, Karlek got into his dugout canoe, taking some food with him he went to the forests on the other side of the river. He had decided that he would try and find the great bird. He also felt the nearness of his grandfather and he wanted to walk some of the lands that the older one had taken on his way to this land.

CHAPTER 11 The first snows of the late summer came and the traders were ready to leave for their village. Karlek was both happy and sad. He looked forward to the great adventure. He knew that when he found the mountain he would be able to come back to the village. He also knew that when he found the mountain that there would be other sights and tasks for him. New adventures would come his way. He remembered his obligations to the men of his village and as he said his goodby's he reminded them that he would return with the traders, next summer. When he said this there was a lump in his throat and he suddenly felt a cold chill come across his back. For the first time he felt fear. The next morning dawned with a sullen look. The skies were grey and there was no sun. After travelling for several hours it started to rain. It was a cold rain and blew across the little hunting party. They knew that the winter was approaching and that they had to move quickly, for they did not bring clothes for the severe cold. For three days they moved at a steady pace, wondering if Karlek could stay with them, and they were pleased with his stamina. Leonid was proud of the boy. He had always wanted a son, but instead he was the father of Ivanya, a beautiful young girl who looked a great deal like her mother, tall and thin, with long raven black hair. Her skin was soft and clear. Her body had started to shape itself into that of a woman. Leonid had given much thought about the problem of the two young people being thrown together in a small area. He had always had hot blood in his veins and knew from his own past what could happen. On the fourth day there was a break in the weather and the sun showed briefly. Leonid turned to Karlek and said, "Keep an eye to the east side of the trail and watch carefully through the clouds." Karlek did not know what to make of this statement, and then he recalled what Leonid had told him of seeing the mountain on the trips to his village. As they moved forward he failed to watch the trail and suddenly he felt himself slipping down the side of the narrow trail. The trail had turned abruptly and he had missed the turn. All of the men laughed at him, and he also laughed for he knew that if he could laugh at his mistakes others would not take him too seriously. As the clouds broke in front and to the right hand side of Karlek. He stopped. There it was! Just as he had seen in his dreams, a mountain that towered over everything. Karlek gasped at it's sight. He could see the craggy top glistening in the sun. The clouds seemed to gather around it like smoke rising from a fire. He wished he could see the entire mountain but the haze and the clouds covered the ground around the mountain and it was surrounded by other mountains, though not as tall. Karlek turned to Leonid and said, "What do they call the mountain?" "It has no name," said Leonid. "We have never been able to name it. Perhaps you can think of what to call `your' mountain." Leonid added, "Some of our people who have seen the mountain have called it, BOLSHAIA GORA, the big mountain." After stopping for their noon meal the group continued on hoping to cover as much distance as possible before the darkness set in. The air had turned cold and the soft white flakes had started to fall once again. Karlek was trying to figure out what he could call this mountain that would help to describe it to his tribe. This would take some time and he was too tired to think. The sight of the mountain had simply wore him out. What he wanted now was to sleep.

Leonid saw that the boy was starting to tire and he proposed that they camp at a small lake near the trail. After they had set up their ground covers, Leonid took Karlek over to the lake and the two of them started to fish for their dinner. Karlek had brought his home made bone hooks and the line that was made from the strings of the great brown animal. He dug in the dirt with his knife and soon had some large black worms, which he placed on the hooks and let the float out into the water. Leonid had never seen this way of catching fish and he watched, with interest, his young friend go about his fishing. It did not take long. The water erupted in a giant swirl. A long silver fish jumped into the air, twisting, trying to get the little hook out of it's mouth. The fish crashed to the water, it's tail sending up a shower of water. Karlek pulled the cord back toward him, wrapping it around a short stick so that it would not get tangled on the ground. Soon the fish seemed to tire and the boy brought the fish close to the lake's shoreline. Leonid quickly grabbed the squirming fish and put it in his pouch. He would have to tell the others of Karlek's way of catching dinner. Soon Karlek had enough fish for all of them. Leonid would grab them as quickly as the boy could catch them. After the meal Leonid told the men how the boy had caught the fish. The men were impressed with Karlek's skill and one of the group gave him one of the fur hats they all wore. The young man felt both happy and strange. It was as though he had passed from being a child to becoming a man. He knew that more would be expected of him now and he was confused. It was three more days before the little party reached their homes. The cold had started to come on and the days were growing shorter. The snow falling as they saw the fire lights of the town. The towns people saw them coming and the families of the men rushed to greet them and see what they had brought back. As the party of traders and their new friend reached the village, families ran to each other and huddled together sharing smiles, tears, hugs and handshakes. Karlek felt the sadness that goes with loneliness. He now wondered if he should have made this journey. He was not one of them and already he missed his family. What was in his future? Leonid quickly brought his family over to where Karlek was standing. "Karlek," he said, "this is my wife, Kathrine, and my daughter, Ivanya." Both of them looked at this fair haired boy with the dark skin. "I am glad to know you," said Karlek, speaking the words he had learned from Leonid. The mother and daughter were delighted that he could speak their language. "We must go to the dacha and have Karlek taste our food," Kathrine said. "You will both be surprised at what I have cooked." Leading the way, Leonid was happy for he could see that the boy liked his wife. He still did not know how his daughter felt for she had not said anything. Ivanya was just coming to the age when other boys and men would start to notice her. She had long black hair that shined in the light. Her teeth were as bright as the powder that fell from the sky. She was not as dark as the girls of his village. Ivanya was tall for her age and it was obvious that she would be taller than most of the women at their home. She was already pretty, and she moved with the grace of an animal. Her face was not as rounded as the rest of the people here or in his village. Her supple body showed strength. Karlek had not ever seen a girl like this and it stirred something in him.

As they entered the small cottage, Karlek could smell the food and laughed. Leonid laughed with him. The treat was FISH. As they sat down, Leonid told them the story of how Karlek taught all of them how to catch fish a new and easier way. This was different kind of fish than the boy had ever eaten. He asked, "What does this fish look like?" Ivanya spoke up for the first time and told him of the big red fish and it's cousin the silver fish. Leonid told him that the fish came when the weather started to warm up and the days became long. "When the time comes after the dark days I will take you and we will see if your hooks will work on these monsters." he said as a laugh grew in his belly and showed in his eyes. After they finished eating it was dark and the family had little light except for the fire. Karlek remembered how his family would take the fat from the big animals and melt it to make light in a bowl. He asked Leonid if he had any of the big animals around. Leonid said they would get some the next day; but for now they had all better get some sleep. With that he went to one part of the room with Kathrine. Ivanya laughed and told him that they would sleep near the fire for they did not have the great robes that covered her parents. All of this was strange to Karlek, but he was tired and tomorrow he could ask all of his questions. For now it was to sleep and to dream. Karlek was up now having been awakened by the smell of some new kind of food. When he asked what the smell was he was told that this was a food that they ate every morning. It was warm and tasted good with the sweet powder that was on the table. He saw how they all put the powder on and smiled when they tasted the substance. Feeling a part of the family and not just an outsider anymore, he asked all of the questions that he could think of. So many, in fact, that they all started to laugh at his questioning ways. Kathrine saw that he did not understand their laughter as well as some of their words. She said to him, "Karlek, we are not laughing at you. I have never met someone who wanted to know so much so quickly. When you go to school in a few days you will learn much." "What is school? asked Karlek. "It's a place where all of the boys and some of the girls go to learn to read and write and use numbers." Ivanya said. Karlek was now worried. He did not know how to read their words, and had never written anything but sign pictures in the dirt. What were numbers? He knew that he was going to have to work hard so that he would make them proud of him, as if they were his own parents. As soon as the meal was done they all dressed in warm clothes and got ready to leave. "Where are we going?" asked the boy. He did not have the heavy pull over thing that Leonid put on. It looked warm and it felt soft. The only clothes he had were the ones he brought with him. It was all that he owned. He suddenly felt different again. He was an outsider and he remembered how the people in the village felt when others came down the river and stopped but could not talk to them for they did not know the language. A sadness came over him and Ivanya saw it at once. "Karlek," she said, "one day out of every seven we do no work. On this day we go to pray to our God. Do you pray to God?" Karlek smiled and said that his people pray to many gods. He was surprised to learn that they prayed to

only one God and the God's son and the son's mother Marushka. This he did not understand, but then most of their ways, he thought, were a little strange. It was time to go to the big place where the villagers met. There was much smiling at Karlek as they entered the building, which was something like the council room of his tribe. At the front of the room was a table that was too high to sit at and eat. The table was covered with red material with bright yellow lines down each side. It was bound at the ends and had some kind of writing on the front of the cloth. There was a man dressed in bright colors who wore a funny hat. The man was swinging a little bowl on a string that cradled it like the bowls that he had back at his own home. This was the way that they carried the light during the dark days. There was some smoke coming from the bowl and a new smell, unlike anything he had ever smelled before. The man said words that Karlek didn't understand. At different times all of the people would say words that had no meaning to the boy and he felt as if he was lost in the middle of a forest that had no paths. Soon everyone sat down on the log benches. The men and the older boys sat in the front and the women and the girls along with the small children sat in the back. Karlek was surprised to learn that they did this on the same day each week. No one worked that day, except for cooking. After the man, who he found out was the spiritual head of the village, had read from a big book they all sang a song and left. Karlek had never seen a book and after most of the people had left Leonid took him up to the front to show him the book. It was filled with characters that he could not understand and this made him feel more uncomfortable. That night Ivanya brought out a school book that she had used when she was learning to read. "We have been here for seven of the long winters. I was nine years old when we came to this place." said the girl. I know how you must feel because I was homesick for my friends and places that I knew." she said. Karlek nodded in agreement and then asked her where they were. "Our people call it Knik. It is named for one of the little animals back where we came from." Ivanya said. Their talk turned to the book and how he was going to read. "You will probably start with the small boys and then as you learn you will move up. I am in the last class." the girl said. "I will help you at home so that you can go faster" They started to work on the reading but the light was so bad they could not see. "Tomorrow I will make us something to see with" he said. We can make better lights and I want to read quickly." Karlek said with a smile. The next day brought little light and Karlek and Leonid went to where they kept the meat for the winter. Karlek found what he wanted. There was one of the big brown animals that were so dangerous back at his village. He smiled for when the sun god started to stay longer he would show them his tricks with the light spears that they had laughed about; but this was not the time. Karlek cut off a great bit of the white oily meat around the red meat. When they got back to the house Karlek got a big pot and put the oily meat inside. Soon the meat started to boil and became a liquid, and with it came a smell of the trees. Karlek had put some fresh bark in the pot with the other meat. After it had boiled for a short while he took it off of the fire and out to the snow that was

on the ground. He set the pot down and covered the sides with the snow to cool the pot. In a few minutes he took a small pot and put a dried piece of bark fiber in the middle. As he held the fiber up he poured some of the liquid into the pot. After a short time he covered the top with the cold snow. As it cooled it melted on top of the liquid that was already starting to harden. After letting it harden, he turned the pot over and let the soft white powder fall out. The oil had hardened. Karlek took the little pot into the house and there he put some of the fire to the piece of bark. The fibers burst into flame and then started to burn at a steady pace giving off light around it. The family could not believe what they were seeing. What a clever young man thought Catherine, and she looked at her daughter. We will see, she thought. The next day Karlek told Leonid that he was going to look for some special wood. When he returned with fresh green wood everyone gathered around to see what he was going to do with the large branches. He soon had the wood set in three piles. By this time it was dark and they would have to wait until the next day to see what he was going to do. When the next day came he was up and ready to start his little task. Ivanya looked over at him and said, "Today we are going to start school. It is time for you to join us." Without saying anything else she put on her clothes and told Karlek that they would eat and then go to the school house. Shortly after their meal they went to the large building where all of the people had gathered on the day of no work. Seated in front, facing the benches was the man who had led the meeting. He welcomed Karlek and had each of the young people tell him their name. He was asked to tell about his home, family and why he had come to their village. Karlek was glad, now, that he had learned as much of their language as he did for this made them feel that he cared for them. He told them of the village and the river that ran next to it. He told them of the forest where the great bird lived. He told of his parents and his grandfather. He did not tell them of his dream. Leonid told him that it would be better if the people did not know what he was looking for and why. The leader told Karlek where to sit so that he would be with others more his size. Next to him sat a boy that was about the same age. He was bigger than Karlek and his eyes seemed to always be laughing. "I'm Nicholi," the boy said. "What do you do at your village when the darkness comes?" asked Nicholi. Karlek answered, "The dark does not always bother us and many of us go out and play when the wind has gone. Some of the men go hunting for the little animal with the big feet. It is white and very good to eat and to make pouches." he said. " Most of the time we listen to the stories of our people who came before. We learn much from these stories." The other boy laughed and said to Karlek, "Here you will find that this is the time when they send us to school. The little ones go to school all year long, except for the great feast of light. The older girls help their mothers and the old people of the village that can no longer get their own food. I am a hunter. I am the best of the boys and so they do what I tell them." Karlek said to the boy, "why are you in the same part of the school that I am in, if you are so smart." Nicholi stood up quickly and grabbed Karlek by his new covering, made by Kathrine.

As he was about to hit Karlek he saw him pull out the little bone knife with the funny handle that had pictures of animals and fish on its front and back. The knife did not look like it could hurt anyone but he did not know what to do. He knew if he backed down he would no longer be the leader of the older boys. The girls, especially Ivanya, would laugh at him and he would become very lonely. He dropped the front of the garment and said loudly, "I bet you can"t even cut a piece of wood with that little thing." Karlek knew that he had to let the other boy keep his pride. His father had told him, many times, "If you always let the other person have a way out he will show you his thanks when you least expect it. This is how you make a friend of one who has no friends." Karlek turned to the other and said that he was probably right. The other boy could do nothing but look at this new one who was smart enough to make him look bad in front of everyone. The rest of the day was much harder for the newcomer. He had a great deal of trouble keeping up with the words in the book and the others laughed at the way he said the words. It was not to make him feel bad, because they all liked him, since he had stood up to Nicholi. There was much kidding and imitating his attempts to read. Karlek joined in the laughter. Their teacher saw this and was much relieved that this native would at least try to learn their ways. Perhaps he could learn enough to become civilized.

CHAPTER 12 At the end of thirty days he had learned enough to start reading the history of the people of this village. This was a new and exciting time for him. He had never known others outside of his village. He remembered the stories that his father had told him of grandfathers seeing the big ships and the men who came from those ships. He wondered if these were the same tribe that his grandfather had seen. Each night after he had eaten he went to his pile of wood and started to carve little bowls. The difference in these bowls was that they were very small at the top and were rounded in the body so that they sat flat on the table. After they were cleaned out he made several small holes in a close set pattern around the bowl in two lines. The first line was at the top of the large rounded part and the second line was nearer the neck of the bowl. At the top of each bowl he had a small hole on each side. He put a piece of the wicking material in each bowl. He had tied a small pebble to the wick so that it hung straight down. He put a small twig, with the wick tied to it, across the bowl and then poured the hot fat into the bowl, coming up to the

first set of holes. He was careful to make sure that the holes were not covered. After he had made several of the bowls he had found the large piece of wood that he was saving for the last bowl. This he made in the same way and when all were done he called the family to the table. They had been watching for many days and were curious about what was being done. He told Ivanya to get a lighting stick that they used to start fires. When she brought it to him he carefully lit the wick and they saw light coming from the holes in the bowl. He lit the wick in the big bowl and they were surprised to see how much light it gave off in the room. Karlek was proud of what he had done and he could see that they were pleased. He told them that they would not have to use torches, which could start fires in the room. Now each one had their own light so that they could move about when it was dark and not cause the others to wake up. He also told them that the little lights could be carried with them when they went to visit another and again no torch would have to be used. After each one got their light and they put all of them on the table the room was lighter than it had ever been. There were two lights left and the next day he took them to school and gave one to the teacher and one to Nicholi. The teacher smiled and thanked the boy. Nicholi had heard about the lights from Ivanya, who told everyone about this wonderful new thing that made the room like the day. He did not understand why Karlek would give him one of these precious lights after the way that he had treated the newcomer. Karlek had passed ahead of Nicholi in school and this made Nicholi even more bitter toward the young man who Ivanya seemed to like. Karlek knew what he was doing. He knew that the boy was not very well liked by anyone and that he had no friends. Most of the people their age had made friends easily with Karlek. One day after school was over he called to Nicholi, "Let me show you how we can make some of these to trade for furs." Nicholi was confused, as usual. On one hand he knew that no one liked him, but he was worried that all of the others would take his leadership away from him by turning to this stranger. Karlek knew what was going on in the other boys mind. After all didn't he go through the same thing when he was back home and everyone teased him and said that he was different. After the big bird came it was different; then he was the leader. Now he knew that the other boy had to be the leader but he could help him and make him a friend, a valuable friend. Karlek said, "If others come here to trade we could start our own trading business and make some money, and get things that will help us to be on our own." Nicholi thought for a few moments. He knew that this was a good idea and was angry because he did not think to do this himself. He also knew that this was a chance for him to not always be the dumb one in the village. He said to Karlek, "What do you want me to do, and how will we split the profits?" Karlek quickly said, "You will help me make the lights and we will trade them to the

villagers. Do others come to th 4343 4343 4343

4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343

4444 4444

4545¤ 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545µ 4545§ 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545- 4545 4545 4545! 4545" 4545# 4545$ 4545% 4545& 4545' 4545( 4545) 4545* 4545+ 4545, 4545- 4545. 4545/ 45450 45451 45452 45453 45454 45455 45456 45457 45458 45459 4545: 4545; 4545< 4545= 4545> 4545? 4545@ 4545A 4545B 4545C 4545D 4545E 4545F 4545G 4545H 4545I 4545J 4545K 4545L 4545M 4545N 4545O 4545P 4545Q 4545R 4545S 4545T 4545U 4545V 4545W 4545X 4545Y 4545Z 4545[ 4545\ 4545] 4545^ 4545_ 4545` 4545a 4545b 4545c 4545d 4545e 4545f 4545g 4545h 4545i 4545j 4545k 4545l 4545m 4545n 4545o 4545p 4545q 4545r 4545s 4545t 4545u 4545v 4545w 4545x 4545y 4545z 4545{ 4545| 4545~ 4545ýÿÿÿ 4545€ 4545e village?" Nicholi told him that they were near the open sea and that down from the lake there was a trail that led to the open waters. "This is where our people came when they came to settle the land. When the long days come you will be able to see the ocean. Once in a while there are some ships that come here to trade bringing foods and goods. Many people know that we are here in this land." said Nicholi. Karlek was silent thinking about all of this and how he could put it to use. Suddenly he remembered the great bird and the words of the council. He knew that he would have to go back when the year was over and the long days had come. He also thought of the mountain. He knew what he would call it now. His people had a word. It was DENALI, the "high one." Karlek asked Nicholi what did they call this land. Nicholi answered, "Our people call it, "ALAYEKSHA." This is a word that some tribes from the place where are grandfathers landed many years ago gave to us. They had landed to the north of us and on the coast with a nice bay. We have heard the story of how they landed and tried to make friends with the people in a village. Our people left and headed out to sea and there was a great wave that picked up their ship and tossed it away from the village. When the storm stopped the ships went. There was no more village. Everything had been swept out to the open sea" Somehow Karlek remembered he had heard part of this story before but he could not remember when or where. Perhaps he had heard the story from the other tribes that went back and forth on the river at his village. Maybe he had heard the story from Leonid. The story tugged at him and he made up his mind to find out where he had heard it and why it seemed to mean so much to him. Karlek and Nicholi agreed that they would split the everything they got after the trading was done. Nicholi would keep the profits until it was time for Karlek to return to his people. For some reason going back bothered Karlek for he felt happy and loved in this village. How strange it was for him to know that he was wanted in both villages and that he was going to have to make a choice soon. But there was no choice for he had given his word to his parents and the leaders of the village. He also knew that on the way back he would go to the mountain and something would happen to him while he was at "Denali." For now there was much to do each day. He had all of the usual chores and schooling to do but also he had to teach Nicholi how to make the lamps. To his surprise he found that Nicholi was very good with the knife and one day he said to him, "Here is a extra knife that I had made before I came here. I brought it to give to a friend. I want you to have it and to know that we will always be friends." Nicholi was astounded. No one had ever called him a friend, and certainly no one ever had given him something out of friendship.

Happily he went over to the other boy and grabbed him in a hug that tore the breath out of Karlek. "Stop! your squeezing the life out of me, you big bear." The boys sat down and laughed. "When you come back after your trip home I will have all of our goods and monies. Nicholi said. " What I can make while you are gone will still be half yours, and when you get back we will start our own company and go to sea and trade along the coast with other villages. There are many different kinds of peoples along the coast to the south, as well as some of my people. Come let us get to work. We must make a boat load of these so that we can be rich." For the next several weeks the two were always seen working on the lamps. The rest of the villagers all wanted one or two of the little ones and at least one of the big one's. Along with all of this Karlek realized that he had to learn how to count money and to read the currency of other countries. Leonid and Kathrine were proud of what the boy had done since he was here. He was liked by everyone, especially their daughter, Ivanya, who seemed always to be around when Karlek was alone. She helped him with his studies and the language, which he now spoke almost as well as the rest of the villagers. She knew that he was something special and that he was to be hers. Karlek knew little about girls, except that they were weak and could not paddle a dugout canoe or shoot arrows and hit anything. In fact Karlek was not sure why he always had that certain feeling when he and Ivanya lay down for the evening or when they washed up and had to change their clothes. He only knew he liked the feeling and that he would tell it to no one. One day as the light again started to come and they had a few hours of light he told Nicholi that there was another thing that he would show him how to make and they could get much in trade for them. Nicholi knew by now that whenever Karlek said anything it was true. A few minutes later the two boys started to look for fallen trees. When they had found one that was large and fresh Karlek told Nicholi that they would have to take all of the branches off so that they could make a large trading boat out of the trunk. Nicholi first laughed and then looked at Karlek and knew that he was serious. After a short time they came across a newly fallen tree that seemed to suit Karlek's purpose. The boys worked all day and finally got the branches from the largest part of the tree. They knew to save the branches for paddles. "This tree is big enough to make two dugouts." Nicholi said, "Why two when we will both be needed to paddle one this big?" "Yes," said Karlek "but we may be able to trade it for things to help us make more money. Maybe someone from another village will get it from us." It was long and tedious work and many times Nicholi thought that this time Karlek had made a mistake. The burning out of the inside of just one of the boats took eight days of light. The inside had to be finished. After that they had to scrape all of the rough bark from the wood and smooth it down. Then they had to make paddles, and finally they had to get some large skins to make a tight covering so that nothing would get wet from the ocean spray. By the time that this done most of the day was in light. Karlek knew that he would be going back to his village to tell them of all that he had learned and to tell them of the mountain. There was one other thing that he had to tell them; but before he could he had to talk to Leonid.

Karlek and Nicholi had made many of the lights and they had done well with them, but Karlek told Nicholi to make many more, of all sizes, while he was gone. The boy did not question his friend. He was the only one that knew of Karlek's plan.

CHAPTER 13 The traders decided to leave earlier than usual so that they could take Karlek to the mountain. Karlek was beside himself. He had always carried his dream and now he was to make it a reality. This was what his grandfather could not do, but he would see it through his eyes for his grandfather. The morning that they were to leave all of the villagers came to say goodbye to this stranger who had become one of them. There were presents for him and for his parents. Ivanya came to him and gave him a long piece of wool knitted with bright colors. He knew that this was a neck cover. His eyes misted as he looked at the girl who had grown even more beautiful during the year. He could feel her warmth and it warmed him. Nicholi was the last to come over to him. He grabbed his friend in a bear-like hug and in his eyes were tears. He whispered in Karlek's ear and then went back to where he was working on the other boat. Karlek waved to the people as the men went around the lake and headed to the north. The ground was still frozen and they were able to make good time. This trip was different for this time they had dogs with them to pull the sleds. Leonid laughed and said, "The people will be so glad to get you back we will not have enough room for all the goods that they will have for us." They all laughed so loud that the dogs turned and looked at the men. By the end of the second day they were again following the river which helped guide them back to his village a year ago. A year that was almost a lifetime to the boy from the north country. He had learned to do things that made him feel that he could do anything, go anywhere and see all that there was to see in the world. The third night Karlek told Leonid what he had been thinking about. They discussed the matter until the darkness came. Karlek told him that he now felt as if he were part of Leonid's family. He was at peace in the village. He also told him that he knew the world was bigger than when he had lived at his village and that he wanted to see more of it as well as make his way. Leonid had known this for some time as he had watched the boy and the villagers spend time together. He realized that the boy had grown,

not only in body, but also in his grasp of things around him. He knew that this was a special person who had a special gift of seeing what was to come, and he had seen how everyone let Karlek be a part of their lives. How Nicholi had not only accepted Karlek, but let him make the decision for all of the young people. He also saw how Ivanya looked at the boy. He remembered that it was the way that Kathrine and he had looked at each other before their marriage. He was glad that she liked this boy. What the feelings of the boy towards his daughter that he did not know. That night when the boy told him that he wanted to live with them and learn more of the world around them he was not surprised. Leonid told him, "If your family will let you we will have you with us for as long as you like, but you will have to do what you are told." Karlek assured him that he would do all that Leonid asked of him as long as he could still go to school. He knew that he still had much to learn. The following day the party turned a little to the east and seemed to follow an animal trail. They were going up but it was very slight. That day just before the darkness came he saw it again. The mountain towered above the other mountains near it. Now it seemed to have two peaks. There were no clouds around it this time and he was amazed at the size of the mountain. It was larger than he had ever imagined. He had never been this close. As the darkness came he watched the mountain, as if expecting it to move, until he could see it no more. Later that night they told him that they would be at the base of the giant in two days. The boy was so excited that he could not sleep that night and when the next day came a violent snow storm hit their little camp. There was nothing to do but stay under cover. The men smoked their pipes and Karlek slept and dreamt The next day the group continued the trip to the mountain. The ground was much different than the land where his family or Leonid's lived. The ground was soft and slippery. The storm had made it difficult for them to travel with any speed and they decided to make camp earlier that day. The group was now going steadily up and there were many high mountains that seemed to surround them as they went forward. In the middle of the day Karlek looked over to his right and saw a mountain of ice and dirt. He was surprised to see such a mountain, and asked Leonid about the sight. Leonid told him that other tribes told them that ice mountain was there long before they had come to the land. The tribe called themselves "Matsu's" and had been there for several hundred years. They said that the rocks and ice were joined by the ice god. It had stayed the same over the years to show the power of the ice god. In a short time they came to a river and it was decided that they would cross there and camp for the day. Denali was much clearer now and Karlek knew that tomorrow he would be there. That night he slept a deep sleep. The dream returned and on the coming day he would see the girl on the mountain. The day dawned bright and clear. There was a hint of frost but it soon gave way to the warmth of the sun. Karlek looked out at the mountain and saw that it once again had it's ring on, as he called the cloud band that circled the middle of the mountain. The camp was soon cleared and the dogs harnessed to their sleds.

They were moving in a northwesterly direction, away from the river and between two low lying glaciers of mud and ice. The ice god had been here too, thought the boy. By nightfall they had gotten close enough so that Karlek could make out all of it's features. It was more beautiful than he had imagined. Giant trees surrounded the lower parts and seemed to reach up into the clouds. Melting snow and ice formed waterfalls tumbling down in cascading torrents. That night he slept lightly, wondering if the girl of the mountain would be there tomorrow. Soon he was in a deep sleep, dreaming the dream of his grandfather. Shortly after daybreak the boy left the traders, telling them that he would meet them on the other side of the mountain. They were laughing with him telling him to look out for the girl, because she might be a bear. Karlek climbed the base part of the mountain always going to the side away from the sun, though it was now light for most of the day and well into the evening. As he climbed he looked for familiar signs from the dream. On he went not seeing the spot that he looked for; the spot where the girl was standing. As he rounded a large rock he looked up and there standing several feet away he saw a creature unlike any he had ever seen. The animal was a dirty white with long curved bones on it's head. Was this an animal like the bear, that would charge him? He did not think so for it stood looking at him and when he took a step forward it headed for higher ground. The land at this spot of the mountain had many colors. Small clumps of bushes were dark green. Clumped grass was soft to walk on. Bright red and orange plants grew up from the dark parts of the ground. Trees seemed to come out of the mountain, growing on outcroppings. As he continued his trek, Karlek felt that he was walking with his grandfather. They were as one and he was living the dead one's dream. The boy was humbled by the experience. He knew that he would never be the same and that he must follow his grandfather's way. He must look for more and build a life of his own. It was strange that all of these feelings seemed to be the ones that he had spoken to Leonid about. The sun had started it's journey to the night and he knew that he would only have a few hours of light left before he had to meet the others. He quickened his pace though walking across the ice and the dirt and rocks did not let him move as fast as he would have liked. After about three hours Karlek knew that he would not meet up with the others before dark. He was not afraid of staying alone. He had his knife and a spear and some dried meat of the one they called "deer." There was always plenty of water to drink. The boy started to move a little faster, hoping to be around the mountain by the time it was dark. He thought that if he made it to the other side he would be able to see their fires and guide himself there at night. Karlek noticed that there were more openings in the rocks, like fingers reaching out to him. He said to himself that this might be a quicker way to the other side and so he went up the one that looked to go deeper through the mountain. After a while Karlek decided that he had wasted enough time and went back to where the opening began. He again moved towards the east side of the mountain. He noticed that the tops of the other mountains were also going away and that the land appeared to be getting more level. He realized that he must be coming to the edge of the mountain

and would now be going to the other side. He felt that would find the others before dark. As he rounded a large outcropping he heard the nearby growl of a bear. Quickly he loosened his knife and pushed into a small hole on the side of the mountain, hoping that the animal would not smell him. Again he heard the cry. This time it was closer. He felt that this would be his true test of his manhood. He moved away from the tiny crevice and out to the side of the rock. He got himself in a position so that the charging animal would take the full spear if he got close enough. He had heard of this tactic from his father who told him that it was the way that his grandfather fought the giant animal. As he rounded the rock he again heard the growl of the animal; but this time it was farther away. He moved silently to the front of the rock and came to the level place where the beast had stopped. As he looked up he saw the giant animal moving off into a higher place in the mountain. For the first time Karlek noticed that the new animal was still nearby, the one that was a dirty white in color with the long curved bones. The animal made no move as he went toward it, but stood and looked up to a new place in the mountain. There he saw "the rock," the rock of his dreams, where the girl had stood. He looked back at the animal but it was gone. He caught sight of it, again, as it scrambled up the side to the rock. There it stood with it's head held high. Karlek made a quick camp for himself and gathered small twigs and some dry branches. He dug a small hole in the ground and with his dried moss started a small fire. He knew the fire would keep the animals away. Taking some of the clean snow he let it melt in his hands and drank it until his thirst was quenched. He ate some of the dried meat. He thought of how he had gotten the fire to start with his little rocks and the moss. That was something that his father had taught him. Something his grandfather had told his father was a gift from grandfather's mother back before grandfather had come to the other side of the "great" mountains around their village. He laughed to himself. The villagers called them great mountains but they were not even close to what he was now surrounded by. He lay down with his head on some leaves and branches and went to sleep. The next morning he was up and moving before the frost was off of the ground. Soon he saw a bit of smoke below him and further on to the north. He knew that this was the group he had left the day before. Moving as quickly as he could he started toward them. Soon he saw that they had put out the fire and were moving away. With the dogs the men made much better time than could Karlek. He knew that he would catch up with them that night and so he moved on always to the north. After it was dark the boy moved slowly forward not sure of where the traders were in this vast plain. Several hours passed before he came to their camp. There was much questions to be answered and Karlek was busy as the men fed him between questions. Koshivi, one of the traders, said, "Karlek did you see your girl?" The men laughed. "No" said the boy, "but I saw the rock where she had stood. I also saw a new animal, one with long curved bones coming out of it's head." Leonid said to the boy, "We have seen this animal but it was always to far for us to get close enough to kill. How close did you get to it, Karlek?" The boy answered, "It was about the length of two

spears away. It turned up to the rock where the girl lives. When it got to the rock it turned and looked at me with it's head held high. It was great I tell you. I will get some of those animals and will make some new things to trade as well as the skin and the meat." The next four days were filled with many sights for the boy. He had never seen this type of land before. It gently sloped down and was covered with many small rivers. On the fifth day Karlek began to notice many familiar sights, and knew that his trip was coming to an end. His year was over. Now came the challenge of the future, if there was to be one.

CHAPTER 15 On the fifth day the party arrived at the village shortly before midday. The traders had been seen by the villagers and by the time they got to the village everyone was gathered to meet Karlek and the traders. Everyone was excited and happy. The traders met with old friends from past years. Karlek ran to his parents. He knew that this was going to be a difficult time and for now he wanted them to be happy. That night Natchusek and Liamuk walked along the river. They had noticed differences in Karlek and they needed to talk about those differences. "The boy has grown so much and has filled out. He is no longer the thin one we sent to the traders home." said Liamuk. "There seems to be something troubling the boy." said Natchusek. "He is used to the world of the white men and he has seen what is out on the other side of the mountain. It seems like he has learned much. Did you see how the traders treated him, like one of their own." said the father. Liamuk said to her husband, "It was a mistake to send him away with those men. You can see that he is not comfortable with those around here. The boys that he played with are like children next to him." They continued their talk and without any answers they went to bed. The morning dawned bright and clear. The air was warm and the night had been very short. The hunters of the village had left early to try and get one last bit of skin for the traders. Karlek had not gone with them. He had an idea and wanted to see if it would work. He harnessed up several of the dogs and filled the smallest sled with his spears and his bow and arrows. He went to his father and told him that he was going to hunt and bring back some skins. Natchusek was pleased that his son was doing the work of the men of the village. He was also concerned that he was doing it like the traders. Karlek left the village and started back the way that they had come. In his mind he saw the white furred animal. He knew that this skin was worth many times over what the brown and grey skins would bring. He knew where the animal went and he guessed that there were more up on the mountain. He knew, also, that this was the home of the bear. Because the night had all but disappeared, and the sled was much lighter he was able to reach the mountain in just over three days. He rested that night, made his little fire and cooked one of the little

animals that he had brought, wrapped in leaves and branches. It was the food of both villages. Ivanya had showed him other ways that the animal could be fixed. He thought of the girl and how beautiful she was, much like the girl on the rock. Soon he had finished his food, fed the dogs and was fast asleep. The morning came quickly and he once more fed the dogs. He knew that he would be away from them for a day or so and that they would not attack each other if they were not hungry. As he climbed the mountain he felt the air turn much cooler. He had not brought any heavy clothes with him for it was warm when he left the village. Soon he was in the rocks where he saw white animals. He knew that the skins would be valuable, but the head bones were what he wanted the most. He had ideas for them that would help Nicholi and himself. There were things to be made and that meant things to be sold. By the time the sun had reached the middle of the sky he had climbed into the clouds that surrounded the mountain. After an hour or so, he found himself above the clouds. He was closer to the top than he ever thought possible. He started to the rock of his dreams and then he saw it! The great bird was flying in slow circles above the rock. He quickened his pace and it seemed as if the bird noticed for he came lower toward the boy. Karlek stopped and the bird came and landed a few feet from him. Was this a sign, he wondered? He sat down and waited to see what the bird would do. It's great white head shown in the sunlight and the yellow beak almost seemed to be smiling at him. As if he had read the boys, mind the bird let out a shrill cry and rose into the air and over a group of rocks to his right. Quickly Karlek scrambled toward the rocks, being as silent as he could, and watching the great bird overhead. Suddenly he heard the movement of something ahead and to his right. Quickly he strung his bow and moved in the direction of the sound. Suddenly one of the giant white animal came bounding out of the rocks and started to run to the higher ground. Karlek let fly the arrow and the animal dropped. Karlek notched another arrow to the bow as another of the animals started out of the rocks, and again he dropped it with a single arrow. If he were going to get the animals back to the sled he would have to start now. He loaded the smallest of the two onto his shoulders and started down the trail, back to his camp. The great bird cried out once again and this time the young man looked up and waved. With another cry the bird soared off toward the village. After he had gotten both of the animals down he started to skin the largest one. He was amazed at the softness of the fur. When he had gotten off all of the fur, he cut off a piece of the meat, put a green branch through it and placed it over his fire. He would see if it was alright to eat. While the meat was cooking he turned his attention to the head bone . They were long and curved, coming to a point after curving back near the part that attached to the head. He would see what he could make with these strange shapes. Soon the meat was cooked and he tasted it. He was delighted with the flavor. It was sweet and soft, easy to chew and had a nice smell. Returning quickly to his village Karlek showed the skins and the

head bones to the traders and the rest of the village. All of the men were in wonder of this boy turned hunter. Again Karlek showed that he was a remarkable young man. No one had ever been able to get the animal that was covered with the soft white fur. The traders told the villagers that they had chased this animal several times but it was always able to get away. The villagers had never seen the animal and the fur amazed them. Karlek's parents now knew that he could not stay in the village. He had a special calling and he must find out what it was, not stay here. They decided to talk to the boy and tell him that he was free to leave with the traders. Natchusek called a meeting of the men of the village. After the meeting it was agreed that the boy could do more for the village if he was free to find himself. They knew that if they were to need him they could find him and he would help them. He would still return each year. Natchusek and Liamuk had a long talk with Leonid about the boy and his time away from them. The other man told them how Karlek had learned quickly and how the other young people seemed to look to him as their leader. He told them of Nicholi and his relationship with the other young people and his special relationship with Karlek. Finally he told them of Ivanya, his daughter, and her fondness for the young man. He said to the parents, "There is much for the boy to learn and much for him to see. I think that he will do something that is very special. He is a natural leader who everyone likes. He is careful not to hurt anyone and to see what he can do for others." Leonid told them of the light pots that he had made, and how he had been able, with Nicholi, to trade for many things. They had opened a little store hut with all of the things that they had received as well as new things that they had made. Then he told them about the big boats that the boys had made. He told them that the boys were trading with the other villages and the strangers that came to the village. There was a sadness in the Karlek's parents house the next day. The leaders of the village had agreed that he could go if he would return once each year to tell them of his progress, and now he was called to the council to see if he agreed. Karlek's parents told this to Leonid and then they called the young man to them. Natchusek said to Karlek, "You have grown past the rites of manhood in this village. We are proud of you, your mother and I, but we also know that you cannot live here. You have a special calling that pulls you to another part of the land. You are much like your grandfather was even before I was born. He was to be a builder of cities; but you will do more than even he wanted to do. We are sad that you are to leave, but this is in your eyes and in your heart. We have talked to the council and have prayed to the god who watches over us to get the answer. Go and build a life, but you must come back at least once each year, as the council requests. Be there if you are needed by the village." The boy looked with tears in his eyes and said to his parents, "My heart is full of sadness and happiness at the same time. I did not know how to tell you of my feelings. I have already talked to Leonid and he says that I can stay with his family as long as I go to school and follow his rules." The parents nodded and his father said, "He has also told us of these things. Do well and make the whole village proud of you."

Natchusek also told the boy that he would have to have two names as was the custom of the light skinned people. "You will use the name `Tanana' which is the name of our river. In that way we will always be with you and you with us." For the next few weeks the traders and the villagers worked to complete the trading; and the young men of the village spent much time with Karlek. They listened to stories of his other world. The time was approaching when the sun started to give way to darkness, a few minutes more each day. The day before they were to leave the women of the village prepared a great feast of fish and greens from the plants that had the little berries on them. It was during this last day that Karlek took his canoe and went across the river. He walked deep into the forest to a favorite rock that he used when he wanted be alone and think. He needed a sign that he was making the right decision. He would be giving up much by leaving. He knew that he would become the chief of the village if he stayed. He soon fell asleep and he dreamt of many things. His mind was in a whirl. He saw his grandfather with some other people who were older than grandfather. They were all smiling at him. From behind them came a girl, who walked toward him. The girl was Ivanya. The boy awoke from the dream and started back to the others. As the canoe glided through the water a giant fish jumped in front of him and looked directly at him as it fell back into the water. It was the largest fish he had ever seen, almost as long as the canoe and it was bright red. He remembered the story that was told of how his grandfather had gone out to sea and found the giant fish that had threatened his village. This was his sign. That night everyone said their goodbye's to the boy and the traders. The next morning they were packed and ready to leave. Karlek spent some time with his parents and promised, again, that he would be back at least once a year. The traders called to him so that they could make much time while it was still light. As they left Karlek found that he was not the only one leaving the village. Eilliak, a pretty girl whose parents had died from a disease, had fallen in love with Gorki, one of the young single traders. She had agreed to go back and live with him, as his wife. With waves and shouts the two groups rapidly distanced themselves as the traders headed back to the little village of Knik. CHAPTER 15 Karlek and Nicholi had prospered. They had made many items that the people up and down the coast wanted. They also were able to buy things from the Russian traders that came to the villages. They had found the village of Yakutat. The village was populated with the Tlingit tribe and they seemed to get on well with the few Russians that lived there and went after the small animal in the sea, with the beautiful fur. When Karlek first saw the little animal it was swimming on it's back. He soon discovered that all of the animals, which they called "otter", did the same. There were only six or seven of the Russians there and when the boys came the first time they were treated like they were chieftain's from a lost tribe.

The two boys had taken a month to get there and they were anxious to trade for pelts and for some of the indian jewelry. The people who lived there were impressed by the bone-headed spears that the young men had to trade as well as the knife with the rounded handle and the blade that was long and curved from the center out. Nicholi showed it's use and many of the people wanted one. They did not have enough to go around. That night in meeting with the indian chief, Yakunate, it was agreed that they would be allowed to build a trading post here and that on the next voyage they would make sure that they had plenty of knives and lanterns for the whole village. As the two men paddled back to their village Nicholi said, "When we go back we will take both boats and tie some of our small boats to them. We can bring much more to trade and then I will stay there and establish the trading post, and scout the area below. I think that we should try and make more places to trade to the south. Each time we see one of the big sailing ships it's always going to the south and never to the north." Karlek thought for some time while they paddled back to their home. Then he said, "We have three villages that we trade with in the north now and probably you're right; but I will need someone to help in making the goods and in going to the north to trade. This may be the time to hire someone. Is there any person in the village our age who you would hire?" Nicholi thought for a moment and replied, "There isn't anyone I want." Karlek thought for a moment and then it came to him. "You remember when we went to village of my people we saw some of the boys carving totem poles and making boats?" The other man nodded. "There were two or three that had asked about work in Knik. They wanted to leave and start on their own. Let's go back there when we get home. We can trade for some of the jewelry of my people. We can take an extra long sled with more dogs in case we trade for a boat or two. If we get the boats we can put them on the sled and the rest of the stuff in the boats. If you see someone who might be what we want. We'll sit with him and offer him his food, a place to stay and his own boat to cover the north trading posts. As soon as he starts to make money for us we can start paying him and let him live where and with whom he wants." Nicholi liked the idea. They agreed that it was time for Karlek's annual visit. Little did they know that this would be the last visit that either of them would make to the Tanana River. It would also be the last time that he would see his parents alive. Now there was work to be done and money to be made. Karlek had finished his schooling but continued to live with Leonid and his family while he was getting the business going. During this time he came to know the ways of the people and, the people themselves. Now that he was no longer a stranger and somewhat of a novelty, the people warmed to this likeable young man. Ivanya knew that Karlek liked her but she did not know what her parents would say if they decided to get married. He was a native and she was Russian. He was not of their faith nor did he share all of their customs. She decided to go and talk to the priest of the village. He had spent much time with Karlek when he was not teaching him and had gotten to know him. After talking to the priest Ivanya felt relief spread through her. The man had told her that in this land there were very few eligible men and that Karlek was certainly the smartest and the most honest boy in the village. The man told her that one day he would be a

great man, who would be admired by all. The priest also told her that he would marry them if the boy wanted to and her parents agreed. She had to get Karlek to want her forever. Little did she know that for months Karlek shared the same thoughts about her and that he had already seen the priest before his last trip home. The boy had told his parents about the girl. He did not know that Leonid and Natchusek had talked of this very thing before Karlek had left the village for good. The two boys returned from a trip to the north coast villages and had done very well. Some of the Russians they had met traded gold for their goods. Karlek knew that this was money and that they could use it to buy from other traders without losing their goods. The boys decided to save the money in case they went to a trading place where they needed the gold coins to buy things. Karlek told Nicholi that it was time for his visit to his parents and asked the young man to come and meet the rest of the villagers. Nicholi was thrilled for he felt that now Karlek had truly accepted him. After the two men returned from the visit Karlek told Ivanya's parents that he needed to talk to them alone. They looked at each other and broke out laughing. "The answer is yes!" We have known that this day was coming from the first time you came to our house. " When you went back to your home, Leonid spoke to your father and got his permission for you to marry Ivanya, if you wanted." said Ivanya's mother. Leonid turned to the young man and said, "Karlek we already love you and we always will. You are like one of us and if Ivanya wants to marry you, and we think she does, you will have our blessings." Karlek was caught off guard and all he could do was to stand there and blush. The marriage was a good one and the village had received him as one of their own. He made a trip to his village and brought Ivanya with him so that all could meet her and see what a fine wife he had taken. He left with the promise to return soon. The two of them had returned every year for the last thirteen years. As the boys paddled to Knik, Karlek had the seeds of an idea. "Nicholi what would you think of bringing Rangak into the business? He will be finished with school when we get back. He has shown an interest in the trading and he may be a good trader. He also likes working with you when you are carving out the boats. Has he done work that would please you? said Karlek. Nicholi laughed his deep and jolly laugh and said, "He is a good worker, not great but good. He reminds me of you fifteen years ago. He has asked me many questions about the business so I know that he is interested. My children have no interest, though my son may be a hunter who can bring skins to us to buy. Why don't I talk to him when we get back, then if he is really interested we can sit with him and make him a proposal. Perhaps we can use two other men to work with us and since Rangak lives at home we do not have to feed and shelter him. That's your problem!" The boys got back home by the time that the sun had started it's turn to darkness. They knew that this was the time for them to set their plans in motion and get ready for the next trading season. "I think that we have time to get to my village" said Karlek. " We can see if we can find someone to come to work for us when the long day

comes again. He can make some spears and knives during the dark time. That will make him feel a part of the business. Also I think that I can get some more of the white furred animals both for meat for our families and for the fur itself. I think that those furs are worth a great deal and if we have them they will be good to take to the new trading post. While you are finding the right boy and deal for some large boats to take back with us, I'll go to the mountain for the white animal." Nicholi laughed and said, "You are still drawn to the mountain. You go there every chance you get. Alright let's do what you say, but I'll go to the village first while you try and get the skins and the meat. Then you can come to the village and see your parents and the others and see if I have picked a good worker." The boys spent a few days at home and then set out to make their plans a reality. Their wives knew that they would not be gone long and that they will them for the winter. Nicholi talked to Rangak and told him of their offer. The boy jumped with joy at the news that he could come into the business. Nicholi laughed as he told Karlek. They decided that they would take Rangak with them to the village. The boy was happy for now he would also meet his other grandparents for the first time. The trip to the village was swift. The land was solid and yet soft for the dogs. The sleds that they used were different than those of the deep winter. The runners were wider so that they would be able to pull heavy loads without bogging down. Nicholi and Rangak went ahead to the village while Karlek headed to the mountain, his mountain. It had never left him, nor had the dream. Now he knew the mountain and he was certain that the mountain knew him as well. Every time he went there a feeling of peace come over him. The mountain also had been good to him, and that he had been able to get many skins from the bear. He had not seen the white animal on his last two trips, but this time he was going to climb to where they always seem to be headed. This time he would get two skins and much meat. After seeing to his dogs and setting up his camp, Karlek again looked at the rock up there standing out for him to see. Each time he looked he had expected to see the girl of the dream, but she was never there. Looking up at the rock he saw to his amazement the giant bird sitting there and looking down at him. Karlek knew that the bird was his friend and he waved to it. The bird rose awkwardly into the sky flew to him and settled next to him. Karlek was happy to see the bird. It confirmed his reason for being here at Denali. Suddenly the eagle gave a cry and took off into the sky, turning sharply to the front of the mountain. Karlek looked in the direction of the bird and saw several of the white animals. Darkness was settling in and the man decided that he would start early in the morning. If he could get more than two of the animals they would make more money than they had planned on. Life was good on the mountain. Karlek was active the next two days and by the end of the second day he killed five of the animals and had skinned them and wrapped the meat in bark. After he finished he headed to the village to see his parents and to see how Rangak was doing. Karlek arrived at the village shortly after the middle of the

light time. He first went to see his parents and was shocked to see how they had aged. They looked old and weak, but they still had grins for him as well as hugs. They told him about the fine grandson they had and how happy they were that he had Nicholi bring him to them. The three of them talked for most of the day and well into the night. Karlek could see that they were not going to live for many more years. The next day Nicholi told him that he had watched two young men working on a boat that was very long and had high sides. The two of them went to see this boat. Karlek was sure that Nicholi had picked one of the boys to come to work for them. When they got to the edge of the water where the boys were working Karlek knew that they had a problem. The boys looked exactly alike and he knew that they could not take one without the other. They looked at the boat and told the boys how well they had done. "Would one of you like to come to work for us in Knik?" Nicholi asked. Both boys laughed and the one who was working in the boat said, "We do not go anywhere without the other. Would you take us both." The two men went back to their camp in the village to talk things over. "How can we feed both of them?" asked Nicholi. "They can both stay together," Karlek said. "I've got an idea" We can use both of them and open up another trading post. Do you remember one of the people in Yukatat telling us of the big town on one of the islands several suns below them. They said it was called `Nova Arkhangelsk'. The boys can stay together we can have them work the north coast. You take Yukatat and I will move my family to this new town. We will be able to get more gold and perhaps our goods will be new to them. You know that our lanterns are wanted by everyone. The furs that I have gotten on this trip will get us off to a good start in these new places. We can all meet back at Knik when the sun is at its highest point each year." They agreed on the idea and went to the boys with it to see if they would follow this plan. The boys were delighted. In a few weeks all was in readiness for their trip back to Knik. Karlek said his goodbye's to the leaders of the village with the promise to be back at the same time next year. He went to his parents to say his farewell. Natchusek said to his son, "You have followed your grandfather and your heart. We are proud of you, but you must remember that the best thing you have is your honesty. Never try to cheat anyone out of anything. What you did for the boys is good, and because of this you will prosper." "Father, you and mother need to come to live with us. Ivanya loves you and the children will be able to help you both." said Karlek. His father replied, "We will think on it and let you know on your next trip." With that Karlek and Nicholi left and headed back to Knik with their sleds piled high with skins and other goods to trade. They also had the new boats with the high sides and the two boys who were to work for them.

CHAPTER 13 Life was good in Sitka, Rangak decided. The town was the capitol of Russian America. He had been here for the past twelve years and now was twenty eight years old. He had plenty of money and a fine job as principal trader for the Kani Trading Kompany, which was founded by his father and uncle Nicholi. The two older men left most of the work to him now. They were primarily interested in buying not trading. The town had become an important trade center for the China trade ships and the sailing vessels of the northwest coast that pulled in to refit themselves or to sell to the local people. When news of a ship's coming reached the town it quickly spread to the forests and along the coast of the island named for the man who started the settlement and the trading, Alelsandr Andreevich Baranov. These were the Baranov Islands. It was for this that the two men now turned their attention. If a ship had goods which Nicholi or Karlek thought could be profitable they would buy the entire cargo. Sometimes they would even buy the ships. In this way Kani Kompany controlled the trading and the sales of most of the goods along the coast. Kani Kompany had trading posts that stretched from the town of Nome in the north to the new settlement, named Ketchikan, in the south. It was up to Rangak to get the goods into the trading posts that were set up along the coast and to the new one that was inland near a large mountain range. The natives called the mountains Kluane and the trading post was set up there next to a large lake. The rumor had started that there was gold in the area of the mountains and people were making the hard journey overland. Since most of the travelers did not come prepared for such a trip, the Kani company supplied all of their needs, for a handsome profit. The post agent would trade only for furs. The rest of the purchasing was done in gold. Rangak was aware of the growing business and the role he was to play when the older ones were gone. For now it was up to him to expand and yet control Kani Kompany. He was also at an age where he felt that it was time to settle down. He had to start looking around; but before he was ready to do that he must make a trip to the trading post at Ketchikan. The area had started to see a great many foreigners, from the land called America, coming up the coast and there was talk that the ruler of that country, a man they called President, wanted to buy the whole of Russia Amerika. Rangak booked passage on the next boat that travelled south with the promise that he would be dropped at the town. When he arrived he was shocked at the amount of building that had gone on since the last time he was here, four years ago. There were many more people than before, and most of them were Russian he noted with pleasure.

He had no use for the " Yankees" as they were called. They were loud and always looking for a fight. There had been many shootings and it always seemed that Russians and not Yankees were the ones that died. The Tlingit indian name for the small fish camp was Kitschk-Hin, "thundering wings of an eagle." The Russians called it Ketchikan. After spending several weeks in Ketchikan, Rangak returned to Yakutat. He reported to the two older men of what was happening there as well as the news of what was happening in the rest of the land to the south. He told them of the settlement called Vancouver, that was down the coast in the territory of Canada. It was in a well protected bay and was a trading post that many ships and overland travelers stopped to buy their supplies before heading north. Rangak had other startling news. The United States of America was trying to buy all of the land that was Mother Russia's Aleyska. He also told him of the high price for the otter skins as well as the white skinned animal called mountain goat. When Karlek heard this he became excited. He had not visited the village of his people since his mother and father died over eleven years ago. He turned to Nicholi and said, "Can you run everything here. I will go to the mountain, Denali, and also to the village of my people. I want to see if there are still the white animals there. I'll take three sleds along with our best hunters and some of the new things called "guns." We may be able to get a great many skins." Nicholi was in agreement but added that he should take the hunters from Knik since it would cost less. Karlek laughed, finally Nicholi was being more practical than Karlek. The next day the men again sent Rangak, this time to Vancouver to see if he could set up a Kani Kompany trading post there and also see what he could find out about the United States of America. The day after Rangak left Karlek left for the little town of Knik where it all began. As he paddled he remembered the first time he had met the traders and all of the events of the past twenty five years. He thought of his parents, of Leonid and his family, and of Ivanya. Life had been good to him. He also thought of the dream, the mountain and the bird. It had been a long time since he had seen the great one in the sky and thought that it was dead by now. His course was clear. He would first take the hunters to the camp at the base of the mountain and then he would go on to the village to see who was still left there from his youth. Arriving in Knik he went to Leonid's house. The old man now in his seventies, and his wife were delighted that he came to be with them. They stayed up most of the night talking about the things that had happened since his last trip there over four years ago. He told them of the business and of the new trading posts as well as Rangak's trip to the town of Vancouver. There was little darkness at this time of the year and the hunting party left in the morning. They made a quick trip to the mountain and Karlek showed them where to get the white animal, and the bear. He also told them to stay away from the rock, his rock, and above all not to harm the eagle if it should come to the mountain. He told them the eagle would guide them to the place where the white furred animals hid. He showed them how he wanted the meat stored in bark and tied with the muscles of the animals. He promised them a bonus if

they fill the two sleds and have more for him to load when he got back in a week. Then he was off to his village. The trip was short. When he got there he was told of a terrible sickness that killed more than half the village. There were only a handful of those he had known before. They had a big celebration on his first night back, with the older ones telling the younger how an eagle came to sit by Karlek when he was a boy. They told of how Karlek was able to see things that others could not, and that he went away and studied the ways of the outsiders and had become one of them. When he heard that he realized that it was true, he did not fit in here. He had left this life and now could not be a part of their ways. The ways of his father. He quickly made the trip back to Denali, the mountain, and when he arrived at the camp he found that everything was gone. He was puzzled by this for he had picked men who had roots to their village and were trustworthy. He decided to rest and then head back to Knik in the early part of the day. When he woke up the next day he packed all his remaining supplies and headed down to the trail that led to Knik. As he rounded a group of rocks that had fallen, he stopped in his tracks. There on the top rock was the eagle! He moved away from the dogs and waved to the giant bird. Slowly it rose to the sky, but instead of coming to him it flew to another set of rocks ahead of him. Karlek thought that the bird was playing with him and so he did not follow the eagle; instead he started back down the trail. With a long cry the bird came back and hovered over him. It gently set down next to him just as it had done in the past. He looked at the bird and tried to figure out what the bird wanted. As if the eagle could read his thoughts it flew out in front of the sled and stopped, waiting for the man to catch up. Then Karlek knew what the eagle wanted. It was to follow to some other place on the mountain. Pushing forward he soon saw a new trail and in a few hours he came upon the rest of the men and their work. Gorki, said to him, "Just as we started to climb the mountain the great bird came and we did as you said and the bird led us to this spot. See the results. What kind of bird is this who hunts for us?" The sleds were packed with the furs that would bring huge profits for the Kani Trading Kompany. The men looked tired from the work. Karlek was overwhelmed by the sight of ten white furs and seven brown furs of the bear. All of the meat was bound and packed on one sled with the furs on the other. The supplies were sitting, waiting to go on Karlek's sled. It was a joyous trip back to the town of Knik. Little did Karlek know that this was not to be his last trip to the mountain. He felt he would never see the bird again. His mind was occupied with the trip back and what lay ahead for Kani Traders. He knew his next step; but he needed Nicholi's and Ivanya's approval. When the party arrived back, Nicholi rushed to meet him and to see what he had been able to bring back. After paying the men he and Karlek went to their little store, now too small for all of the goods that they had for sale. Nicholi looked at his friend and knew that there was something on his mind. "Well let's have it, what's going on in that brain of yours.

I can see it all over your ugly face." They both laughed and Karlek said to his friend. Now is the time for us to see just how good a business can get. How much can we sell? We don't need the money but something is driving me forward. I have a plan but I must first talk to Ivanya. If she says yes then I will talk to you about it." The man nodded to him and told him that he would talk whenever he was ready to tell him the plan. It was a bold move that Karlek proposed to his wife that night. He knew that she was comfortable where they were now, and the children were starting their own lives. He told her of his idea to start a trading post along the coast down below them in one of the large cities. They would be able to come back and visit or the children could come to see them. The new sailing boats were fast and could make the trip to the Kalifornya city by a great bay in less than three weeks. He saw a great future in the area. Gold had been found a few years earlier and there was talk of the United States buying Alyesk. If this happened before they opened their store it could mean many difficulties later on when they might try and start their business in that country. Ivanya listened to all he said and then turning to look him full in the face said, "Are you sure that you can do it. You are not as young as you once were and this is a new country with different laws and different people." The man answered, "If you are with me I can do anything." Ivanya, looked at him slowly moving her eyes to his hands and face and then said, "If the children want to come they must be allowed too, and if they want to work in the business they are to have that chance. You must also realize that they will not have the same kinds of people to live with and to marry." As she said this he broke out laughing and then, thinking of what she said she laughed also. Karlek said, "Who knows maybe our daughter will meet a Tlingit or a Tananan boy just like you did. She knew that he was teasing her but in such a way as to make her feel good all over. "Alright," she said. "When do we go?" "I told Nicholi that I would talk to him after I talked to you and then only if you said yes. He and I will talk it over tomorrow and see how long everything will take. If he says yes I will go first, and take our son, Kolosh, with me. He wants to get into the business and this will be the best way. Ivanya agreed and the rest of the night was spent in showing her that he was not so old. The next day Nicholi and Karlek walked down to the pier at the edge of town, where they unloaded their boats, which now included a couple of sailing boats. Karlek told his friend of his idea and how Nicholi would have to make all the decisions for the north and inland part of the business. He would handle the islands, Vancouver and everything to the south. Plans were made and the two sailing boats were loaded with supplies and goods for sale or trade. They knew that the first shipment could make or break them. With this in mind Karlek took many of the lanterns that everyone still wanted and the furs that he had gotten on the last trip. He also took half of the gold the two men had saved, and his son Kolosh. When the day finally came the two men spent much time together talking of the past and of the future. Ivanya sat with them but said nothing. The ships were loaded and the tide was good, the sun was

bright and the weather warm the day Karlek and his son started on this new adventure. This was a new land and it was considered even a part of Mother Russia. If all worked out they would have the largest business of it's kind in the new world. If it didn't work they would come back to Sitka and they would still be the same company. CHAPTER 17 The business had prospered in the ten years since they came to San Francisco. The city was not like the little towns and villages of the north. Here the pace is faster and decisions are made quickly. Gold had been found at John Sutter's mill. John Augustus Sutter had purchased the Ross Colony in 1841, Just one year after Karlek and his son, Kolosh, came to the city to set up their business. The year was 1848. James Marshall was working the tail traces of a saw mill on January twenty-forth when he found the gold and rushed to report to his employer, John Sutter. Fur trappers had come to the area as early as 1814; but they had since headed to the northwest where the land were filled with animals of all sizes and shapes. Within a few months of the gold discovery came one of the largest migrations in history. Fortunately for Karlek and the Kani Trading Kompany there was quite a need for the little lanterns and the curved knives that he had made so many years before. The furs that would come each month were sold to the european markets as quickly as they were unloaded from Kani ships. The ships now carried goods for other companies as well and one could see the Kani Kompany flag in all parts of the world. They also carried new goods from Mother Russia. By 1850 the family was settled and the business was prospering. They had now opened trading stores, as they were called, in the towns of Spanish California called San Pedro and San Diego. This last one was close to the country called Mexico, and it was here that Karlek found new treasures to buy and sell. Ivanya flourished in the new land and most of the women of the Russian colony could be expected at their large home during the week. The time was not without tragedy. Two of Karlek's and Ivanya's children died shortly after coming to the land. Nicholi had died a year ago. Leonid had been dead for three years. Rangak had married a woman from the Canadian area. They had two children, a boy and a girl; but the girl died before she was able to see her grandparents. It was decided that Rangak would now be responsible for the northern operation. He would receive one-forth of the profits. Oneforth would go to Nicholi's widow, Mushika, until she died and then Rangak would receive one-half of everything that the company earned. Kolosh had become a valuable member of the business and now handled all of the business outside of San Francisco. Karlek was content to run the trading store here in the fast-paced city they now called home. He also had started a new business; a bank for the Russians who looked for a place to put their savings. Many of them worked in the mines or did much of the manual labor at the docks.

A new problem faced the owners of the business. Everyone knew that Mother Russia was going to sell the lands to the north and all of the settlements along the coast to the United States. California had become a state near the end of last year. The Chinese had jobs on the railroad or as cooks or laundrymen. People were looking to get away from the foreign names and were buying from people and companies that sounded more like American's. Karlek was now at a time of his life where he wanted to spend more time with Ivanya and visit all of their company holdings, which included, beside the stores and ships,land. Karlek had bought large sections of land in California. They both knew that there was much land that was available in the northern territories. They also knew that they needed to get more land in Alaska, as it was called by the white men. Before he did all of this, however, he sent for Rangak and Kolosh. He talked over his new idea with Ivanya, who was now showing her age and was moving much slower and with some difficulty. When the two brothers arrived he told them first of their mothers condition and then of the plans for he and Ivanya to visit their villages back in Alaska. Karlek talked at length, with the two, about the conditions in this wild country that seemed to have no law. He told them of his fear that as outsiders they would be easy prey for some who would like to take their business from them. His thoughts lay in the future. Both boys were married and fine families. Karlek and Ivanya wanted to see all of their grandchildren and great grandchildren before it was too late. Rangak looked at his father and said, "What is the real reason that we're here? You could say all of this in a letter. You've got something planned and I know that means new adventures and money." Karlek laughed at his son's words. He realized that he had not only his blood but the blood of his great grandfather. The older man spoke. "We are going to change the name of our company, and if you want you may change your last name to the name of the new company. It will make it easier for you to get along in this country." The two brothers looked at each other and then back to their father. Karlek asked Ivanya to come into the room for the final part of the discussion. "Your mother feels that since you are running most of the business you should have a say in the matter. We need to know how you feel about this idea. It will change our very lives and since you will be able to change your names, if you like." Kolosh looked at his father and said, "You have made all of the big decisions for the company for over forty years and they have been good ones. I have no problem with a new name for the reasons you said, but it must be a name that will be easily said." Rangak said, "I can see some benefits from such a change, but won't it hurt the business because people will have to learn a new name, something that is much different than they now know?" Karlek looked at his wife and smiled. "The boys are as cautious as you and they seem to think things through. I have chosen the name `Caine'. As you see there is not too much difference in the sound of the name but it is spelled 6464‚ 6464ƒ 6464„ 6464… 6464† 6464‡ 6464ˆ 6464‰ 6464Š 6464‹ 6464Œ 6464 6464Ž 6464 6464 6464‘ 6464’ 6464“ 6464” 6464• 6464– 6464— 6464˜ 6464™ 6464š 6464› 6464œ 6464 6464ž 6464Ÿ 6464 6464¡ 6464¢ 6464£ 6464¤ 6464¥ 6464¦ 6464§ 6464¨ 6464© 6464ª 6464« 6464¬ 6464 6464® 6464¯ 6464° 6464± 6464² 6464³ 6464´ 6464µ 6464¶ 6464· 6464¸ 6464¹

6565º 6565» 6565¼ 6565½ 6565¾ 6565¿ 6565À 6565Á 6565 6565à 6565Ä 6565Å 6565Æ 6565Ç 6565È 6565É 6565Ê 6565Ë 6565Ì 6565Í 6565Î 6565Ï 6565Ð 6565Ñ 6565Ò 6565Ó 6565Ô 6565Õ 6565Ö 6565× 6565Ø 6565Ù 6565Ú 6565Û 6565Ü 6565Ý 6565Þ 6565ß 6565à 6565á 6565â 6565ã 6565ä 6565å 6565æ 6565ç 6565è 6565é 6565 6565ë 6565ì 6565í 6565î 6565ï 6565ð 6565ñ 6565ò 6565ó 6565ô 6565õ 6565ö 6565÷ 6565ø 6565ù 6565ú 6565û 6565ü 6565ý 6565ÿ 6565ýÿÿÿ656565 the English way. That will make us look like we have been around for a long time. " "What do you boys think of your father's idea?" asked Ivanya. The brothers talked among themselves and with their parents, trying to find out if the present name would be of any value. Rangak said, "I think that we should keep the name `Kani' in Alaska. We do most of our business with our own people. The name let's us hold to our roots. Down here it makes sense but the tribes know us and trust us. It could cause them to deal with others and we would be the losers." The chinese cook served dinner and then they talked well into the night. Finally Ivanya said, "I am tired and it sounds like you are too. Let's talk more in the morning over breakfast." The next day it was agreed that Alaska would keep the name Kani and all of the land below Vancouver would change to Caine. The shipping lines, which were now the company's most profitable venture would be called "The Caine Shipping Company." All of the ships would have names of the towns and villages of Alaska, except for the ones that would be named for the family. The first name to be chosen was "The Ivanya Caine." The brothers left after a few days with the promise that their parents would visit them soon. Karlek and Ivanya would go north in the month of June and spend time with Rangak and his family and visit all of the places that had meant so much to them in the past. The two older ones decided that after they visited Alaska they would go to San Diego to visit the rest of the family and the newest granddaughter. This would also give them a chance to spend time with Kolosh's wife who they had only met once. She was a pretty woman, very blond with soft blue eyes that made Ivanya think of the summer skies in Alaska. Her name was Barbara. There were two children, Piotr the boy, and the baby, Karla who looked like her mother except that she had darkened skin; almost a cross between the parents. Karlek had a reason for being there in the summer. He had heard that the weather never got cold and that the people of Mexico made goods that could be purchased for much less than goods made in America. If he could get them to work for him they could make the things that he could sell at a better price. Then he could sell for less than his competitors. There was another reason that Karlek was anxious to make the journeys. Ivanya was aging rapidly. He could see that he would live longer than she would. He loved her and often wondered how he would live without her; or if he even wanted to live after she was gone. The two of them planned the trip for the coming summer, giving careful thought to what they would do when each was no longer alive. It was decided that if Ivanya died while they were in Alaska she would be buried in the village of Knik. If not they would be buried together on a hill overlooking the bay of San Francisco, in the Russian Cemetery. The next day they went to look for the land that would be their home for eternity. One of the things that Ivanya had wanted Karlek to do for some

time now, was to hire a woman to work in the main store. San Francisco was booming and many couples had come to make their mark in the west. Caine Company was the biggest store around and now it carried clothes for women. Ivanya thought that if the women had other women to talk to and buy from they would buy more and feel more comfortable rather than dealing with only men. Karlek had listened to this argument for several years, but now he gave in and hired a young woman whose husband was a Methodist preacher. Her name was Susan Ashton. As usual Ivanya was right. The women of the city and the surrounding area flocked to the store and soon there was need for another woman. This time Ivanya did the hiring and she hired a young spanish girl who had been left in San Francisco by her family. When Ivanya first met her she was full of dirt and looked as if she had not ever had a bath. After cleaning her up and getting her some new clothes she was just what Ivanya wanted. Someone who could speak both English and Spanish. The girl, named Elana, was a solid worker and always seemed to be doing little things that brought more business to the company. One day when Karlek and Elana were in the store, alone, Karlek asked her if she knew of the town called Pueblo San Diego. In an instant her eyes lit up and she started to speak of her life before her parents had brought her to San Francisco. She told the older man that she was born there and that she would go back some day as a person of influence. She would show the "peons" that she had made something of herself and that she would not need a dowry when she got married. Karlek marveled at the young girl who became so animated. In the back of his mind an idea was taking shape. He would sleep on it for a while and then when he had it worked out he would talk to his wife and his son Kolosh. Several days passed and Karlek wrote to his son, Kolosh, detailing his thoughts about the use of the girl in his business as a trader with the Mexicans. He told how she had been creative and worked well with everyone. Since they had talked of opening a work place in the little town of Tijuana, she would be just the person to help Kolosh and see that they got what they contracted for both in quality and quantity. As the business grew she could take over the management of a new store and still help in the purchasing of goods from the country to the south. After the letter was sent to his son, Karlek told Ivanya of his idea and what he had written to Kolosh. She smiled her shy smile and said, "Old man you have come a long way. I am glad that you see the value in Elana, but do not forget what Susan can do as well. Perhaps she should run our store here, at least while we take our trip." She was usually right thought Karlek and why not; Susan was a capable person and she got along well with the customers, even the men. She had brought great wealth to the Tanana's. Now she will see what she can do running the business. In the back of his mind he had another one of his ideas. This may be the time to start planning for the future. If he moved to San Diego, Susan could run the business. He knew that the company would be in good and honest hands. He thought back to Nicholi and how he knew right away that he could be trusted. Everyone else that had worked for them were also trustworthy. The God had ben good to the "Kani" company. He really had to learn more about this God that Susan was always talking about.

The next day dawned bright and clear. It was one of those mornings where there was no fog. You could see for miles in any direction. Karlek rose early and went to a small restaurant for breakfast. He did not want to wake his wife. She would need her rest for the trip they were about to take, back to where it all began. As he was drinking the strong coffee these people seemed to like, his mind wandered back to the mountain, Denali. He remembered how he had seen it the first time. He remembered the great bird, called "eagle." He thought of the dream and the beautiful lady with the sunset hair on the rock. He thought of his grandfather and wondered what he would think of all that had happened to him. Karlek was sure that he would approve. His thoughts turned once more to his wife of so many years. She had made him what he was and he knew that he was going to lose her soon. They had lived a good life together and he would always have his dreams, and his past. Karlek got to the store earlier than usual. This was the time to talk to Susan about the running of the store and about the profits she would make for both of them. Karlek knew that her loyalty was important and that if she could make more she would as long as it was the right way. Her poor husband was having a rough time trying to get the little church started and the Mission Society was talking of closing it down. Karlek and Ivanya had gone there one sunday morning and when they had gotten home they discussed what had happened. Karlek remembered the first church he had gone to as a boy coming to live with Leonid, Katherine and the little girl, Ivanya. This was not the same. The prayers had some of the same meanings but the message was different. He had not figured it out and they had stayed up late trying to understand what they had heard and felt. When Susan was not busy Karlek called her into the office and told her that they would like her to run the business while they took their trip to visit the children and the grand children the following spring and summer. Susan was to receive ten percent of the profits of the business over the time that they were gone. He told her that if she was comfortable with the arrangement and they moved to live in San Diego she would have complete charge, getting ten percent of all the profits, plus her salary. She would have complete authority over the business. Susan told the man that she would tell him tomorrow. She must first talk to her husband and also to God. Karlek smiled. Did she really think that this God of hers would take time to talk with her? The next day Susan said that she would do it as long as she could run the business without interference. The older man agreed knowing that the rules were already in place. The following spring plans were made to board the "Umlak Caine," one of the newer ships of the Caine Line. They would take with them some presents for the family and also some things for the people of Knik and Sitka, hopefully to give to someone from their past life. It was at this time that Elana was sent to work in the San Diego store. Kolosh was delighted to have her to help just as his father suggested. It would give him a chance to see if they could open other branches in towns just above San Diego. A Spanish missionary named Junipero Sierra opened several missions stretching up almost to San Francisco. Around some of these missions towns were growing. He had heard of a sleepy fishing village

with a great harbor, called San Pedro, and of a large town called La Ciuade de Los Angeles further up and a little inland. It was said that this was a place where many fruits and vegetables grew. In late May of 1877 the two older ones left for the North. It was to be an adventure that neither would ever forget. Times were changing and there were strong currents of nationalism forming in the area. Karlek knew that the freedom of the north would soon be challenged by civilization.

CHAPTER 18 Alaska was still an unorganized territory. Karlek could not understand the name "Seward's Folly", that the Americans used to talk about this land of great wealth and peace. The United States Army seemed to be responsible for all of the law in the area and since most of the people lived near the water there were no terrible uprisings. Plans were being made to make the land into a federal territory, but for now the natives and the white settlers lived with a fragile peace. This was the Alaska that the two older people came back to in 1877. Karlek and Ivanya first went to see the friends that were still left in Sitka. While they were there talk was of an uprising to oust or kill all of the white settlers in the area. The whites were vastly outnumbered by the natives and when the army pulled out to help quell the uprisings in Idaho the situation became desperate. The settlers called on the United States for help but got none. In desperation they called on the British who were garrisoned at Vancouver. Karlek and Ivanya saw all of the changes that had already taken place. They were sad for what they had loved about the land was being taken from the people who had carved out their lives in this cold but friendly world. Telling their friends that they would return at the end of the summer, the two left for the north to see if they could find any of their old friends in Knik. Karlek kept a watchful eye on his wife for her health was failing rapidly. There was much to do and to see and he knew that she would want to get it all in before it was time to leave this world and go to the land of the spirit gods.

As they approached Knik they saw that the little stopping off place called Anchorage had indeed grown into a large town and had big docks along it's waterfront. Karlek the businessman laughed as he turned to his wife and said, "See what we have missed. We could have all of the business right here and never had to leave." She smiled her gentle shy smile and said, "Karlek, you dumb bear. Look at what you have done and the lands that you have traded with in the past twenty years since we moved to San Francisco. If you could have done all that from here you would be a god. You are not, so be thankful that you have been like your grandfather and found the road to wisdom as well as wealth. What we have is because you were able to see into the future like your grandfather, Rangak. You have built a business larger than anyone else from Alaska. You have helped people from all races, and have raised two fine boys who are part of your business. Now you stand here and say that you could have done this from Anchorage. Old man you are crazy." she laughed at the last part and he laughed with her. She was always giving him the credit for everything and he knew that none of this would have happened if he had not met her almost sixty years ago and fallen in love with this gentle and wise woman who, he knew was making her last journey with him. He looked at his wife and tenderly took her hands in his and said to her, "What you have said is true; but you always do not say it the right way. Change the you to we and it makes more sense. It has been your wisdom that has helped me to make the right decisions and to look in the right directions. You have been the light that has never left my sight, always leading me on to a brighter day. What I have is because of you. Always remember what I am is what you have made me and that is why when you ask me why I love you I tell you I love you because you are you." A strange mist came over their eyes as each wiped the tears of love and joy. Karlek and Ivanya spent a week in Knik, seeing the few friends that were left. There was one person who, to their surprise, was still alive. He was almost one hundred years old but he still taught school and led the service on Sunday, the day of no work. The old priest, Constintine Gorashof, smiled as they came to visit him. He made them tell all that they had done since they had left the little town. The hours whiled away and Karlek noticed that Ivanya was starting to nod and to lose her balance in the chair. He said to the old man that it was time for all of them to get their rest and they would talk again, tomorrow. The days were long and there was much time to talk in the light; now it was time to rest. A few days later they left by sled to visit the village where Karlek was born. When they arrived the village was not there. This was a great puzzle that had to be solved. Depression settled on Karlek for the first time in his life. He realized that he had roots to the past. They were gone, like the village. He despaired for some time until Ivanya said, "Let's go to the great mountain and see if there are any answers. You have always said that the mountain was there for you and that there was the eagle who came to you to help you find the answers. Go and see if there are any answers."

They stayed that day and the next looking for clues as to what had happened. Also they were hoping that someone would be paddling down the river and might have the answers. The following day the two of them set out for the mountain in the distance. Karlek could not move as fast or for as long as head in the past and this too angered him. He was losing his vitality and was resentful. The journey took them five days and when they arrived the sky was starting to darken. The older man made a lean-to for them and spread the giant animal robes he had brought with him so that his wife would be warm. She was cold much of the time now. After the meal they lay down and talked for many hours about their life and how good it had been. This seemed to raise his spirits. He remembered how Susan told him that when things were either good or bad God listened to prayers. That night Karlek and prayed to the one God for the first time, to a God he had never really known. He prayed for the answers and he prayed for the wife who was at his side. The next morning the man had a different feeling about him. His depression was gone and there was now only a sadness that such an important part of his life was gone. He told Ivanya to get some rest and that he was going up the mountain to the rock. It was not a hard climb but Karlek was glad that he had left early for he had to stop and catch his breath several times. As he started up the last part of the outcropping that led to the rock he heard it! Like a sound of yesteryear the cry of the giant bird came to him loud and clear. He trembled at the sound. Was this to be the answer to his question? He climbed up the face of the outcropping and reached the rock. There he found what he was looking for, part of the answer. Piled high in a large area in the center of the flat rock ledge were clothes and utensils from the village. Much he recognized and there were even some of the little bowls he had carved so many years ago. On the side of the rock at the back were drawings. The drawings told of a terrible illness that gripped the people. They had come to this place to pray to the giant bird. Some had died here. The bones were testament to that fact. There were no pictures of the giant bird doing anything to help them. Only picture of the people dying as others kept the vigil. Finally there were no more pictures on the rock. As he started down he heard and saw the eagle heading toward him. He knew that "his" eagle must be long dead and did not know what to expect of this bird. The bird soared on the currents of air around that side of the mountain and came to rest at his feet. The bird seemed to smile at him and Karlek was confused. He decided that he would go to the bird as he had done so many years before and smooth the feathers. The bird seemed to know that this was a friend and though he ruffled himself up he settled down and let the man stroke his feathered wing. Karlek did not know what to think. Surely this was not the same one that had been with him over fifty years ago. The birds did not live that long. Suddenly, without warning the eagle rose and circled the mountain where the clouds began. He kept coming to one place and then would cry his long cry. Karlek knew that he wanted him to go to that spot and not knowing why he headed to the spot. There on the ground was a young eagle still brown and spotted

with a broken wing. This must be one of the eagle's young, he thought. Looking around he found some sturdy twigs and some vines from the trees. He fashioned a crude splint so that the eaglet could lift the whole wing. The older bird cried out again and circled a opening in a ledge just above Karlek. The man could see that there was a nest there and knew that the eagle wanted him to put the young bird in the nest. This was done and the eagle came and sat once more on the side of the nest looking at Karlek. It was at this moment that peace again returned to the old man. His prayers had been answered and he knew his wife would complete the journey. Karlek returned to the little camp at the bottom of Denali, the great one, and told his wife about the entire experience. He noticed that she seemed stronger and there was a glint in her eyes again. He made up his mind that he would need to keep praying to this God who could make things happen so quickly. Returning to the Tanana River they discovered that some of the families had returned. One of the men said that they had a vision three nights before and they left the place that they had found in the valley and came back to keep the village alive. Karlek was overjoyed. It was three nights before that he had the encounter with the two eagles. The trip back to Knik took five days and when they had gotten back there was a note waiting for them from Rangak telling them that he would be there to bring them to his home at the beginning of July,in six days. The date on the letter showed that it had been sent over four weeks ago. They had another two days before he was to arrive. This gave Ivanya time to rest and time for both of them to visit once more with the old priest who had meant so much to them. On the second of July Rangak showed up at the village with his son, now fourteen years old. The boy was handsome and had many of the features of his grandfather which pleased Karlek though he tried not to show this pleasure. The boy's parents had named him James Karl after his two grandfathers. Rangak, too was starting to show his years, but in a way that seemed to have given him more maturity. He explained to them that they would be traveling part of the way on flat land that came between two large ranges of mountains. This time of year the land was clean and soft. The dogs had no trouble on the paths that seemed to be almost new in their appearance. The four of them left the next day after Rangak had gotten some supplies from their little store in Anchorage. He also sold a great many furs and "ulu's", the little knives that they had been making for over fifty years. Rangak told his father that this was a new land that they were going to, one that belonged to the English, though it was mostly indian. The area was starting to get settlers looking for gold, silver and copper. He told his mother that they were a rough bunch who drank a lot of the white man's whiskey and made lots of noise, but they were honest with him at his trading post. He told them about the post. "We have had to make it larger several times and it is still too small. People come to stay overnight and so we have had to add places for the travellers to sleep. The little lights that we have made for so many years are still in demand,

as are the food bowls that you taught us to make. When people cannot take it anymore and want to leave, we buy what they have to sell and this gives us goods to trade and sell to newcomers. As you know each year I come down to Anchorage and meet one of our ships and pick up what we will need for the next year. This is how I send the monies back to you." The father heard this and was pleased. He turned to James and asked, "Are you going to come into the family business?" The boy thought for a few minutes and said, "I want to go into the business but there is another place that I think you should be looking at to open a trading post. One of the things that seemed to be needed is fresh foods and meats. When I am old enough I am going to the United States and get some land and start, what the American's call a ranch. The old man laughed and said "Rangak he is certainly one of us. He already has an eye for the future and also the wandering urge. You are teaching him well." Rangak laughed and said, " He seems to teach us as well. He is very good at trading for gold and though there is very little he knows how to trade for it. He is one of the reasons that we made such a good profit last year." The old man asked, "How much of the profit came from his work?" Probably one hundred and fifty dollars, father." "If that is the case then we shall set aside ten percent of that money for him and he now is part of the business. All the gold he trades for he will get his percentage for his new start in America. Tell me James where do you want to go in America?" The boy answered, "There is a territory called the Dakota territory where they say corn and wheat grow along with potatoes. Also there are animals there to supply meat and fur. I think that this is where I'll have the best chance." The two older men listened and they heard themselves at an earlier time and in a different setting saying the same thing. CHAPTER 19 Karlek and Ivanya had died several years earlier. They had gone back to San Francisco and for a time Ivanya seemed to grow stronger and Karlek had hopes that they would have a still long life together. They were both buried in the Russian cemetery where the plot they had chosen was shaded by a large tree. Gold was discovered in Alaska in 1880 near the Gastineau Channel area and the first influx of settlers since the Purchase started the towns of Juneau, Douglas and Treadwell, near the mines. Prospectors went into the interior to prospect the Upper Yukon valley. It was here that they started the famous Klondike gold rush in 1896. It was here that the trading post and hotel called Kani was located. Rangak and Elizabeth had planned well and had prospered. James Karl was now a young man and he had amassed a good deal of money in his gold trading. Enough, in fact, to put together the things that he would need to go to the Territory of the Dakotas. He had taken a wife, an indian girl named Pohatas or Bright One. The name was good for she was wise in ways that made the older ones marvel. She was able to get everything in order for the trip while James went about his final trading. The two men discussed the ways that he would send the furs and the meats and vegetables to the trading post. It was decided that they would use indians as guides and trappers. They would be able to do what was needed far quicker than could the young man. It was agreed that one trip a year James would come back home and one trip a year

Rangak would come to their home to see what else would be of value to the business. The trip to the new land was difficult and if the young man were not married to Bright One there would have been problems with the Indian bands that roamed the area, searching for the "pale faces" who had tried to take their lands from them. When they got to the land they found that it had become one of the United States. This was something that they had not even thought about back at the trading post. Pushing southward they found an area where the land was good and water was plentiful. The land looked much like the where they had just come from. Bright One said they should start their farm near the water and put their tent near the center of the land so that they could see in all directions. This would be the way that they would measure the lines of their land. The river was swift and looked as if it would be good for fishing, thought James. They spent the next several weeks getting set up and learning the ways of the indians in the area. The chief, Running Antelope, saw that they had come in friendship and a trust was formed. James told the chief of his plans to hire some of the indians to take goods back to the trading post in the Yukon. The chief said that he would pick out the men for him to use. The pay would go to the tribe to buy from the white man. The days had been long and good for the new family. The indians helped them to build fences and pens for the animals that would feed them during the first winter. Running Antelope showed them how to plant wheat and how to fish for trout in the river. James knew that the winter would come and they would not be able to hunt and fish when the heavy snows came. Bright One took most of the fish and prepared them to be stored in a small root cellar that she made for just such a time. The indian women came to trust the bright smiling young woman from another tribe. Running Antelope told James that he must go to the capitol and register his land or other white men would come and take it from him. He was worried about leaving his wife alone but the indian assured him that they would see that she was not bothered. The next day James made a map showing the boundaries of his land. After it was done he prepared to walk to the city. Running Antelope laughed at him and said that the distance was too great for him to walk there and back before the cold weather set in. The chief told his son to get one of the chief's ponies and take it to James. The boy was to go with him to see that no harm came to him. He was told that this was his brother and that meant that he also was a son of the chief. The next day the two men started our for the capitol. The trip was straight south and for the first few days the ride was painful for the young man from Alaska. He had never ridden a horse and it was hard to learn to sit with out feeling every bounce. The young indian, Sitting Bear, laughed as he watched his new friend. Finally on the

third day he showed him how to use the blanket to take the pressure off the body. After a two week ride they reached the capitol, Boise City. This was a new and strange sight to the men. James Karl had heard about San Francisco from his father and his grandfather but he had never seen so many buildings and people in one place. He was afraid that he would not be able to answer the questions about the land. These people may be too smart for him. They rested on the outskirts of the town for a day and then he went to the office where he was to record his map. It was almost too easy, he thought. James wanted to see what the settlers who were going inland were buying. He also wanted to buy some things for them to use back at the farm which was now called a ranch. It seems that if you raise cattle it's a ranch. If you raise crops it is a farm. He had laughed and said what do they call his place for he was raising cattle and crops. It would be called The Kani Farm & Ranch Co. When he returned to his home he was surprised to see that there were many logs cut and being shaped into a large cabin. A stone fireplace was already in place and he could see that it had already been used. He wondered how she had managed all of the things that had happened while he was gone. The answer came quickly as three men and an older woman came from behind the logs with Bright One. The men had long beards and he could see that two of them were his age, while one was much older, about his father's age. Bright One saw him and came running. "James these people, the Smith's, came by right after you left. They had some trouble with Indians on the other side of the mountains. Running Antelope said that they were indians that were fighting the soldiers and were killing all of the whites who came through their lands. The two young men had their wives killed and when they got here they were tired and hungry. I talked to them and then to Running Antelope who also talked to them. He told them that we were all friends in this valley and they must follow the rules that you had set with the indians. Mr. Smith said that they were going to the Washington Territory and asked if they could stay with their wagons for the winter. Running Antelope told them that they could camp on the other side of the river. Mr. Smith saw that we did not have any place but the tent and went and talked to his sons and the indians. A few days later they were bringing in these logs and building the fireplace. Karl we are going to have a house!" She exclaimed. " Now you can make your mark." she said. The days passed quickly, the cabin was finally finished and furs were hung over the windows and on the floor. It was not difficult for Karl, as he was now called by everyone, to make a table and some benches. He had bought some pots and shovels and hoes while he was at the capitol. Now he was ready to start the ranch and farm. The weather changed his mind. It was turning colder and the days were getting shorter. He had hoped to hunt for some of the buffalo so that he could have some furs to send to his father. He also wanted to send him other things to sell.

He had seen the indian women making beautiful blankets and he wondered if they would sell some to him. He approached the chief to ask him how to approach the women about the blankets. The chief said that he would talk to the women and see if they would sell any of the blankets. Karl told him that this would be a way for the indians to make some of the white man's gold. Three days later the indian came back to the log house. Walking behind him were three of the indian women. A meeting was held and it was agreed that the Kani Kompany would buy all the blankets the women could supply for two dollars, gold. The women said that they would have them ready for the spring so that they could take them to the main trading post. Karl had another idea and the next day he went to the older Smith and asked if one of his boys would take a message to California for him. It was to go to San Francisco and San Diego. If the boy could leave now he would beat the snows on the way there and could start back from the companies southern store and arrive at the beginning of the spring. The older man asked his sons if they were interested and Paul, the tallest one said he would. Karl bought four of the blankets from the women and had the boy take them to the two stores of the company. He gave the young man fifty dollars in gold for his expenses and told him to find out how many they would like for their stores at three dollars each. The boy left the next day. The elder Smith reminded the boy of the kindness shown by the young man from Alaska and the indians that lived nearby. Pohatas had made a fine wife for Karl. She ran the home and helped with the things that they needed for themselves. She also changed her name to Polly. She said that it sounded like she was a "white eye." Karl laughed. "You and I look as much like a white eye as does Running Antelope, or me for that matter." She smiled her shy smile and gave him a kiss. "Go to work, you fool. How many pelts and skins have you gotten this week?" He smiled at her and went about his work. They had been here for two years and they were doing well. His father bought thirty of the blankets for the store in the Yukon. James Karl sent twenty-five to the store in San Francisco. Susan would sell all they sent. San Diego was a different matter. The indians in Mexico could make them as cheap as the indians of Idaho so there was no sense in sending them so far south. For his part Karl was buying the Ulu's, the little knives that worked so well for cutting and skinning. Karl was also sending his first shipment of meat. He had waited until the first cold came so that the meat would last. He salted the meat and tied it in large cloth bags. The indians built some sleds that were pulled by horses. They could carry four or five quarters on each sled. Each took two extra horses. Sitting Bear was in charge of taking goods to the trading post in the Yukon. He did some of the trading for things that could be used in their village. On the other side of the river where the Smith's still lived a small settlement started to grow. The little town was called Grangeville and the towns people were growing wheat and potatoes. The towns people started to form a government and set up a school. Modern times were coming to the area.

One day shortly before spring old Mathias Smith came to Karl with a request. The people of the town wanted to elect their first mayor and the only one that they wanted was Karl. Smith was the spiritual leader of the community and he was sent to ask young Karl. Karl knew that if he were to take the job it would interfere with the everyday operation of the business. He and Polly had two children and she was spending much time teaching them the ways of past, both her heritage and that of James Karl. She also made sure that they were able to see all of the good qualities of the indians that were their friends, and the whites who were always there for them. Karl talked over the situation with Polly who always seemed to have the right answers. He remembered that his mother and his grandmother were also women of decision. Polly listened carefully to his words and then went to see Mr. Smith. She had started going to church with her children. Sometimes Karl went also. She talked at great length with the older women and then talked to people in the town. She was well liked and respected, always there to help. A few nights later when the children were asleep she and Karl talked again. It was decided that if he became Mayor he would have to have someone come into the business with them. They first talked about one of the Smith boys; but Karl felt that they would not be able to handle the responsibility to them as well as to the other stores in the Caine Companies. Karl looked at his wife and said, "I have a feeling that the one that would work out the best would be Sitting Bear. He is honest and knows the ways of the business and the routes to the north. He has always been interested in what we do and how we have built such a big business. The old chief is still in good health and Sitting Bear could be the one to run things with us until our children are big enough to take over." This was the first time that the thought of their children taking over had come up. Polly had secretly wanted their daughter, Alexis to become a teacher. She was bright and curious about everything. Even though she was only five years old she already was showing the signs of having her mothers wisdom. Other children, some even older, came to her to settle their arguments or give them advice. Joshua, the older one, was now eight and was looking more like his father each day. He went to school and then did the chores around the house which had grown to six rooms. He had even taken one of the summer trips to the Yukon and helped with the animals on the way. Polly had always hoped that he would go into the business and now it sounded as if that would happen. It was decided, that night, he would be the mayor and the next day they went to the old chief to ask if they could talk to Sitting Bear about coming to work for them. The chief agreed with the promise that if he should be needed back on the reservation he would be allowed to come at once. There was no hesitation with their answer and the chief called his son to the tent. He spoke privately to the boy for some minutes and then asked Karl to explain what he wanted of the young man. Karl outlined what he wanted Sitting Bear to do and for how long. He agreed that if he was needed back on the reservation he would be able to leave at once. He would work until such time as the children would take over the business, and then would receive a special payment each month for the rest of his life. His pay would be twenty-five dollars a month and ten

percent of all new business he brought to the company. All of this was overwhelming to the young man and he needed time to think this through. He wanted to talk to his new bride, Little Bird, and hear what she thought. He told them that he would have answer for them in two moons. The answer came and the work began. Sitting Bear had much to learn about the ways of the white man in business. He saw that there were things that could be done to make the company even bigger. He had some ideas that he would like to try and told Karl that he thought he could bring in more business. First he had to know all of the resources of the Kani and Caine companies. He did not want to waste time on things that they had tried and did not work.

CHAPTER 20 The year was 1912 and the state had gone for Woodrow Wilson. Karl had been elected to the state legislature and was gone for several weeks at a time when they were in session. He was now forty-eight years old. His children were grown and the boy Joshua or Joe as he was now called was a young man of twenty-two. His younger sister, Alexis, was away at school in the city of Boston, on the east coast of the United States. Sitting Bear had done well with the business. He had brought the lumber business to the Caine Company. Just to the east of the city of Grangeville there were large stands of timber which could be cut and sawed and sold for great profit in other countries. The Caine Shipping Company handled all of the shipping throughout the world. It appeared as if the wood would never end. At the same time in the same region new mines for gold were opened and the company hired miners to work for them, outfitting them and buying the gold from them at a fair price. The indians continued to make the blankets and also to melt the gold into jewelry which sold for great profit. Everyone was getting rich. The trading post in the Yukon became a town called Whitehorse and had a large population for the area. Rangak was now seventy years old and Elizabeth had died a year earlier. He too had hired one of the local indians to help him in the trading post. He had taught him to read, write and count money, as well as how to trade his way. He soon found out that Running Wolf, the indian, was a better trader than he was.

One day he called in the indian to sit and talk with him. He told him that he wanted Running Wolf to take over the management of the business. He would pay him thirty dollars a month plus twenty-five percent of the profits. Running Wolf agreed. A few weeks later the older man packed his things took his money and gold and headed for his son James Karl and his family. He wanted to make sure that he would still deal with the store in the North. Rangak also wanted to go and see his brother, Kolosh, one last time and to feel the warm air again. The trip to the business in Idaho was made easy by the fact that he was travelling with the indians who had just brought a shipment into the north. His grandson, Joshua, he would never call him Joe, was the leader and when he heard that grandfather Rangak was coming back with him he was very happy. His grandfather had always told him stories of the family. He had told him of the great mountain of his great grandfather ,and the family before him. He listened eagerly about the eagle who was friends with the family. He had seen eagles around where they had lived but none had ever come to the village. He knew that his father would be pleased to see grandfather for he had often suggested that he move to their home. When the little party arrived back at Grangeville with the goods from the north and the special passenger a great feast was held. Rangak had been there many times before on his annual trip but this was special to all, for this was to be his home. Only James Karl was not there. He was at the state capitol. There were big things happening. The railroad now had over two thousand miles of track in the state and people were coming far too fast for the old timers. There was trouble in Europe and people were afraid of large amounts of foreigners coming to the state. There were a few miles of paved roads in the capitol and now cars were making their appearance. Lighting was by gas and the new electric lights were also seen in the city. Idaho was growing and many resented the fact. Karl was not one of them for he could see that this could only help his business as well as others. He had opened a store here in the capitol and had one of the Smith boys running the business. All the boy had to do was to sell and order. He had a bank to make deposits, and monies were held out for salaries and special expenses. Soon Karl bought the building where the store was and added some sleeping quarters for himself, over the store. This was for the times he had to be in the capitol. Several days later Karl returned to Grangeville to find that his father had come to live with them. He was overjoyed and somewhat boastful of all that he had accomplished. The older one could see that in him and one day when they were talking said to the younger man, "It must make you very proud to think that you have all of this because of your grandfather and grandmother. Just think what it would be like if we still lived in one of the little villages in Alaska. We would still be trading for skins and bowls. We owe a lot to our ancestors and it is only right that we always remember who we are and how we got to where we are at this time." Karl knew that he had just learned a lesson in humility and hoped he was smart enough to use it. He said to his father, "I only hope that when I am older I will be able to see all of the things you see. That my

children will learn from me as I still learn from you." The son gave the father a gentle hug and there were tears in his eyes. A month later a letter came for Rangak from his brother Kolosh. He told him how much he was looking forward to his coming. He had much to show him and to talk to him about. The train came right to their town and he would meet him when he got there as soon as he knew when he was coming. Rangak had never seen a train. In fact he had never seen a picture of one. Was it safe? How fast did it go? How does it stop? There was a fear of this new and huge machine when James Karl showed him a picture. Karl explained away all of his questions and then told him that it would get him there in less than ten days. The trip by horse and stage would take a month. The old man agreed to go on the "Iron Horse," as it was known to the indians. Karl would take him to the station at the capitol. He wanted to show the other store to his father and also the mines that they owned. Money was no longer any problem for the family. They had all they could ever spend, and yet to anyone who knew them they had not changed from when they came to the area. Polly was still the one the women came to with their problems. The indians always came to the Tanana's before talking with anyone else. No one was jealous of their success and everyone wished them good fortune. Karl had represented them well, first as their Mayor then as a State Representative and now as a State Senator. There were those who wanted him to be the next governor but he had always cut them off. Three weeks later the two men left for the state capitol. Rangak boarded a train that was to take him to San Francisco and then to San Diego. It would be good to stop in San Francisco and see the graves of his parents. He would visit the store there and the docks where the boats were kept when they were not at sea. When he arrived at the city he was amazed to see how new it looked. He had not heard of the devastating earthquake and fire a few years earlier. He marvelled at the largeness and the grandeur of the city. He felt that he did not belong. Money was not the problem, he had plenty of that. The people were so different. It seemed as if everyone was in a hurry. He rested for a day and then went to the Russian Cemetery, to the graves of his parents. As he sat there and looked at their markers he wondered if they could know of the success that they had brought to the family. He was glad that these were his parents. He had seen so many who did not have the upbringing that he and his brother had. His eyes misted and the thought that he would be joining them soon brought forth feelings of sadness and joy. He wondered how soon it would be. That afternoon he went to the docks to see what their little ships now looked like. He was shocked. All up and down two rows of docks were ships with "Caine" as part of their name. There were sailing ships and ships with big tubes coming from the center of them. He saw a man going on to one of the ships and asked him about the tubes. The man looked surprised and then laughed and told him that the ships were powered by steam engines. The older man went to the offices of the Caine Shipping Company and asked to see the person who ran the business. A tall good looking

man came out of the office in the back of the room and introduced himself as Jacob Ashton. The name Ashton rang a bell in Rangak's memory. "My name is Rangak Tanana. I think that I am one of the owners of this company." "Mr. Tanana, I am the son of Susan Ashton. Your father and mother gave her the business to manage here in San Francisco many years ago. She trained me to manage the shipping lines. My sister manages the three stores here, and my older brother handles every thing to the north. He is the one that ships to you in the Yukon." The old man remembered that he had met the other brother, Matthew Ashton, several times on his trips to Anchorage to pick up goods and send down the money for the year. He wondered where all the money was now. As if sensing his questions, Jacob said, "I suppose that you would like to see all of the records of your holdings. Mother still keeps all of the books and we'll go to see her. She will be happy to know that you are still alive. Why are you here, sir?" the younger man asked." I have stopped trading in the Yukon and turned the business over to one of the men who had worked for me. He will still deal only with the Caine boats. Everything will still be the same. I am going to San Diego to see my brother. After that I will go to live with my son and his family in the state of Idaho. The companies seem to be doing well and it is time for the old to step aside for the new." Jacob smiled at the last statement. There was something on his mind and now was a good time for him to bring it up to the owner. He had talked it over with his mother and his brother and sister. " "Mr. Tanana," he said. "There is an idea that I have had and this is the time to talk it over with you. I think it would be a good idea if your family changed it's name from Tanana. It is a good name but with the sentiments of the people in the country we could do better if the owners had American names." The old man was furious. What right had this person, who worked for the company, who worked for him, to propose such an idea. The man was too angry to say anything, and Jacob could see that he had better leave the matter alone. He had picked a name for them but this was not the time to bring it up. He asked the older man to come to his mother's to see what the companies were doing. Along the way, riding in silence in the younger man's car, Jacob made sure to pass all the three stores. Each had a large sign with the name of the Caine Company in bright gold letters on a light blue background with a picture of a great mountain in the center. Rangak smiled at this. It was good that the old scenes of the family never die. He knew that he should go back, once more to see the mountain of his family. He had been there three times in his life and he always had a feeling of belonging. Rangak was starting to lose his anger as they approached a large house sitting on top of a hill, with a brick road leading to the front. Susan, looking younger than her years met him at the door with a hug. She was like a little girl with a new doll. Her eyes twinkled and the laugh lines in her face gave her a look of a happy person. "Well Rangak" I see that you found Jacob. You must have seen the boat docks. What do you think of your `little' fleet of ships? I hope that it has met with your approval. Did you get to see the old store, and the new ones? Was there anything you didn't like? God has been

good to all of us." Jacob laughed and said, "Slow down. You are going too fast for me. I'm not leaving this minute or even this day. Everything looks wonderful. You have done a good job; but that's why mother picked you. She always said that you could run the business better than father. He finally agreed with her. The stores are very nice. How did you come up with the mountain drawing?" "When Kolosh was here a couple of years ago he came up with the idea. He said that it represented the spirit of the family." she told the man. "He has put it on the other stores and it is part of the flags of the shipping lines. You see we have become very civilized and people see the picture and they are reminded of the company that has always been here for them and honest. I think your great grandfather would have been proud of all of this." Rangak listened to all of this and then he spoke. "Your son tells me that with all of this we should change our last name. Has he told you of this silly idea?" Susan looked at him seeing the hurt and also the confusion in his face. "Rangak, we are older than many others. You are older than I and you have spent your life in the north where there is very little change going on these days. There are many more people there than twenty years ago. But the world is turning around the United States. With all that is happening in other countries it would be well to have a name that shows that this is an American company. That people can identify with. It is hard to identify with Tanana without thinking of the Orient. I know that this is the name of your family and has been for hundreds of years, but times have changed and so have the places we do business with all over the world. We need to be American all the way through." Rangak sat and listened to all of this and was trying to work it out in his mind. Why was the name so wrong? The people in the north had trusted this name since the early 1800's. What would he call himself? What would others call him? He was afraid that he would even forget a new name. He did not know what name would still bring honor to the family. "I suppose you have picked out a name for the family, Susan." The woman sat quietly. She could see the anguish in his eyes, the tears, the sadness. "I could not come up with one that seemed to do justice to the family, but Jacob has." she said. "Tell him Jacob." his mother said. "I think that I have a name that will keep the reputation of the company as well as it's link to both the past and the future." the younger man said. I would change the name to `Caine'. This would allow everyone to still do business using the name as always, but when people looked at the names of the owners and principals they would see Caine, a good old `Yankee' name." The older man sat and thought in silence. The air in the room was heavy and the feelings were unlike any other any of them had ever experienced. Finally Rangak spoke. "How long does it take for one of our ships to get to Anchorage?" "We can do it with good winds in two weeks." The man answered with a quizzical look. "How long does it take for one of the ships to get to San Diego?" Rangak again asked. "We can get one of our steam ships there in four days." Rangak smiled at them and then he said. "I want you to get me to Anchorage and have a ship wait for me. I am going to the mountain. It has always given our family the answers. I will go to find the eagle and the answer."

The boy was lost in this strange request, but Susan knew what the man was looking for and that this would help him to find the way to his heart.

CHAPTER 21 The trip to Anchorage and Knik was uneventful, however Rangak found out that the United States government was about to build a large port and a railway head in the camp known as Ship Creek Landing. He wondered what would happen when people came and there was a need for supplies and housing. He knew that the project was still a year away. Age had not dulled the old man's mind and even now was thinking of new ways to make money. After landing, Rangak found a wagon and horses for his trip to the great mountain. Stopping at the home of his father and mother he soon found out that there was nobody left who remembered the family. He made his way north and to the little mining settlement of Wasilla and to Teeland's store. He had met old Teeland before and now stopped to spend the night and catch up on lost time. Several days later he arrived at the Trapper Creek trading post. This was where all of his family had always started their journey to the western side of the mountain. Here were the trails of the first Rangak and Karlek. This was the way of the family. The way to knowledge. He remembered the story of how the great bird came and landed by his grandfather. He had heard the story of how his father had also seen the bird; how it guided him to the last of the village people. He knew that he must camp at the same spot. He wondered if he could find it and if the girl would be on the rock. Who was she and what did she look like. The man continued through the passes and the lowlands between the giant mountain. He was afraid of the mountain, of it's power. He had never seen anything as large and forbidding as Denali. After a journey of three days he came to the place where he knew the bird had been and where his father had stayed. Making camp in the bright sunlight of the long days, he marvelled at the clear picture before him. He had always heard that part of the mountain had a cloud ring around it so that you could not see all of the giant. Today was different. Different from his other visits so long ago. He could see for miles in every direction. Looking up as he slowly made his way to the north he came upon the rock ledge that he had always known was there but had never been able to find. There was

the place where the woman was to be seen. He saw nothing. Settling down for some rest he decided that this is where he was to find the answer. As the hours slipped by he dozed in the sun. Suddenly he was jolted from his nap by the shrill cry of an eagle. As he looked up he saw the giant bird circling the rock,landing on it and then slowly rising to the sky. Rangak knew that he must climb to the rock. That here was the truth that he needed to find. Slowly the old man went up as the eagle stayed up near the rock. After three hours of climbing he reached the rock and sat down to see what he was supposed to see up on this wide ledge. He looked at the ground and at the sides of the cliff. Still he could see nothing that looked different. He started to think that he had come up to this place for nothing. With the rushing of wind the giant eagle slowly landed next to the shaken man. The eagle looked up at Rangak as if he knew him. Rangak remembered how his grandfather had patted the eagle and he bent down to stroke the feathers. The eagle ruffled his feathers and looked as if he were smiling at the older man. Moving away from the man the eagle hopped out in front and turned to the man as if to ask him to follow him. Rangak was puzzled but moved behind the bird toward the far edge of the rock. When he was almost at the edge he saw a small hole in the rock. Getting down on his knees he looked in and saw a shiny object. Reaching in he pulled it out and saw that other things were attached to it. There was an early knife that the family had designed and which they still made good money on. Also there was a small pouch which he opened and found some gold dust. The thing that interested him the most was the paper-like material that he pulled out and looked at. It had many pictures and signs on it and it seemed to be telling a story. The older man was tired and climbed down to his campsite. After eating his meal he started to try and understand the story behind the drawings. Slowly he realized that this was the story of his family from the time they had come to this land until his father had left. He was curious why his father did not take this record with him and then he understood. When he had come up here looking for the rest of their village he had missed the hole where he had found the picture map. Everything on the map pointed to the south and every thing seemed to be going forward. This was too much to try and understand now. He was tired and went to sleep. The next morning he awoke feeling better than he had in a long time. He prepared to go back, though he still did not have an answer. Suddenly he saw the eagle again spinning his way around the side of the mountain soaring on the currents, like a ship on the sea; always going forward with the winds. He thought about all of this and just as he was to leave he heard the cry of the giant bird once more as it came to land at his feet. He knew that this was a sign, but of what? Was this the end of the past and the beginning of a new future? He knew now what course he must follow. Rangak slowly turned to look at the eagle once more and then knowing what he must do headed back down the mountain.

CHAPTER 22 When Rangak arrived back at Susan's house he sent a telegram to everyone who must share in the decision; Kolosh, Piotr, James Karl and Joshua. When Susan heard who was coming she said, "I see that the old ways still last. No woman." At the end of the second week everyone had arrived. Jacob took them on a tour of San Francisco. They also spent much time seeing to the business, properties, books and paperwork dealing with the Caine Company and it's holdings. Rangak could see that the others were getting restless for he had not told them anything yet as to why he wanted them to come here. He asked Susan if she would mind having all of them to dinner as well as Jacob. He wanted to discuss this in as pleasant an atmosphere as possible without any other distractions. Susan was happy to this, and set about calling the various hotels to prepare the dishes that she was sure they would all like. She asked that everything be delivered by six that evening. That night was one that was to change the destiny of all who were concerned. Rangak brought the subject of changing their names to an `Americanized' version. He had Jacob explain what would be the advantage and to answer all of the questions that were put to him. Susan was proud of this man who had become almost one of the family of those whom he was talking to, and she could see that they listened to what he had to say. When Jacob was finished Kolosh looked at the two older sons and said, "Well let's hear what you have to say. It will affect you the most." Piotr spoke first. "I think that it's a great idea. People down where we live can hardly say my name and think I am a half-caste Chinaman. I have wanted to change my name to Peter for a long time. It would also help in the business. As for the name Caine, we use it every day in our business and it would make others feel that we belong." James Karl was very quiet for a moment and then spoke softly. "There is a conflict in me about this. We have a proud name that has become known as a name of honesty and fairness in our part of the country. The stores in Alaska still use the old name, Kani, and people believe in that name and what it stands for. I am in politics and people know me by the name Tanana. If I want to continue in politics I may have a hard time explaining why my name had to be changed. Joshua, here, is already called Joe so he has no problem and it would be easy for him to make the change. I think that my father would be very sad to have such a thing happen though he sees it as good for the company and it's growth. Perhaps there is another way to please us all. I have some ideas, but I need to work them out. I will do that tonight, but for now let us hear the rest and at breakfast I will tell you what I have come

up with overnight." Jacob and Susan had never met James Karl before but they could see that he was the one who would carry the rest. He had a way about him that made others listen and respect him. They could see why he was such a force in the politics of Idaho. They had read his name in the papers when the state was mentioned. Now they had met the person and they were impressed and glad that he had come. The following day they all met in the garden of the house. James Karl had them all sit and face him so that they would all be part of the discussion. "I have an idea that may work for all of us." he said. For our boys there is no problem. They have been born in this country and they are more like the people of their area then of the old family. We have been teaching them the ways of the business and they know that our way can never change if we are to continue to prosper. Jacob is like one of us and I have no worries with him running the shipping lines. In fact as has always been the custom of our grandfathers and our fathers he should own a part of the lines and share in its profits just as his mother did so many years ago. As for our parents, they should not have to change their names for these are the names that people have grown to know and respect. A solution may be to set up a permanent monthly amount of money to be paid to each of them as a profit. Their names would appear as investors in the various holdings, but not as policy makers. We would all know that in truth they would still make all of the decisions." Susan was glad that this man had come. She saw that he was the one that the future of Caine Companies rested with. She felt a soft glow of pride as he spoke of her son, much the same as I 85858585858585858585858585858585 8585 8585 8585

8686 8686

878 7¤87878787878787878787µ8787§878787878787878787878787878787878787-87878787 8787!8787"8787#8787$8787%8787&8787'8787(8787)8787*8787+8787,87878787.8787/878708787187872878738787487875878768787787878878798787:8787; 8787 <8787=8787>8787?8 787 @8787A8787B8787C8787D8787E8787F8787G8787H8787I8787J8787K8787L8787M8787N 8787O8787P8787Q8787R8787S8787T8787U8787V8787W8787X8787Y8787Z8787[878 7\8787] 8787 ^8787_8787`8787a8787b8787c8787d8787e8787f8787g8787h8787i8787j8787k8787l 8787m8787n8787o8787p8787q8787r8787s8787u8787ýÿÿÿv8787w8787x8787y8787z87 87{8787|8787}8787~87878787€8787vanya had spoken to Karlek about her in the old days, so many years ago. Rangak also saw the wisdom in his son's words and it was he that was to make the change easier for everyone. "James Karl, again you know the right things to say and do. You are more like your grandfather than like me. To make this easier I want you to take over all of my holdings. You will give the money that I will need to live on and to do some things that I have always wanted to do. I will be out of the business and will make none of the decisions. You have shown yourself to be of great wisdom and strength in all matters. You are honest and just and so it is only right that you take over now. I am getting too old to handle all of this anyway." James Karl and the others were stunned. This was the man who had taken over most of the work to keep the business growing. Kolosh sat and thought for a moment, then said, "Well Piotr are you ready also to take the reins of the business and keep it running as the family has for almost hundred years?" The boy was quiet for several minutes. The time seemed endless and the breaths of everyone could be heard. Finally he stood up and turned to his father. There were tears in his eyes as he spoke. "You and mother have always given me a sense of what is right and wrong. If I could only do half as well as you and uncle Rangak have done I would consider myself a great success. If you trust me with all of this I will try to never let you down." There was much crying and handshaking and Susan was being crushed in the hugs of the two older men. The rest of the day was taken up with matters of the present companies and which one's to keep and which to sell or disband. Joe and Peter, the names for the two boys, Joshua and Piotr, spent the better part of a week planning how they would meet and when. It was decide that they would meet each summer in San Diego and each winter in a place that they could easily get to despite the weather. All agreed that Susan's son was the head of the shipping lines and that he would get what was promised. Each of the two older men would get Twenty-five hundred dollars each month. If they needed more all they had to do was to ask. Rangak and Kolosh decided that they would take a trip together and spend their days catching up on the past. They planned to see the rest of the United States and then go to Europe. Then they would return and go to the Orient and Russia, where the family had begun. Jacob made all of the arrangements for all of the trips except to the Orient. There were war clouds gathering in the world and he felt

better about waiting until the two men got back before planning the rest of the trip. They would take trains to all parts of the United States where a train would go and then they would take river boats to the other places. When they had finished the East coast it would be early in 1915 and they would spend four months in Europe returning on the May trip of the Cunard liner Lusitania.

CHAPTER 23 James Karl was narrowly defeated for governor of his state by Moses Alexander. Grangeville became the county seat of Idaho County. The man returned to full time management of the Caine holdings and his family. Joe had taken the Caine name and had moved to a little town in Texas. It was here that he brought his father one day in the spring of 1917. It had been a year since his grandfather and uncle Kolosh had died in the sinking of the Lusitania. The family was wrapped in grief and the thoughts were still painful. The once bubbling Susan had become solitary and morose, according to Jacob who had come to the funeral in San Francisco's Russian cemetery. He was buried, along with Uncle Kolosh, next to their parents. Two generations of the family lay in the ground overlooking the bay. Joe met his father at the train station. It was a reunion of two men not just father and son. They were more than that. They were the last of a breed of men that had built an empire known for honesty and not for greed. Brownsville, Texas was the last stop on the eastern side of the state. It is bordered by the Rio Grande River on it's south side, along with the sleepy town of Matamoros, Mexico. This and the port less than twenty miles away brought the young man to the town. He saw this as a gateway to the eastern side of Mexico and also to the giant port of New Orleans. It also made the Island of Cuba a short trip. Cuba had sugar and tobacco. The best cigars in the world came from the little island. The river could be navigated by small boats and that opened up the entire Texas-Mexican border to the traders of the Caine company. From there it would be a short trip to start other stores and business's in the south and then to the east. Joe already had bought the town newspaper, paying a fair price and keeping all of the staff on the payroll. The people of the town never forgot this and they bought what they needed from the big store with the picture of a mountain and an eagle on the front over the doors. There were other things that made the area

one that the young man saw as a spot to start operations in the southeast, where he saw the next big explosion of industry. Peter had the western part of the United States under the Caine Company banner. Growing in abundance in the area were sweet oranges. The area was a mecca for fishing and that meant the sales to the middle and northern parts of the country. He also knew that cattle could be shipped by rail to the city and then be slaughtered and shipped to the south and east in better condition than coming from the far west. It was here that he built the company's first slaughter house. All of this was secondary to the real reason for setting up of the southeastern empire of Caine Company. OIL was on Joe's mind. He had heard about the discovery of oil at Spindletop in 1901, as well as the thousands who were flocking to the area looking for the "black gold". Here was the reason for trading posts, to help the person looking for goods to do their prospecting. This was just like the gold rush he had heard about in Alaska and in California. The older man saw what his son had seen and was pleased with what he had done. "Joshua, you have done well. You have carried on the spirit of the Tanana's. Your grandfather would be proud of you. Do you have good people working for you? Are you fair with everyone?" Joe laughed and said, "To you I am still the little boy, Joshua. We will visit what we have here and then you will be the judge of your own questions. Also there is someone that I want you to meet." For the next two days the two men roamed the area including a visit to Matamoros. It was here that Joe showed his father their new factory. Here were made the little knives that the family had sold for generations. Now Joe had developed another knife that was very slender and strong."This knife is for cutting out the good parts of the fish. The part that is called the fillet. I cannot make them as fast as the orders come in. The labor is much less here than in Brownsville and it has given me an inside track to other goods. I am sending Pete new designs in blankets and in jewelry." The father saw that the boy had indeed taken up the company reins and had allowed them to prosper while still doing good. "I should not be surprised at all of this. I remember when you took that first trip to your grandfather's store. Even then you were seeing new things and new ways for our company to grow. There is much trouble in Mexico with the bandits and the government is all mixed up. How do you get on with all of these groups?" The boy answered, with a smile. " It is simple father, I treat everyone the same and I tell the bandits the story of the mountain and the eagle and of our family. They see the truth and the wisdom of our ancestors and they respect us for that. The townspeople have seen or heard how I treat the people in Brownsville and know that I treat them the same way. The government down here is happy because I have put people to work and the people are happy for the same reason." James was proud of this young man now only twenty-six years old but wiser than most people twice his age. On the fifth day of their visit, James asked his son when he was coming home to see his mother and his sister. It seems that his sister had started several schools in the little towns and was now looked on as the head of all the schools in the area. The rumor was that she would be going to the capitol as the first woman and youngest school superintendent in the state. His mother was still working with the

women in town but also others come to her for advice and she has become known as, "the wise woman of Idaho." More than most men she was trusted by indians and whites alike. Joe was happy to hear all of this for that would make his next task that much easier. "Father, there is someone I want you to meet, a girl." James laughed, "I was wondering when you were going to show me this`person' you wanted me to meet. I didn't think it was a man." Joe smiled shyly and said, "I have invited her to have dinner with us tonight. Her name is Maria Antonia de la Vegas, and she is different that any of the Mexican woman that you have ever seen." The rest of the day the two men spent walking and talking until the sun started to set. "I think we had better get ready to meet your young lady, but what about her parents?" Joe said that they would meet them tomorrow, if tonight went well. This last statement puzzled James but he held his thoughts to himself. The Brownsville Hotel was the best place to eat. The great dining room had large comfortable chairs. The room was lit by a giant chandelier and mirrors gave the room additional brilliance. Between each panel of glass hung large maroon velvet swages from the ceiling to the floor. It was into this setting the two men came. The head waiter smiled at Joe and guided the two men to a private booth near the back of the room. It was here that James Karl first saw the girl that was to become his future daughter-in-law. Maria Antonia de la Vegas was strikingly beautiful. Tall and with a molded face and body she gave the appearance of a lady stepping from a painting of the great masters. Her face was without a blemish and her coloring was striking, with just a slight hint of darkness. Her eyes were the bluest that James Karl had ever seen and her blond hair cascaded down her shoulders. Her gown was the same color as the swages in the room and made of a soft velvet that rustled as she stood. Her eyes sparkled and a smile parted her lips. "Father I have the honor to present Señorita Maria Antonia de la Vegas of Monterrey Mexico. Maria this is my father, James Karl Tanana." The food and the wine were excellent and James found that it was easy to talk to this young lady who was much like his own Polly, wise and kind, with a good sense of humor. He had never seen a Mexican with such coloring and when he told this to the young lady she explained that her family had come from Castile, a part of Spain, and had settled in Mexico City. There were many more who looked like her in color and hair. The young lady spoke with a soft and almost melodious voice. There was a lilt to her words that made James Karl think of the little birds of spring. Her look was one of happiness, and when she looked at Joe anyone could see she was deeply in love with the young man. James was sure that Polly would approve but first there would have to be a meeting of the two of them. Where it should be he did not know, but it had to be before a wedding. He thought for a moment and then said to the two of them. "It would be good if Señorita Vegas would meet your mother and sister and see where your roots are before you make too many more plans. Also we should meet her family." Maria answered, "We had also thought that this should happen, Mr. Tanana. Tomorrow we would like you to come to our `casa' to meet with my father and my mother. My sisters will be there but my brothers will not for they are all working on some of our ranches." The next day Joe and his father got into Joe's buggy and headed south across the border. James wondered where the girl was and asked his son. "She was escorted to their casa early this morning so that all

would be ready for us, when we get there. The ride was bumpy and dusty. The road was not as good as the trails back home and James felt that it would have been better on horseback. After travelling for about four hours they came to a small town called Lineras. They stopped at a "cantina" for lunch. James Karl was surprised to find that most of people seemed to know his son; and even more surprised to find that his son spoke their language. The father was impressed with what the boy had accomplished in such a short time. After lunch the boy went to the barn next store and brought out oats for the car. He put some extra in the rear of the buggy. He told his father it was for the return trip. When his father asked why he did not pay for it he was told that he had brought the oats and that they had let him store them in the barn. In return he would bring them foodstuffs from Brownsville when needed. A wise young man indeed thought the father. After riding for another three hours they came to a city that took the breath away from the older man. It's size was immense, spreading out in all directions. Monterrey was big. It looked bigger than San Francisco, bigger than Denver and certainly bigger than anything in Idaho. Travelling along the eastern side of the city they came to a tree-lined road that seemed to lead to some low hills. Ten minutes later they came to "Hacienda de la Vegas." "Well, I guess we're here," said the young man. James was breathless. In front of him was a wall ten feet high stretching at least two hundred feet and in the center a huge wooden door carved with doves and flowers and freshly painted in striking colors. The wall was a brilliant white and seemed to turn and go around, for how far he had no idea. "I had the same look when I first saw it, but wait 'till you see the inside." As if those were the secret words the huge gate opened and the two men drove in. James had always thought that Susan Ashton's house and the governors mansion in his home state were the biggest and most beautiful homes he had ever seen, but this topped all that he could imagine. Sprawling in front of them was a house with a wide front porch over one hundred feet long. Gardens of dazzling flowers were seen everywhere. A fountain of tile sat in the center of the gardens with a walk way of brick that led to the front of the snow white house. The wall kept going around and out of sight on both sides. It too was sparkling white on it's inside. Even the air felt soft and there was a gentle breeze that stirred the roses and carried their fragrance to the two men. The front door opened and standing in the center was Maria, dressed in a white gown that reached to the floor. In her hair was a brilliant red flower unlike any that James Karl had ever seen. If she was beautiful last night she was even more beautiful now, with the sunlight sending rays of gold through her hair. The two men started towards the house when a horseman came charging by and without stopping pulled the hat from Joe's head. Riding to the front door, he threw it to the girl. Joe turned to his father and said, "That was Miguel, one of her brothers. He was not supposed to be here, but I guess that the fact of your coming was too much for the rest of the family not to come back so that they could see if you are

good enough for the them." He laughed as he said this and James Karl laughed also. The father and son continued to the front porch and were greeted by Maria and her brother, Miguel. The two men were taken to their rooms so that they could change and get the dust from their bodies. Hot baths were waiting and when James Karl got out of his bath he found a change of clothes laid out and the dirty ones gone. There were fresh oils for the body and when he tried them he found that they eased his tired muscles. Before getting dressed he lay down to relax and think about the meeting with Maria's family. It was dark when there was a knock at the door and James Karl woke with a start. He had fallen asleep and was not ready to go down to meet the family. He called to the person who knocked and was relieved to find that it was his son who came in laughing and said, "I see you have already found the Mexican custom of `siesta'." The two men descended the long staircase into the lighted foyer. A tall fair man about the age of James Karl came forward. "Good evening señor Tanana, I am Juan Carlos de la Vegas, Maria's father. This is my wife Carlotta de la Vegas. Our home is yours. We are honored that you would accept our invitation." The man's english was perfect. Much better than his own, thought James Karl. "Come let me show you around. The women always have much to talk about and my son Miguel and your son seem to find things to keep them out of mischief. Dinner will be served shortly and then I would imagine you will have many questions as will I." The two men strolled first through the gardens lit with small lanterns that gave off sweet smells. Juan Carlos then took the other man to the back where the stables were. James had loved horses since he had come to Idaho. He had two on his small ranch and took great care with them so that they were always well groomed and ready to ride. When they got to the stables he was awe struck. There were over one dozen of the finest looking Palomino horses he had ever seen. Each was groomed to perfection. The stables were immaculate and there was none of the smells usually associated with large stables. The Mexican smiled at the way his guest was appreciating what he saw. "Tomorrow will be a special day and you will honor me by riding out to one of my holdings?" "Of course." James Karl said. "Nothing would give me more pleasure than to ride one of those horses. How in the world did you get such a fine match?" Asked James Karl. The other answered in a soft and gentle tone. "These are horses that I have bred. There have been many but I have only kept the ones that would match up with the others. Soon I had five mares and one perfect stallion, `El Grande Palomino' who sired most of these. This is his son." The man said pointing to the great horse in front of him. James gasped and said, "This animal is beautiful only I see by the teeth he is older." "You have a good eye for horses, my friend, the other man said with a smile. This is El Grande. He lives with his children but he is no longer used for breeding, only for riding. Tomorrow, if you wish, you will ride him and I his son." Dinner was what James Karl expected. The food was authentic foods from Mexico and the wine was from Spain. In good humor the family asked him questions that when he had finished answering told his life history. Juan Carlos was interested in the story of the mountain and the eagle. He said that there were many strange stories that had come

out of this country and from the gypsies of his native Spain that were similar but never proved. At this point Juan Carlos asked him the question he had been dreading for many years. "Señor Tanana have you visited the mountain? Have you seen the eagle?" James replied, "No señor Vegas, I have never gone back to Alaska. I have told myself that this must be done, but there was never a right time. I think that now the right time has come and when I get back to Idaho I shall go to `Denali'." The following day the two men rode for hours on the horses seeing all of the land. James was surprised when the other man told him that they had been riding the entire time on Vegas land. The orange trees, the cattle ranch and the cotton farms were seen and talked about. He learned that this was a small part of what the family owned. They had vineyards in Spain, gold and silver mines in Mexico and several other ranches and farms that produced food and cattle. It was nearing dark when they returned. Maria greeted them with a look at her father that made James wonder what was happening. The two of them talked for some time while James waited at the stable. He was puzzled but knew better than to ask what was going on between them. Dinner was a gala occasion, with lights, Spanish guitars and trumpets. The silver and the glasses were of a kind that the two Americans had never seen before. Toward the end of the dinner the two young people stood and walked to the head of the table where Señor de la Vegas was seated. One stood on each side of him and turning to look at each other the boy said to the girl; "Maria this is the time that I declare my love for you in public. Your father has talked to you today and told you of my intentions. I know that you have feelings for me and so I ask you, with your father and mother's permission, will you marry me?" The girl, blushing with a beauty that none of those present had ever seen, sighed and looking at Joseph and at her father said, "It is good that you have honored me by requesting my hand in the ways of our people. You have showed that you care for the things that I care for. Now what I care for the most is you. If my parents and yours agree then we will be married for I love you." Everyone looked at James. "So you think that you have surprised me Joe. I have a surprise for you. Before we left your place I went to the hotel and called your mother and told her about Maria and the look in your eyes when you said her name and when you looked at her in the restaurant. I told your mother, who is wiser than both of us, that you have found the right girl. I told her that it would be fine with me but I need to know how she would feel. Her answer was `I do not have to marry her. We have raised our son to make his own decisions. Why should we try and make this, his most important of all decisions.' As usual your mother showed her great wisdom. It will be easy to love Maria as a daughter. Her father and I have much in common and already I treasure his wisdom. You have our blessing." The boy moved closer to the girl and, taking from his pocket, he placed a ring on her finger. Everyone applauded and the talk at the table became filled with song and laughter. After the meal was over the two older men went out to the garden to smoke a cigar. Juan Carlos said, "It is our custom to post the bans on the door of our church. These must be posted for a period of time. This is good for it is only right that we should travel

to your home so that the women can meet each other. We can also plan the ceremony as to the time and the place. It will give me a chance to see your wonderful country. We might find some mutual interests." The next day it was agreed that the party would leave in a week and travel by train from Brownsville to Boise City, and from there to Grangeville by car. It was that night that James made the decision to go to Denali immediately. He packed his things the next day and told Juan Carlos of his plan. Juan Carlos saddled up the golden horse and told him to take it to town where he would have a train ready to take him to Mexicali. From there a car would drive him to his cousins in San Diego. "Via con dios, amigo." Juan Carlos said as they parted. When James reached Monterrey he called Peter and told him that he would be there in three days and needed to be on a train to San Francisco that same day. He was to call Jacob Ashton and have their fastest ship ready to take him to Anchorage as soon as he arrived. He was to contact their representative in Anchorage and arrange for the supplies that he would need and the transportation so that he could get to Denali. He would explain everything when he got to San Diego. He told Peter that this would be the most important trip of his life and asked the other man to pray for him. James knew that deep down all answers must come from where it all began. He had to find those answers and also peace within himself. He must go to the mountain to be close to his roots. And also closer to God.

CHAPTER 24 It did not fit into his mind. It was too big. The mountain stretched over the land and to the sky. He came to the place where he could see the rock. That was the place where the eagle was to be seen. It was late in the afternoon but the sun was still high in the sky. He had been told that it was the time when all was warm and light was always there. The days had been clear and bright and he had first seen the mountain two days before he ever got to its base on the east side. He remembered the stories of his father and his grandfather, Rangak. Nothing could prepare him for the face to face meeting with this part of the family's history. As the day went on James Karl found a place to camp. It looked

as if others had camped there sometime before. He pitched his tent, tied down his horse and pack horse and gave them some oats to eat while they grazed on the small wisps of grass nearby. As he looked around he suddenly felt the presence of something that he could not see, or touch. As if someone had him by the arm he moved in a jerky way about one hundred yards to his right. He looked up at the rock jutting out and at the mountain rising to the sky. He was startled! There on the rock for a fleeting second he saw a woman, at least he thought it was a woman. The hold was loosened on him and he sank to the ground. Was he losing his mind he wondered? What had pulled him to this spot. The animals were moving in a manner that was different, as if they too saw something and were trying to shy away. The man lay there for a few moments and then looking up once more and seeing nothing he moved back to his tent. Hastily he checked the horses who had calmed down and were grazing once more. He was very tired. He did not know why but he was tired. He made a small fire, fixed some food, ate quickly and lay down in the tent to rest and think. It was still light when James Karl awoke. He was surprised that the light was still so bright. When he came out of the tent he looked at where the sun was last and he saw that it was on the other side of him. He looked at his watch and discovered that he had slept for fifteen hours. After he had tended his animals he started the climb to the rock. He had to find the path that led to the rock. He went first to the right and then the center and then to the left. He could not see anything that looked like a path and decided that he would get some of his rope and start to climb, in hopes of finding the old trail. Gathering up the rope and a small axe he started back to the base of Denali when he heard it! The shrill cry was unmistakable. He had heard eagles back in his home state and he knew their sounds. Excitedly he searched the sky but saw nothing but brilliant blue. Again the cry came forth and he looked in the direction of the rock face half way up the huge mountain. There on the rock was the giant bird. It was the largest eagle that he had ever seen. The bird seemed to look down at him and then slowly rose from the rock and sailed down to meet him. The giant eagle did not land but moved toward a break in the mountain almost around to the other side. The man followed and in an hour he found the trail up toward the rock. The bird gave it's shrill cry and kept circling upward. Slowly James Karl made his way between the rocks and up the narrow trail that seemed to disappear and then reappear. He had not heard the cry of the eagle for some time and was worried that he had taken a wrong turn; but there was no place to turn. He was tired and he sat down on a small ledge to rest and drink from his water bag. He looked around the tiny ledge and suddenly a shiny object buried in the dirt near the back of the ledge caught his attention. He reached over and pulled the object out of the dirt. Looking at it closely he saw that it was a small curved knife. It was just like the one that the family had been making and selling for over almost two hundred years. Could it have been one that belonged to one of his ancestors? Pulling it to him, wiped it clean on his pants and saw that it had drawings on the curved handle. On the left front it had a small moose. In the foreground were larger moose and to the right were two bears. On the back side there were two fish; one facing to the right

and one facing to the left. The handle was made of the horns of what he had taken to be a moose or deer. The blade was a crude hammered metal that seemed to be very old and very rough. The handle fit in the middle and the blade curved to the sides. He put it in the bag at his side. At that moment he heard the cry of the eagle and looking up he saw the bird sitting on a rock up and to his right. He gathered himself together and started the climb to the spot where the eagle had landed. On he went for what seemed like hours and suddenly he knew that he was close to the rock. He moved forward with renewed strength and in a short time reached the flat rock. The air was cool and clear. James Karl looked out over the land that his father and grandfather and their fathers had looked upon. It was a sight that he would never forget. Beautiful lakes, green plains and more mountains almost as big as this one. He sat down, drank some water and waited. What he was waiting for he had no idea but he knew that he had to wait. Was it to see the beautiful woman of the mountain or was it to wait for the eagle? Or was it to just sit and think. James Karl Tanana had always been in control of his life. He always knew what he was going to do and how he was going to do it. For the first time in his life he did not know what he was to do next. He sat and thought of the things that were to happen. The girl who was to be his daughter-in-law; the son who had taken over so well, the wife who he loved so much and was so wise. His life had been a good one. He had worked hard, followed the code of his father and his father's father. Now he was at a time in his life when the baton of leadership will fall to his son, Joseph. Perhaps this is why he was here. Here he might find the answers to all the questions of the future. His father and his grandfather had always said that this is the place where all of the questions they had were answered. As he lay back, thinking, he heard the sound of the air being moved and looking up he saw the giant eagle circling the rocky ledge. With a long glide the bird came to a landing on the rock about twenty feet from James. The eagle cocked his head to the side and slowly approached the man. When he was about ten feet away he unfurled his large wings and hopped to the man. James stood up and then remembered the story of how his great great grandfather had stroked the wings of the eagle in front of the town. How everyone said that if he could do that he must have special powers and insight. James moved slowly to the bird, who shivered slightly. Coming up to the bird he reached out and running his hands over the feathers he brushed them down and back. He thought they are so soft and light. The eagle stood there and looked into the man's eyes. The man wondered what the eagle saw and what was the message of the bird. The bird turned and hopped away a short distance, turned and looked at the man as if to say, "follow me." James Karl followed the bird to the far end of the rock and then scraped the dirt with it's talons. James Karl went to the spot and taking his small axe he started to clear the ground. Suddenly the ground gave way and he found himself looking down into a small hole that was filled with strange objects. He found what appeared to be hooks made out of bone, little bowls that had holes in them and some kind of wax-like material in their bottom. He also found another of the small knives, but this one had a name carved in the side. It was in Cyrillic and he could not read it. He also found a

note that was also written in words he could not understand. He gathered up the objects and put them in his bag. He knew that they were for him and that the giant bird had been waiting for him. Could the bird be like him, a descendant of the ones who came before. He moved back toward the place where he had come up to the rock. The eagle jumped in front of him and steered him to an opening in the wall of the rock that was part of the mountain. On the wall, inside, was a series of pictures that told a story. He could tell that they had been made at different times. He started to read the story. He soon saw that it was the story of his family. Each one who had come to the mountain had put on the wall their story of their part of the family. This was a family tree like no other. It seemed to show all of his ancestors and also the big questions that brought them to the mountain. In each case there was a picture of a woman on top of the rock. Was this the woman that he had a fleeting glimpse of as he first saw the rock? As he reached the end of the story on the rock he realized that now it was his turn to continue. He now knew why he had to come here at this time. He knew that he could come back and would, but this was a special time. He took out his knife and set about putting his part of the story into the rock. It seemed like hours before he finished his task. He sat back and looked at the story from beginning to end. It was good. His family still lived on the side of the mountain; their mountain. All the while the eagle had stayed at the far end of the rock. James finished his final carving into the rock and the eagle rose to the sky giving off his shrill cry and disappeared. The sky was still bright and the ledge was aglow from the sun. The man shouldered his bag and the rope, put his knife into it's sheath and started back down the side of the mountain. As he went down he looked back and there he saw the woman. She was beautiful, even from a distance. He could see the bright red and the golden hues of her hair. He looked away and then back and she had disappeared. He wondered why his mind was playing tricks with him. He said to himself that he would try sort all of this out when he reached the bottom and got to his campsite. Now was not the time. After fixing his dinner James Karl sat by the warm fire and reflected on the extraordinary day that had gone by. The air was cool though the sky was clear and bright. It was light without sun. He looked at his watch and found, to his surprise, that it was two o'clock in the morning. James Karl was not tired. His mind was spinning from the events of the day. He thought about what he had seen and what he had done. He had climbed the mountain to the rock of the eagle and the lady. Where were they both at this time. He thought about the future, his family and his son's new family. When he awoke he was hungry. He looked at his watch and again was surprised to see that it was eleven in the morning. He quickly gathered his goods, gave the horses some more oats and packed up to start back to Anchorage. He new that when he got there he would make arrangements to get a train at Vancouver and travel to Boise City. There was much to be done and much to talk about with Polly. He hoped that the wedding

party and he would catch up to each other in the capitol. With a final look he mounted his horse and leading the other pack animal he started back to Anchorage. As he looked once more behind him he saw the eagle soaring high in the sky and could hear it's faint cry as it soared closer and closer to the top of the mountain. He wondered what was at the top and vowed that he would find out. The trip to Anchorage was short and the boat was waiting to take him to Seattle where it had been decided that he would make better time. It was only a little more than one day from there to Boise City.

CHAPTER 25 It was decided that the wedding would take place in the State Capitol. Senator William Edgar Borah, the senior senator from Idaho would perform the ceremony. The governor, Moses Alexander, would host the wedding party in the capitol building. The entire legislature along with the town of Grangeville and friends from all over were invited. Susan Ashton and her son Jacob were coming. Peter and his family were also making the trip. The great name in the Northwest for the past three decades had been Theodore Roosevelt. When news came that the former president would be there, this was the icing on the cake for the Tanana family. Señor de la Vegas was impressed and asked if he also could invite some of the people the family had known in Mexico and Spain. James Karl laughed and told him to invite as many as he wished. Boise City had 373 hotel rooms and he had reserved all of them. The entire family was coming from Mexico. Among the honored guests was Mexico's new president Venustiano Carranza, who was said to be a friend of the de la Vegas, and of the United States. The religious part of the wedding ceremony was to be done by Mexico's highest ranking churchman, Cardinal Cardenas. The church was feeling anti-religious persecution from within and had suspended all religious ceremonies within the country. For the Cardinal to come here was a great honor for the de la Vegas family. James and Polly were constantly busy with all of the preparations and that left the task of entertaining the visitors from Mexico to Joe. Joe went to the village of his indian friends and asked if there were to be any ceremonies that he could bring his new bride-to-be and her parents to see. Big Buck, long a playmate and friend of Joe's said that they were to have the dance of the harvest in the next three nights and he would see if he could get permission for the party to come. The next day Big Buck came to see Joe and told him that not only were they welcome to come to the ceremony but they were invited to stay for the feast afterward. Big Buck said that they would prepare a surprise for the visitors; one that they would never forget. Joe grinned at his friend for he knew that there would be mischief afoot. One thing that James did was to get his two best ponies saddled

so that he and his new friend could ride the plains. They spent the day riding toward the mountains. By noon they had reached a river and stopped for lunch that had been prepared by Polly. James Karl brought out two fishing rods and spent a short time teaching his friend to cast the line. Then they dug into the soft dirt of the river bank and picked out some of the large red wriggling worms. Fastening them to the small hooks they cast them out into the quiet pools of the river. By the third cast they had each caught a good sized trout. Juan Carlos was beside himself. It was as if a small child had been given the toy of his dreams. After they had eaten lunch and prepared a large quantity of trout to take back for dinner, James turned to his friend and told him of his trip to the mountain. He told him of all that had happened and of the thought that he had of climbing to the top of the great peak. Juan Carlos said, "my friend that's something to dream about but at our age is it possible? Has anyone ever climbed to the top?" The other man answered. "I read in the paper that in 1913 three men climbed to the top and took pictures to prove their claim. Mr. Harper, one of the three, will be at the wedding. He is a friend of President Roosevelt and the President has invited him as one of his party. This will be the time that I will be able to find out if there is a way to the top." Juan Carlos said, "but I should like to go with you. As I told you when you first came to see me and told me of the mountain, I too would like to see this source of the story of your family. Perhaps you would be so kind as to take me on this adventure."James Karl thought a minute and then said, "We have become more than friends, we are family now and it's only right that you do this with me. We will make our plans after the wedding and a talk with Mr. Harper. Now it is time to head back. Polly worries when I am out riding after dark. I guess she thinks a bear will eat me" Both men laughed, mounted their horse and headed back to the ranch. Returning to the ranch James settled into a hot bath and settled down to read the paper. The news from Europe was bad. The war was spreading and the Germans had used a terrible new weapon, poison gas. They had gone on the defensive forcing the French and the English to attack them, which caused severe casualties in and around the historic Flemish town of Ypres. It was only a matter of time and the Americans would be pulled into the conflict, he felt. The only hope was that since the war was so far away there would be no chance of American lives being lost. Soon they would have to find a way to have peace. No one could keep on with this kind of bloody fighting for much longer. He thought of how lucky he was that his son was here and that he had so much responsibility with the company. Soon he would turn all of his part of the company over to the boy and do what his father had done. He and Polly would take the trips that they had always talked about and see the places that they had heard and read about while they were building this part of their nation. The wedding was one that had never been rivaled in the state of Idaho. Some said it was the most lavish wedding, equaling the state weddings of Europe. Dashing army officers from Mexico and Spain in brilliant gold braided uniforms mingled with American officers in their dress uniforms. The Sioux indian nation was represented by seven chiefs in flowing ceremonial headdress and bright leather clothes. Diplomats from Mexico, Spain, Canada, Alaska and the United States were there. Susan Ashton never looked finer. Her son Jacob was there with his new

bride. The presents filled an entire room of the capitol building. President Roosevelt and Senator Borah gave long, and for the most part boring, toasts to the bride and groom. The governor used the occasion to show off the state by planning a tour of Idaho by special rail cars furnished by his friend Pullman. Jacob Ashton gave the newly weds a trip to the island of Hawaii, leaving from Seattle and returning to San Francisco. The fall of 1916 had never been brighter for everyone who attended the wedding. After a two month honeymoon the couple returned to Brownsville. Joe had some ideas he wanted to look into for the business and while he was gone Maria was to stay with her parents. After talking with the ship's captain Joe now more sure than ever that the southern part of the United States was to be the next booming area. He decided to take a trip through the south to see for himself what could be done in the way of building the companies fortunes. Joe spent several days around Mississippi and Louisiana trying to see what there was that would work for the company. It did not take him long to discover the uses of the Mississippi River and of the vast amounts of cotton grown in the region. He made inquiries as to the cost of some of the cotton farms and even went so far as to buy three that were next to each other in Mississippi. The families that owned them were glad to get the money and left as soon as they could get packed, leaving Joe to find someone to manage the three farms. Franklin Strickland had been a farmer and a school teacher. When things went bad in the area he lost his job teaching and had to sell his farm. He heard that the new man from Texas bought three farms nearby and was looking for someone to take over the management of all three. Franklin's wife, Dolly took care of the little cabin that they had moved into when they lost the farm. In her spare time she put up jelly and peanut butter to sell at the local fairs to bring in some money while her husband farmed for wages. When Franklin heard where the man from Texas was staying he went to him and applied for the job. Joe was impressed with the man's straight forward honesty and offered it to him. He would move onto the large farm, take over the big house and rent out the houses on the other two farms to the people who came to work for the Caine Farms. He wanted to keep as many of the negroes who had been working there on the farms. He knew they would have a hard time finding other work. It was the way of the Tanana family. He continued to follow the system that had worked so well for the family in the past and gave Franklin a salary and ten percent of the profits. He also raised the pay to the workers to seventy-five cents a day. After a week putting in supplies, he went on to Florida. He was amazed to find the tropical weather and the vast amount of crops and fruit that was growing in the area. Here was a place that had much to offer the Caine company. Travelling north he came to Savannah, Georgia, a place different from the other ports of the south. Its brick and cobblestone streets were clean and bright. The houses were large and bright. Lush growth seemed everywhere and the harbor was magnificent. He knew that this would be the place to headquarter the southern part of the Caine Companies. He telegraphed his father and asked if Jacob Ashton could

come here to look over the port and see if it would be of interest for the company. Atlanta, Georgia, a place of trees and parks, large homes and stately mansions. A hub of business and pleasure. This is what the young man found when he arrived. His mind was full with all that he had seen in the past two months of his travels. Now it was time to return to his wife and Texas. The war was on his mind and he wondered how long it would be before it ended or the U.S. was brought into the action. Upon returning home he went to Casa de la Vegas to pick up his wife and to see the rest of the family. He had thoughts about having one of his brothers-in-law run the operations in Texas while he got everything going in the south. Driving the long tree lined road to the house his heart started to pound. A fear unlike anything he had ever felt grabbed him. The beautiful house now lay in partial ruin. As he hurried to the front door he heard the sound of a gun being cocked. He called to his wife and the door was flung open by Riccardo, one of Maria's brothers. "What's happened? Where's Maria? Who did this? Is everyone OK?" Riccardo calmed him down and told him that they had been attacked by a large band of "banditos". Everyone was alright. Maria was upstairs resting. Without waiting to hear more he rushed up the stairs and into her room. She woke with a start as the door was flung open. Her look of fear turned to one of relief and joy. "Oh Joseph I'm so glad you're back. It has been terrible. They have killed many people who were working for my father. He has taken my mother and the younger children to be with your family. I stayed here so that when you came back I would be the first to tell you..." What do you have to tell me that is worth risking your life." "You are going to be a father." Joe was stunned. "How is this possible? When did it happen?" The girl laughed and told him that it must have happened on their way back from the islands, and that he would have to figure out how it happened. For now they must pack and prepare to leave this place for their home in Texas. He asked Riccardo to come along, that he had plans that would include him and since there was nothing for him here he could be of great use to the Caine company. It did not take long for the party to gather up all that they could carry in the trucks and the car. Maria drove the car while Joe and Ricci, as he was called by the family, each drove a truck with supplies and goods. Two days later they were on their way back to Brownsville and the start of life again. After they got back Joe settled Maria in the house and called his father to let everyone know that he was back and that Maria and her brother were safe in Texas with him. He also talked to his father at great length about the South and of putting Riccardo in charge of that operation. His father approved. After the call Joe and Ricci talked for many hours. Joe told him of what he had seen and what he wanted to do. He also told him that he would like him to become part of the family business. He would be paid a salary and get a percentage of all of the profits of his part of the operation. He could become a very rich man. Riccardo knew that this was a generous offer but he thought of his father and what decision he would have him make. He decided to ask for enough time to go to talk to his father before giving Joe the

answer. It was agreed that he would return in six weeks with an answer. The new year of 1917 would have come and the new baby would be near as well. Joe was feeling good about the coming year. He knew that the company would grow and prosper. He also knew that he was making the right moves to make the Caine company a world power. Even now they were getting ready to load their first shipment of cotton from Savannah to Great Britain.

CHAPTER 26 The two men had reached Seattle in the middle of March 1917. James and Juan Carlos almost looked like they could be brothers. They were dark in coloring with greying hair and about the same height. From there they boarded one of the Caine ships for the trip to Anchorage. Before leaving, however, they were to meet with the famous Walter Harper, the conqueror of Denali or Mount McKinley as it was known to the people of the "lower states." They spent the better part of a week going over his maps and diagrams. He told them about the clothes that they would need and he said that there was only one store in Anchorage that would have everything they needed. James asked the name of the store and the other man replied, "It is a different type. Not a department store but rather a trading post. Over the front there is a large picture of the mountain and of an eagle sitting on a rock ledge. The store is called, `Kani Kompany'. Have either of you ever heard of it?" James with a straight face told the man that is where he had always shopped in Anchorage and he new the owners quite well. After Harper left, James broke into a laugh that came from deep in his stomach. Juan Carlos asked him why he was laughing and the other man said that he would tell him at dinner that night. Later while they were eating James told him the rest of the story of the family and how that store got it's name. During this time Juan Carlos began to see that this family had monies which rivaled his own and that his daughter and the new child would be well taken care of in the future. Final plans were made and they boarded their ship for the trip to Anchorage. It was only a weeks trip and they soon reached the booming town. One of the many wooden buildings said, "hotel and bath--$2.50 per day--cash only!" They went into the building and secured a room for two nights. After a short rest and a hot bath, they went to dinner. The days were light from about 8:30 AM until 6 PM. Finishing dinner they walked over to a nearby saloon and spent some time talking about the adventure they were about to start the day after tomorrow. A short time later they were back in their room. Sleep came easy that night and both men spent the night with their own dreams. Putting away a large breakfast the two started out to the find the Kani Kompany Trading Post. They were told that it was at the intersection of 4th street and G street. This was only a few blocks from the center of the town. After arriving at the store James asked for the manager and told him all of the things that they would need. He also asked where they

could get a team of dogs and a sled to carry one man and their equipment. After purchasing all of the things from the store that they would need, James identified himself to the manager. Juan Carlos got another surprise. The manager asked for no money. James later explained to his friend that this was where and how it all began. One trading post started by his great-great grandfather, Karlek and his best friend Nicholi. Everything had come from this, and from the mountain. The next day brought snow and the two men went over and picked up their dogs and sled. Juan Carlos had seen snow in Spain but it was so long ago that he had forgotten how cold it could get. James placed the equipment near the front of the sled then piled in food for the dogs. After that he made an area of furs and had Juan Carlos get in and then covered him up with more furs. For James this was truly a return to the past. He remembered making the trips with his father using the sleds. The trip was much like the one that his great-grandfather would take when he went to visit the village of his grandfather. The two men traveled north for two days until they reached a small building called Sheep Creek Lodge. Before they bedded down for the night James fed the dogs and loosened their harness' while still leaving them in their traces. After eating a hearty meal they went to their room knowing that tomorrow should bring them to the turning point that would carry them to the western side of the great mountain. James was hoping that the next day would be clear so that his friend could see the immense size of the mountain. Waking early the men ate a large breakfast and went about preparing the dogs for the days run. It was still dark when they left but the trail was clearly one that had been use a great deal and was easy to follow. Daylight came quickly and with it the sight of the giant snow clad peak standing by itself, a giant among giants. By late afternoon they had almost reached the glacier area below the mountain. Here as before the air was still and crisp and the men continued on for another hour. At last they had come to the place where James had stayed on his last trip. He took a quick glance at the rock hoping to see the eagle, or the woman. The light was poor and nothing was to be seen. They pitched their tent, fed the dogs, gathered snow and forced it against the bottom of the tent to keep out the cold air. A small campfire warmed the two men as they ate their meal in darkness. They talked of tomorrow and the next several days and then turned into the tent for some sleep. It was hard for James to sleep that night. Many thoughts kept running through his head. Foremost among the thoughts was the climb to the top. Where would they begin and how long would it take. The men had Harper's maps but it only showed the trail from above the tree line. How were they to get to that point? Soon sleep overcame him and he drifted off into the world of dreams. The next day they fed the dogs an extra portion and spaced them so that they could not attack each other. James led the way to the rock and remembering the location of the path started the climb to the rocky outcropping. Because of the heavy packs the men carried, climbing was slow and loose snow made the going treacherous. By mid morning they had covered less than half the distance to the ledge. There was no sign of the eagle or anything else for that matter. Juan Carlos had been quiet the entire day and when they finally

reached the rocky ledge just as dark settled in, James looked at him and asked, "My friend, is something bothering you? Is the climb too difficult?" The other answered, "No it is none of those things. I am overwhelmed by the size of all of this. Never in my life have I imagined such a mountain. I have seen the mountains of my native Espana but there is nothing like this. I shall treasure this time with you and the mountain for the rest of my life." James smiled and quietly looked at his friend who had the same feelings about this mountain as his own. The next morning as they were about to get out of the tent they heard the shrill cry of the eagle. James got out of the tent first so as not to startle the bird, but it was nowhere to be seen. For the next several minutes the two men busied themselves with breakfast. After the meal they checked their packs and looking at the crude map that Harper had given them they started for the next place they would stop for the night. As they moved upward they again heard the cry of the bird. This time they stopped and James looked up into the tree-line where he saw a large nest. Taking out his spy glass he looked carefully at the nest but could see nothing. The two men continued upward again, but this time James directed them toward the area where they had seen the nest. It was shortly after noon when they reached the tree-line the air was much crisper and the breathing was more difficult. Both men needed a short rest and decided to make this their lunch stop. While they were warming their food the sound of large wings came to them and there was the eagle gliding into the area where they were sitting. James cautioned his friend not to move until he had approached the bird and patted it's feathers. The eagle landed a short distance away and looking up to the nest made an unusual sound, almost as if it were singing. James went directly to the bird, moving slowly so as not to frighten the huge eagle. As he came up to the eagle the bird gave him that same look as it had once before, as if it were laughing at James. The man smiled at the bird and ruffled the feathers at the great one's neck. Quietly he called his friend over. "Let's see if my friend here will let you smooth his feathers. Remember to move your hand slowly and to the back so that the feathers will be smoothed down." The other man nodded and as James talked to the eagle Juan Carlos moved slowly to where they both were standing. The eagle started to ruffle his feathers and the smiling look gave way to one that James had never seen before. Juan Carlos suddenly started to talk in a very soft voice to the bird. As he did so he continued to move closer to the huge bird and then reached out and stroked the black feathers in a slow deliberate way as if he had always done this. The eagle relaxed and the funny smiling look returned to his face. James was amazed and happy. He knew now above all other things that if the eagle could trust this man then he also would be able to trust Juan Carlos. This was the sign that he had needed to put the next part of the family fortunes to work. Now, however, they must finish what they had come to do. It was as if each was now bonded to the other until they reached the top. The eagle stayed near them for the rest of the day and they found that he was leading them up a narrow pathway between two crevices in one large rocky side of the mountain. The air suddenly turned much colder and they saw clouds where there had only been blue sky. It did not take any time for them to

figure out that there was a storm heading their way. They quickly set up their tent on a ledge, banked the bottom to keep out the cold wind and made a small fire on a piece of tin that they sat in the middle of the tent. As the dark closed in they once more heard the cry of the eagle as it went down the mountain to....... That night the wind was strong but the two men were able to sleep warmly thanks to the little fire and the 105105‚105105ƒ105105„105105… 105105†105105‡105105ˆ105105‰105105Š105105‹105105Œ105105105105Ž105105 105105105105‘105105’105105“105105”105105•105105–105105— 105105˜105105™105105š105105›105105œ105105 105105ž105105Ÿ105105105105¡105105¢10510 5£10 5105 ¤10 5105 ¥10 5105 ¦105105§105105¨105105©105105ª105105«10 5105¬105105105105®105105¯105105°105105±105105²105105³105105 ´10 5105 µ105105¶105105·105105¸105105¹105105º105105»10 5105 ¼105105½105105¾105105¿105105À105105Á105105Â105105Ã105105Ä105105Å105105Æ 105105Ç105105È105105É105105Ê105105Ë105105Ì105105Í105105Î105105Ï105105Ð1 05105Ñ105105Ò105105Ó105105Ô105105Õ105105Ö105105×105105Ø105105Ù105105Ú105 105Û105105Ü105105Ý105105Þ105105ß105105à105105á105105â105105ã105105ä1051 05å105105æ105105ç105105è105105é105105105105ë105105ì105105í105105î105105 ï105105ð105105ñ105105ò105105ó105105ô105105ö105105ýÿÿÿ÷105105ø105105ù105 105ú105105û105105ü105105ý105105þ105105ÿ105105105105105sleeping bags that they had purchased. By eight-thirty the next morning the wind had stopped and the little fire was made again. This time they prepared their morning meal and even ate a little extra. Their bodies needed some extra inner warmth. It was full light by the time that they had finished and they packed up their gear and set out to once more climb to their next point on the map. It was here that they were supposed to find a small tent that was left for others to use if they were caught out in the raw weather. Before they had gone more than thirty minutes they heard the eagle again. This time the cry was one of anger. Looking around they could see nothing. The snowfall that night had covered all of their tracks and left them disoriented when they looked down. Juan Carlos said. "My friend the bird does not sound happy. Perhaps there is an animal about that could be a threat to the bird and it's family or maybe one of the children is misbehaving." The last part was said with a laugh and James laughed also. Climbing was much slower than before. The packs were still heavy and the snow was soft and fresh which made walking much more difficult. After about two hours they came to a sheer wall in front of them. They both saw that there was no way that they climb that face. Just then down with a swoop came the eagle. Flying across the face the eagle landed on a ledge about thirty feet up and over to their right about a hundred yards. Puzzled the two men moved toward the ledge above them

where the eagle sat. Then they saw it! There was a slight separation in the wall of rock. The men could attach their climbing screws and using their rope would be able to get to the top of the rock, wherever that would be, for they had no idea how much farther they needed to go. For the next three days the weather was clear and the men were able to find foot holds in the mountain. The eagle seemed to come and go but was always there when they needed to find another way up. They had passed the timberline three days before and suddenly they had an angle that was not nearly as steep as before. The packs had become somewhat lighter because of the food that they had eaten and this made the going easier. The next day the men looked upward but could no longer see the peak. Were they lost? They continued the climb. It was a wild night on the side of the mountain. It was as if the mountain knew it was about to be conquered and was fighting back. The wind blew with fresh intensity. The snow was frozen and stung any part of the body it touched. The darkness was complete for there was no moon that night. They knew that they would reach the top the next day if they could get out of their tent and continue. They were going to leave their packs, their food and the rest of their supplies in the tent and make the final climb with just the camera that they had brought to commemorate the great event. This was what they had waited for and now it was about to happen. The men knelt in the snow that night and prayed. The morning was quiet and the wind, though still blowing, was much calmer than the night before. As James and Juan Carlos lifted the camera, film and the little flags of Idaho and Mexico the eagle rose almost to where they were and soaring on the currents of the wind, gave a piercing cry shot up to a place out of sight and there gave it's familiar cry. James knew that they had won. The top of the peak was now within reach. With new found strength the two men climbed to the top of the peak. As they grinned at each other and planted their flags James looked over his shoulder and saw that the mountain had two peaks. They took pictures of the peaks, the flags and themselves. It was a day they never would forget, April 6, 1917. CHAPTER 27 It was June 3, 1918. Joe was in command of the third platoon, ninth regiment, second Division, The indian head division. He had been with the outfit since he was given a commission in May of 1917. He had trained with, and fought with the men of his platoon for the past six months. The officers over him were skeptical about this young man who had been offered, and had taken a commission. He had no military background. Grudgingly they admitted that he was as good as they were, and in some areas even better. His men, would follow him to hell, even if it was a one way trip. His expertise with a rifle was such that they always used him in contests with other units. He rarely lost. He had not heard much from home since the unit went overseas. His small son, Randall Louis, was named for his grandfather and Maria's grandfather Luis. The little one had started to walk and make sounds that he could understand when he left.

Maria was not happy but she understood. This country had been good to his family and to him and he wanted to show his gratitude. By the third of June 1918 the German spring offensive had rolled all the way to the almost undefended area of Chateau Theirry. The French mustered what soldiers and reservists they could. This small contingent was augmented by U.S. Second Infantry Division along with the Third Marine Division. In the six day battle that was to follow the Allied forces numbered 85,000. The importance of the battle was in effect stopping the Germans from crossing the River Marne. The Germans were secure in the knowledge that the Allied forces were no match for their Imperial Army. Both the presence and the competence of this force became a shock to the forces of the Kaiser. It was into this battle that Joe was thrown. The headquarters of his division was at the French town of La Voie Du Chatel, slightly more than two miles from the woods near Belleau. The front lines had changed over the past three days. Joe and his platoon were the lead elements in the new battle area, June sixth. The advance had been easy enough. The trenches had been cleared of the enemy. As they slowly moved into the woods it became apparent that this was to be no ordinary battle for his men. The Germans had set up picket lines of barbed wire that forced the slowing of the advance. As men got caught up on the wire, German snipers picked them off leaving them for the hungry dogs of the area. The men as they advanced were caught up in the stench of the battle. On the morning of the Seventh Joe had found out why the trenches were empty. Deep into the woods the enemy had built fortifications that offered them protection and left the Americans in the relative open spaces between the trees. Murderous machine gun fire crisscrossed the area. Men were crying out all over the front. Joe moved to a forward position, along with one of his runners, to see if there was a way through the terrible hail of bullets and mortars. He sent the runner back asking that a machine gun platoon be sent up to the area. He had it in his mind that if he could divert the enemy's fire to a certain area then he could slip his men around the flank and surprise the enemy from the rear. It was a bold and dangerous plan. If it failed most or all of them would be dead, wounded or captured. If it worked the enemy line would be breached and the Allies would be able to counter attack. It was dark when the gunners arrived. Joe met with their platoon leader and briefed him on his plan. The two of them went out into nomans land to see if there was any place to set up a fire base area. The Germans had probes out at the same time trying to see the size of the Allied forces in front of them. They knew that their soldiers were better equipped than the French and were used to winning. They had been beating the French for sometime and there was no real fear. It was into this scene that the two small groups found themselves that night. The only light was that from the moon. A faint sound came to Joe and he stopped the two of them and lay motionless for some time. The sound was faint but grew a little louder

as each minute passed. In what seemed like hours they saw the outline of an enemy soldier. Soon another and then another appeared. Joe motioned to the other man to stay still, and with that he moved silently to the other side so that the enemy was between them. To Joe it was much like the quiet tracking of the deer. After thirty minutes Joe was on the other side of the scouting party. As they moved forward they now became the ones who were covered from the rear by the two Americans who had by now joined up again. The two men agreed that they would wait for the enemy to come back towards them. They moved along the same route as the German's were taking so that when it came time to capture them, or kill them they would be closer to their own lines. As the moon started to get lower in the sky the sound of the enemy soldiers returning came to them. Moving several yards apart they waited until they could see the shadows of the soldiers. In a quiet voice that did not give off their direction, Joe called, "du soldatan, achtung." The enemy froze in their tracks for a moment and then started to shoot wildly. The two men had agreed that they would shoot at the men in the front of the column so as to keep the enemy from coming toward them in a wild rush. This way there was less chance of being hit by the random fire of the Huns. Two cries of pain were heard and then silence. The two men moved quietly forward until they came to the two men that had been hit. One was already dead, but the other had only a flesh wound. He sat against a tree in shock. Joe turned to the other man and said, "It's too bad they don't speak english. It would save a lot of time and lives." The man against the tree looked at the two officers and said in halting pain filled words. "I speak a little english." The two were speechless. What good fortune they thought. Joe looked at the wounded man and started to bandage his wounds. "Call to your `komarades' and tell them that you are alright and that they will be treated fairly if they surrender now. Otherwise we will stay here and shoot them as they move." The German raised his head to reveal the face of a young boy of fourteen or fifteen. He looked at the two men and then with a shrug called out in German. They could hear scurrying about and the two officers fired some more shots. Another man cried out in pain. The movements stopped and shortly a voice called out in German. Joe looked at the boy near them and he said they would surrender if they would not be shot. The two American officers laughed and told the man to tell them to lay down their weapons, turn to the American lines and sit down until it was light. They would be told what to do next at that time. He was to warn them that if anyone tried anything they would all be shot. The man did what he was told and they could hear the others putting down their weapons. Joe told the other officer to go back to the American lines and tell that he would be coming in with the wounded men and an unknown amount of captured men. The wounded German had told them that there twenty-two of them when they went out to the lines but he did not know if any had slipped through back to their lines. The machine gun officer slipped off to the left and started to make his way back to the American lines. A short time later a machine gun burst was heard and then nothing. Joe had the horrible thought that the man had been killed by his own men. Dawn came and with it fog. Joe had given the wounded man a chocolate bar which he ate ravenously. Joe sensed that the man had not eaten for some time and the thought came to him that maybe these men

had been cut off from supplies. Could the Germans be stretched too thin? The german started to stretch, his bandaged arm was starting to hurt now and he moved to keep the pain down. Joe guessed that it was infected. One touch of the man's arm told him that he was right. The arm was hot, too hot not to be infected. He turned to german and said, "I think we had better get that arm to the hospital. Tell the men to stand up and make two lines. Have someone with a white towel or handkerchief tie it onto a stick and move to the front of the column. Tell them to let you know when that is done." The man did as he was told and a few minutes later Joe heard the men getting to their feet. It was light enough now so that he could count his captives. One was dead, two were wounded and there were sixteen men standing in line. That meant that there three men who were not accounted for according to the information they had been given. Joe told the boy to tell the men to move slowly forward and to talk so that the American's would be able to hear them. As they started forward Joe called to the American lines, "Hey, it's Lt. Caine. I've got a bunch of prisoners. Don't shoot." A shout came back, "What's your outfit and who is your company commander?" It was 10 AM and the prisoners had been turned over to the intelligence people. Joe was tired and hungry, but before he could eat or sleep he had to go to the machine gun platoon and see if the other officer had returned. After a short time he arrived at the company and found that Lt. Pyle was out on another mission. Three germans had been killed trying to turn the flank where the Lt. had returned. This accounted for the missing men. Satisfied, Lt. Joe Caine returned to his platoon just in time to report to the company commander, Captain Biggs. Biggs gave Joe new orders which were to move his platoon immediately toward the southern part of the woods nearer the town of Bouresches. The move was to be completed before dark and each man was to be in place and the watches set. They were to prepare for the final assault by the Allies in this sector, hoping to drive the Huns back before they could reach the Marne River. Weary and hungry, Joe returned to the men with the orders and the final instructions which were to hold the line at all costs. The men knew what Joe had been through and when the move was completed the platoon command post was the first order of business. After it was secured sergeant Greenberg told Joe that the men would be able to handle things now and he needed to get some sleep. The sergeant assured him that he would wake him when the perimeter was secured. The young officer needed no further encouragement. Forty-five hours of stress and no sleep had caught up with him and he realized that he was even too tired to eat. It was two o'clock in the morning when the sergeant shook Joe out of his sleep. "We've got company sir. Sounds like a scouting party from the other side. What do you want the boys to do?" Joe thought a moment and then said, "Tell the men to fix bayonets but to stay quiet and let the enemy through. Maybe we can make them think that we haven't come up yet. If a fight starts tell them to use their bayonets. The Huns won't be able to get a fix on how many are here that way." The sergeant grunted and moved back into the night shadows. Dawn came and with it no sign of the enemy. Perhaps, they thought,this won't be so bad after all.

Just as they started to settle in to a day watch there was a series of loud "whumps" along the line of the trenches. The earth erupted into a cascading mass of dirt, rock, trees, stones and metal over the small group of men huddled in the trenches. The motor fire continued for almost fifteen minutes then all was silent. Silent except for the groans and cry's of the wounded and dying. The full realization of the terrible scene came when Joe left the command post and moved down the trench from one side to another. The Germans had been deadly accurate, as if they had known where his men were. It was then he realized the enemy had planned this attack. They had set the mortars the day before when they had pulled back so that they could catch Allied groups in a deadly barrage. It took the better part of an hour for Joe to assess the damage and the casualties. There were nine men killed and seventeen more that were wounded, several in serious condition. There were only twenty-two men left in fighting condition and many of them were still in a state of shock. Joe knew that his small group had to hold, but also the company commander and the regiment had to know what was happening. He looked for the one man he knew would make it if he sent him back with the information,and the order that had to be given. Red Cloud was a full blooded Sioux indian from the little settlement of Benewah, about one hundred miles north of where Joe was born. Joe had been through the town when he had taken trips to his grandfather's place in the Yukon. Red Cloud was tall and graceful in his movements, much like a deer or a mountain cat. He was a happy person and the men always seemed to hang around with him. He had been a sergeant until the day when a soldier from another outfit made the remark about the "drunken redskin who'd scalp his mother for a hair bag." Red Cloud became a private the next day and the man went home on a hospital ship, thankful that he would be able to walk someday, even though he would limp from that day forth. Joe had made arrangements with the military police officers to turn him over to him for punishment. Joe and Red Cloud never stood on ceremony and when they were alone there was no rank. From the time Joe got him out of the stockade, Red Cloud was always watching over him to see that nothing happened to his "paleface" friend. Red Cloud reported to his Lieutenant and they talked briefly in the sioux dialect. Joe explained the importance of the mission and of the order that had to be given. "Here are our co-ordinates. Have the artillery lay a barrage in about thirty yards in front of us for about five minutes, then have them wait about ten minutes and start again in the same place. We may be able to get them as they try to move forward." The indian knew what this meant to both the other man and to his friend. He now knew why he was told this in the Sioux language. The tall indian grunted, put his hand on Joe's shoulder and then went back to his tent. Red Cloud knew that the only chance he had was to travel in the old ways. He removed his leggings, his shoes and socks and got out an old pair of moccasins. He laid his jacket, helmet, cartridge belt and rifle on his pack. Slipping his bayonet into his belt and taking a last look at the area he loped off into the woods. He was lost from sight in a matter of seconds. Joe had no time to sit and wait. His first thought was to the men still alive. With ideas he had learned from the indians back home he

quickly formed two plans. First he had the men drag the loose trees and boards that were scattered about and make a long covering. On top of this he had them pile dirt and stick tree limbs so that they gave off the appearance of standing small trees. He had them also do the same behind them so that it looked like one continuous area. This would cover the break where the trench was and also give protection from the next round of shells which were sure to come, and probably too soon. His second plan was far more dangerous. For this he called for volunteers. Three men came forth. Arming them with machine guns he sent them to the left to try and make the enemy think that there was now a large force to their right. If the enemy took the bait they would transfer most of their men to that area and the main body of Joe's outfit would be able to attack and place the enemy in a cross fire. If they were lucky and the huns did not figure their strength they might kill or capture the lot of them. It took the men about two hours to build the breast works. Just before they were finished he called the three men who were to move around the side of the germans. "Our best chance for all of us to get out of this mess alive is in your hands. Pick your spots with care and make sure that you are protected when you open fire. They will try and turn the mortars on you as well as their own machine guns. There are three times as many of them as there are of us and most of the enemy will concentrate on you. I'll signal you with a whistle when to fire and use two blasts when to stop. Good luck guys and we'll met up with you in about two or three hours." The men quietly gathered up all of the ammunition they could carry and cradling their machine guns, headed into the brush to the left of the trenches. Joe returned to the rest of his men. Scattered firing broke out to their left and this was a surprise for there was not any of the American's in that sector. Perhaps, he thought, they may be shooting at themselves. He laughed to himself. The Allies knew that this must be the final advance of the German Army. If they crossed the Marne River, Paris was only a three day march at the most and less than one day by truck or train. Joe was aware of the situation that faced he and his men. Somehow this must be the final battle and they must succeed. Joe felt the entire war on his shoulders and he was tired, very tired. Suddenly he was wide awake. He did not know how long he had been sleeping but sergeant Greenberg was standing over him, with his hand over Joe's mouth. "We got company coming in from the right. The men are all hidden but you had better be ready. They must think that we're gone. I think we can surprise them Lieutenant, if we let them come through our lines." He knew the sergeant made sense but where would they hide? The it hit him. "Greenberg, can you get the men to move back in the trenches? If we can draw them in to the far side maybe some of our men can slide along the top side of the trench back behind them and then we can either kill or capture them. What do you think?" The older man looked at the officer, thought a moment and said, "It'll work if we can get far enough in and then let them know we are ahead of them while some of our guys get in behind them. They'll come after us and probably not pay attention to other sounds. We had something like this in Cuba." The two men talked some more and then started to move the men. Joe took five men and one machine gun crew with him. They would double back and catch the germans from the rear. He and the sergeant

set their watches and agreed that the sergeant would start firing from the front in twenty-five minutes. One minute later Joe would yell for the enemy to lay down their weapons. If they did not Joe's men would lay down a small arms fire at the same time Greenberg's men would do the same. If that didn't work Joe would open up with the machine gun, shooting straight down the trench. He told the sergeant that when they heard the machine gun open up they were to take cover and hold their fire. The germans should move right into them and would have to surrender, or die. It didn't take long for the men to do as they were told. Joe and his men started back over and about ten yards to the rear of the trenches. Just as they had gotten half-way back to their starting point a german soldier suddenly stood up in the trench and looked around. He spotted the machine gun crew and shouted to the rest of the troops. Joe's riflemen started shooting at the germans to keep their heads down while the machine gun was moved quickly forward to cover the rear. At the same time Joe blew a blast on his whistle and off to the left came the sound of machine guns firing toward the german's right flank. The men in the trenches were confused. They heard the firing and thought that the Americans had overrun their positions and they were caught in a no mans land. It was death or surrender. Greenberg put the icing on the cake as his men started firing back into the germans. In halting english a shout came back, "Stop shooting! We surrender." Quickly Joe grabbed the machine gun crew and told them to go on ahead, set up on the right end of the trench and wait for the two blasts of his whistle. When they heard that they were to start firing out toward the enemy front in the woods. With that he quickly gathered up the rest of the men and returned to Greenberg's position. He was in for the surprise of his life, for there were two columns of German soldiers with their pants down to their ankles. "We found this worked in Cuba. They can't run very fast without falling down." He laughed good naturedly. A career soldier he had been in the Army since 1895. He was looking forward to a pension and moving back to Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. He figured he would be set when he mustered out in 1925. He would only be forty-six years old and in good shape. There were fifty-four of the enemy that had to be turned over to the regimental command post and Joe did not want to lose any more of his men. He knew that they would have to go into the woods to get the rest of the Germans. He was trying to think of how he was going to do this when Red Cloud suddenly appeared with two squads of fresh replacements. When the indian saw the German's he laughed. "I guess you scalped them in a new way. Wait 'till they hear this back home." "You say one word and I'll tell them some of the things you've done since we've been together. One hand washes the other, blood brother. Any of these new men capable of finding their way back to the regiment?" The other answered. "Two of them are returning from the hospital. They've seen it all and could handle the huns. You can send the walking wounded back with them. I've also brought three medics back with me. Now if you will excuse me I will go back and associate with the poor enlisted man." He laughed and went to join his squad. The big indian was right and the prisoners were sent back with the two men who had seen action and could handle the situation. Along with them went three of the wounded who could walk. One could carry a

rifle and could help if there was a problem. The two new men were also told to bring back any more men if they could. There was a large company of the enemy in front of them and it had sounded like they were being reinforced. The two men moved the prisoners out and with reassurance that they would be back as soon as possible. In a moment they were swallowed up by the woods. It became obvious that the machine gunners were doing their job. Through the trees to the front Joe and the others could see the germans moving toward the machine gun emplacements. Gathering up his small force he explained that they were going to attack the enemy from the right side and see if they could slow them down until help could arrive. They all knew that their job was to keep the enemy from advancing. No one said how they were to do it, but they would fight 'till the last breath. This was for honor and to show the rest of the world what the United States Army could do when it had to fight. The men moved forward spread out about three yards apart. They had fixed their bayonets and were ready to use them. The new men did not know what they would do in the coming fight but the veterans assured them that all they had to do was what the lieutenant said. He always got them through. He was on their side when it came to fighting and winning. The platoon moved forward slowly and used as much cover as they could find. The sun was hot now and the flies were starting to swarm around the sweaty men. After about an hour the first group reached the edge of woods that marked the german lines. The rest soon joined up and they paused to wolf down some crackers and water. It was at this time that sergeant Greenberg heard a noise coming from a large clump of trees to their left. Taking two men they crawled to the edge and looked into the clearing beyond the clump. There seated at a portable table were several officers; one who seemed to be high ranking. Telling the others to stay put he slithered back to find Joe. "Lieutenant, it looks like we got a bunch of officers in the woods. They are eating and looking over maps and, I guess, dispatches. One of them looks to be a general or some'pn. I got two men covering them and if we move in maybe we can get them and the maps." Joe answered, "Greenberg, I could never make it without you. If this turns out like you think you'll get a medal and I hope a commission. Let's see what you've got." With that the two men, along with Red Cloud, who had just peen promoted to corporal, crawled through the woods to the little clearing. As soon as they got there Joe recognized the insignia of the man they thought was a general as that of a Field Marshall. If they could capture this man and what looks like his staff the rest might be confused enough to retreat. Quickly he sent Red Cloud back to send up more men from the right flank and get one of the machine gun crews from the left side and bring them back to him. Joe outlined his plan to his sergeant. They would use the whistle system and open up with machine gun fire from both sides and from the middle. The enemy would think that there was a much larger force out in front and to the sides. Just before the attack they would go in and grab the officers and any maps and documents they had on the table or in pouches. They would take four men from the already shrunken platoon and march the prisoners back to the regiment. The platoon would then spread out with one man spaced every five yards between the machine guns. With a second blast of his whistle the

riflemen would open. He hoped that the enemy would be so confused that they would retreat into the woods and that would give the division time to bring up re-enforcements. It was time and Joe, Greenberg and three of the men moved to the edge of the compound. Quickly they advanced through the trees and into the area of the german officers. "Hands up! Don't move or try to stand! You are prisoners of the United States Army. Any move will result in your being shot." Slowly the germans stood, terror in the eyes of all but the field marshall. He seemed somewhat amused and looking at Joe said,"Lieutenant, what do you plan to do with us? Do you think that you can capture us and get out of here? You are surrounded by my forces. You are in the middle of the Third German Army. General Ludendorff, himself, has planned this offensive. We will be in Paris in three weeks. Drop your weapons and we will make you prisoners of war." Joe took out his whistle and made a sharp blast. Machine guns opened up from three directions. The german officer's face became stern. The smirk was gone. "Gentleman, if you please, move out and follow the sergeant to safety. If any one of you makes any move out of line you will be shot. Now Move." The officers formed two columns as directed and with Greenberg at the head of the column they headed to the Allied lines, a white flag tied to the end of the field marshall's sword. Joe quickly made two more blasts on his whistle and the small arms fire started. He and one of the men grabbed up the pouches and papers on the table and were about to move back toward their lines when they heard men running through the brush in their direction. The five Americans that were left there quickly hid in the brush part of the woods where they could still see the clearing. In a matter of minutes about thirty-five germans raced into the clearing and came to an abrupt stop. Joe quickly called out to them to stop, drop their weapons or risk being shot. Not knowing the size of the enemy around them the German's slowly put their weapons down and raised their hands. They were ordered into two columns.Joe came out of the woods and the four other American's followed at different points so that all of the enemy were surrounded. Taking a german bayonet and attaching to a tree limb, Joe fastened a piece of a white cloth he had found on one of the german's. Putting one of his men in the front and one on each side and one to the rear he marched the troops into the open and toward the enemy lines. This was too much for many of the germans who had now seen three groups of their comrades captured by what was obviously superior forces both in numbers and strategy. Many yelled out and stood with their hands on top of their heads and moved to the open area. More soon followed and soon there were over two hundred and fifty prisoners. Joe called to the riflemen of his platoon and had them round up the surrendering troops and lining them up in two's marched them back to the regiment. Here they were told to rest. Suddenly all was quiet. The Americans were called back to the trench and ordered to dig in. Red Cloud returned and Joe told him that he would have to bring up almost a platoon of reinforcements to make up for the ones that had to escort the prisoners. The indian laughed and said to Joe, "Looks like another little big horn in reverse." Several hours later the men had eaten, cleaned their weapons and settled down for some sleep when Red Cloud arrived with the rest of the

men who had taken the germans back to the line. Also Greenberg had several new men and the platoon was once more at full strength. With this group was an American Major, McCombs. Joe did not know him and was surprised to see such a high ranking officer up here near the front lines. This area was reserved for lieutenants and sometimes a captain, but never a high ranking officer. The major did not waste words. "Lieutenant Caine I have orders to take you to Allied Military High Command. It seems as if you have captured the German High Command field staff. I think you're about to get a medal." Joe laughed. "If any one should get a medal it's the guys and not me, he said. They did the work, give them the glory." The major smiled and said, "let's go." Back at the High Command Joe received several medals: the French Croix de Guerre, the Belgian Cross of Valor, the British Order of the British Empire and finally the American Distinguished Service Cross. It seems that the German offensive was crushed by this officer and his platoon. Something the entire Allied force had not been able to do for months. Before going back to his men he got Red Cloud a promotion to Staff Sergeant and Greenberg was to sent back and reassigned to another outfit to help train them for battle. He would be Lieutenant Greenberg. Several of his men were to receive promotions and commendations would be put into their service records. He found a telephone that was working nearby and without thinking of the time he called America and his wife.

CHAPTER 28 The years had been good to the two families. Joe had brought Maria's brothers into the business. Juan Carlos had increased his holdings in Mexico and Spain and had many of his relatives working for a new company, VCI, Vegas-Caine Industries Ltd. The modern facilities of the Caine company's ships and rail cars, along with new parts of the business had made this the largest company of it's kind. One of the interesting features of the company was that it issued no stock, nor did it buy any. The stock market was going farther up each day and yet the families resisted. The rules of the first Kani Kompany trading post still held. For the new managers, they were paid a good salary and ten percent of the profits at the end of the year. Most of the new managers were the brothers of Maria; but Red Cloud and Isaiah Greenberg were not. When the war ended Red Cloud was about to go back to the reservation when Joe decided that he need someone of Red Clouds experience and knowledge around to help him. In the beginning he had to teach the indian everything,including how to read. It seems as if Red Cloud had no time to go to school on the reservation. He was too busy hunting and fishing. Red Cloud, himself, wanted to be able to read and to write. He had seen much and wanted to be able to put it down on paper for the time when he got married and would have children.

Joe saw in this quiet man a thirst for knowledge and he was one to nurture it and bring it out for good. He wrote his sister asking what could be done to help the tall indian and was pleased to hear that there was a school in Pennsylvania called Carlisle Indian School that educated indians. Calling Red Cloud to the office one day he told him that if he would go to the school he, Joe, would pay for all of his expenses. Red Cloud needed to think this over for he had met a young mexican girl from Texas and had fallen in love with her. Joe, sensing what the problem was said to his friend, "If this girl really loves you it seems to me that she would be willing to wait. When you finish the school I want to make you a manager. You'll get a good salary and each year you'll get ten percent of the profits of your part of the company. Talk to her and see what she says." The next day the indian told Joe that they had talked and it was decided that he would go to the school. He trusted everything Joe told him. More than once he had told other members of his family that, "Joe is really one of us. He is to be trusted." Isaiah Greenberg and Joe had kept in contact after Joe was mustered out. The muscular sergeant turned lieutenant was a natural leader and Joe knew that these were the type of men that would be needed to keep the company strong. Over the past few years Joe had assumed the role of the head of the entire company. Peter was content to run his part of the business but had no real feeling for the expansion that was taking place. Joe's father was starting to age and spent most of his time with his mother and Maria's family. The two men went on long hunting and fishing trips together. When they returned there was always something new that was to be added to the business. Isaiah had stayed in the army until 1925 and mustered out as a Captain. Joe went to the mustering out ceremony and took Maria and Randall with him. Red Cloud was to meet them in Philadelphia, where the ceremony was to take place. Randall was almost nine years of age. He had the smooth skin and complexion of his mother. His eyes were those of his father's family going back over the centuries. His hair was the color of the raven. He had long arms and legs. He loved to run and to find the heaviest rocks and roll them down to make a wall where he kept his horse. The ceremony was emotional for all of them. The biggest surprise came when Isaiah introduced all of them to his wife, Rebecca. He had not told Joe that he was married. Isaiah told them that they had married when he returned from the Great War. She was a nurse and he had met her on the ship returning from Europe. He was in love as soon as he saw her. They all laughed and Rebecca blushed. Holding on to her hand was a small girl with beautiful long black hair. Her name was Joanna. Isaiah had told his wife about the tall man from Texas whose family talked to eagles and to mountains. He told her of his kindness and how he had made this life possible for them. She told Maria that they named the little girl after Joe for it was right that she should have all of his good traits as well as the biblical person who bore that name. Joe's wife felt tears come to her eyes and she held the other women closely. "Come," she said, "we are of different faiths but we both pray to the one God. "There is a beautiful place where I sometimes go when we come here on business and I want to be alone and talk to God. It seems right that we should take our children there. It is time

for us to give thanks for all that we have; our children and our husbands and above all our lives." Red Cloud had met them at the ceremony, and the little group all went to Philadelphia's finest restaurant. The head waiter looked at the party skepticly, but when Joe handed him his card he motioned them to the best table. Dinner was good and toward the end Joe turned to Isaiah and asked what he was going to do now that he was a "free man." The other one laughed and said that he was going to take a couple of weeks and relax and enjoy his family. He had started this family late in life and wanted to make up for lost time with them. Joe looked at his friend and at Red Cloud who was grinning. He knew Joe and what he was about to propose. After all he made the same offer to him. "Isaiah, after you finish playing house how would you like to come to work for the Caine Companies? I need someone to take charge of operations on the east coast. It has to be someone I can trust; but in your case i'll make an exception." They all laughed for they knew that Joe only surrounded himself only with people he could trust. "The pay will be good and you will receive ten percent of the profits of your part of the operations. You will be able to live anywhere you want from Georgia to Maine. Talk it over with your wife and let me know after she is tired of having you messing up the house and getting underfoot as I do, and probably every other husband." Again they all laughed, all but Red Cloud. Joe could see in his face that he missed Alicia and that he was anxious to return. When the party was over and they all were about to part, Joe got Red Cloud over to the side. "How are you doing at Carlisle?" The indian said that now the work was easy for him. He was now reading as good as the teachers and that he was keeping the books for most of the other indians who went to school there. Joe listened to the other man and then asked him when the school year would be over. "I have three months to go to get my certificate. Gee, with that I can pass for a white man." He said with a laugh. "Well, you now have more education than me. I hope you can give me a job." The two men laughed. Red Cloud said that he would be back in less than four months. He and Alicia had been writing to each other and had talked on the telephone several times. They had decided to get married as soon as he returned. "Good. We are going to give you a wedding like the town has never seen. Start getting all your friends and relatives together and write Alicia to do the same. Maria and I will take care of all of the arrangements." The next day as the three of them boarded the train back to Texas Joe told Maria of the wedding of his friend. Maria became so excited she started to tell Joe all that she was going to do, in Spanish. She always did this when she got excited. Joe just sat back and laughed and so did Randall. Arriving back at their home Joe found his father waiting for him. He thought that was strange since this was the time that the older men had planned to go to the Orient. Joe's father came right to the point. "Joe, we have to make some serious plans for the future of the company. Most of those who have been with the company since you were little are now retired or are going to soon. We must think of either selling off part of the company or finding new blood from our ranks and start to train them to take

over. You are only thirty-five years old and have made more for the company than I ever did or for that matter any of your ancestor's. Your son is nine years old and you do not know if he will even be interested in the business. Peter is dying and he has no one to leave his business interest to after he is gone. That means that if we keep it all you will have all of the responsibility. Are you prepared to take it on?" Joe thought for a moment and said, "Father I knew that this was coming for some time. I have been preparing for the time when I would have to make this decision. I have good managers in place and have just finished getting the east coast operations now under one person. Soon Red Cloud will be back from school. He will handle all of the operations in the Texas and mid-west regions. Maria's brother has done a great job here and is ready to move to more responsibility. He could handle all of the west coast and the fact that he speaks the language of the people will be of a great help. That would leave me free to oversee the entire operation." James knew that he had made the right decision that time many years back when he had sent Joshua on a sled to his grandfather's trading post. It seemed so long ago and yet it was only in 1898. This was 1925 and times were different. Joe brought his father's attention back to him when he said. "Before I can make any decision there is one thing I must do. It has been on my mind for some time and now is the time for me to go to Denali. It is only right that I go to find my answer where my ancestor's have always found theirs." The father smiled at his son. He had forgotten that he had done the same many years before and that it has always been the way of the Tanana's. Joe called San Francisco and got in touch with Jacob Ashton. Jacob promised to have a boat in readiness when he arrived at the end of next week. But before he left Jacob told him that he had something that he wanted to talk to him about concerning the company. Joe arrived in San Francisco on a Friday. He had said goodby to Maria and had explained to his son where he was going and why. He told him of his grandfather's first visit and his great grandfather's last visit. It was the way of the family to get the answers of the important questions of their life. Jacob had met him at the train and took him to the Mark Hopkins Hotel. After he had settled in his room he went to the lobby and met Jacob for dinner. The other man was beginning to show his age. He was greying at the temple and there was the start of a stoop to his shoulders. His walk was not as spry as it once was. Joe could not really understand this for there was only about twenty years difference. He remembered that his father did not walk like that. He was still tall and straight and had a bounce to his stride. "Joe I'm glad you came. I was going to come to see you. My health is bad. I have to go to live in Arizona, the doctor's say. It seems that I have a problem with my lungs. I'm sorry but that's the way it goes. I think that you'll have to find someone to take over my duties. I'll stay until you find someone." Joe was stunned and saddened by the news and he showed it on his face. He turned to Jacob saying, "Do you have anyone working for you who could take over your job? Is there anyone that you could train fast enough?" The other man shook his head and said "No, there isn't anyone

who works for us." Joe looked at Jacob and said to him, "It'll all work out, don't know how yet but it will work out. In the meantime you need to know that you will have a pension of Twenty-five hundred dollars per month. Any time you need more, just ask. Tell me where you want to live and we will buy you your house." The two men talked of the past far into the night. The next day Joe boarded the steamer that was to take him to Alaska, and to the mountain. The weather was starting to change. Light lasted for about ten hours now and was getting shorter every day. Joe went to the Kani Kompany store in Anchorage, both to see that it was running O.K. and to get outfitted. Just like his father had done, and his grand-father before him had come to this trading post. The next day Joe went out to a local stable and rented a riding horse and a pack horse. The stableman warned him not to be out too many weeks. The winter was coming and he would have a hard time getting back starting next month. Joe thanked him and told him that he would be back in a couple of weeks. When the man asked where he was going he said, "To the home of my relatives, the Tanana's." The man smiled and told him the route. The following day Joe rode into Wasilla and spent the night at the Inn of the Silver Fox. The next day dawned clear and cold. Joe was glad that he had the sense to listen to the manager of the Kani Kompany store. He had gotten a heavy parka and was glad that he had this morning. Following a hearty breakfast he started for Sheep Creek Lodge. He arrived before dark, ate early and went to bed and slept like a log until morning. Waking early Joe started out for the little settlement of Petersville. The day was overcast and the air smelled of snow. Toward noon the sun was starting it's downward movement. As darkness came Joe arrived at Trappers Creek. He had heard his father talk of this place. The sky cleared and for the first time he saw it! He had seen the pictures and heard the talk; but now he knew what they too had seen with that first look. The mountain filled his vision. He had to move his head to see the end of the glaciers to the sides. He could see the twin peaks and the ring of clouds around the middle like a giant belt. He started toward the mountain almost forgetting that he was hungry. He stopped at a way station for a hearty lunch. He wanted that to carry him until the darkness overtook him. He would camp that night and ride to the mountain the next day. It was dark when he got to the three huts that made up Petersville. Oil lights shown in two of the huts and someone called out to him to come in and warm by the fire. He tied his horses down and fed them. He always was one to see to his stock. He introduced himself to the young couple who lived in the three room cabin. They asked him to eat with them for the man had just caught a large quantity of fish back at the Hulitna River. It was a great dinner and after it Joe asked them how far it was to Denali. The young couple were pleased that he used the indian name for the great peak. He was told that he could be at the base of the ring of mountains in front of it before it got dark the next day.

The next day was clear and Joe was up with first light. Thanking the young couple he saddled the pack horse and his horse. After he had left the young couple found three hundred dollars next to the fireplace. It seemed every few minutes he had to stop and gaze at this wonderful sight. He wondered how he would find his answers. By the time darkness started to come he had reached a gap in the glaciers to the east of the giant. He quickly set up his camp, built a fire and fed the horses. As he fixed his dinner a feeling of peace and contentment came over him. Morning came and with it bright sunlight. He quickly got his climbing gear and started to look for the gap that would lead to the top. He had all the information his father could give him, plus the map of his grandfather that his father had used on his first trip to Denali. After working his way around to the area between two glaciers he found a space that was dirt and rock. As he scanned the mountain he saw it! There was the rock ledge where his father and all of the men of their family had gone to trying to find the answers. With tears in his eyes, Joshua Caine stopped to look at the rock and feel the emotions run through his body and his mind. As reality set in he started up the rocky surface looking for the path that would lead him to the rock. Joe had climbed for what seemed like hours and finally stopped to eat something. He made a small fire from some of the dried kindling and moss that he carried with them. Some where he had heard that dried moss was good to start fires. He made himself some soup and took some of his bread and put it in the liquid to thicken the soup. After eating and cleaning up the area he started back up still looking for the way to the rock. A sudden loud cry came to him. Was this the great bird who had guided the others to the rock? He looked around but saw nothing. He continued up the narrow rocky incline, which now started to get quite steep. He paused to catch his breath. Again he heard the cry and when he looked up he saw a great eagle soaring above him. Joe was not one that did things impulsively, but now he did just that. He stood up and waved his arms at the huge bird that was soaring on the wind currents above him. The sun was starting to go down and he had not yet gotten to the rock. There was no place for him to camp since he was on a place where there was no level area. The eagle must have sensed his thoughts for it slowly dropped down and landed on a ledge to the right of the man. The bird cried out and Joe started to pick his way toward the spot. Just as he got near the bird, it rose and settled about two hundred yards above the ledge. Joe got to the ledge and there he saw what appeared to be a path leading up. At last he found it; the way to the rock. Again it was the eagle that did what it had always done. With a cry the majestic bird rose and disappeared. Joe moved quickly now, for the darkness would be on him in about three hours. He moved with the strength of a man who had always been fit and trim. It took him about two hours to reach the rock. He called this the "rock of his fathers." Before it was dark he had his small tent up and his fire going. He made his meal and then looked around in the fading light. He could see shadows but they told him nothing. Realizing that all of this would have to wait until tomorrow he settled into his tent to think. A sudden noise woke him as light was starting to break over the mountain. Looking out he saw what looked like a woman moving to the far

end of the rock. He had heard the story of the woman of the rock from his father and his grandfather but it was just a story that they had made up to make the adventure more romantic. Now it was no story. Quickly he got his clothes and boots on and scrambled out of the tent and ran to the place where he thought he had seen the woman. There was nothing there except a small opening in the rock. Joe pulled himself into the hole and lighting a candle looked around. At first he saw nothing and then he looked at the walls and saw that there were pictures. The crude drawings showed a boat, two people, then what looked like three children. There were other pictures of a big bird and of a woman. Were these pictures made by his ancestors? Were these his ancestors? Who drew the different pictures of the bird and the woman? As he looked at the pictures he could see that they were better and better with each drawing. Now the man decided that it was time to see what was in the cave. Carefully he searched each piece of ground in the small cavern. He started at the front and worked his way around the sides and the center and finally to the rear. It was here that he found the small leather bag. The bag was dried and was starting to fall apart. He gently opened the bag and found some of the dried moss, much drier than his. Digging around the area he found one of the ulu's that his family had been making for over three hundred years. Strong feelings that he had never known came over him. He was living with the past. He was part of that past. He was looking for answers and instead he had found questions. Why had none of the others found this cave for many years? It was obvious that no one had been here for longer than he had lived. His father had never mentioned the cave. Looking at his watch he realized that he had been in here for over five hours, and also that he was hungry. He hadn't taken the time to eat. As he moved to the front of the cave he realized that he had not seen the woman who had led him here! He could find no other opening in the solid walls, as he covered the cave's sides with detail. Moving out of the cave he came into the light and was blinded, momentarily, by the sun and the snow. When his eyes cleared he saw the giant bird sitting near his tent. It looked like the bird had a grin on his face. The white head-feathers were moving in the breeze and the feathers on the wings ruffled with the wind. Joe often heard the story of how his father and Maria's father had slowly approached the bird and how his father had touched the wings and then the head. Joe slowly approached the bird who hopped but stayed where it was as Joe came up to it's side. He slowly reached out his hand and touched the silky wings and then the large head. The bird looked at him and then with a hop moved away and raised itself into the air. With a cry the bird circled the rocky ledge that Joe was standing and then disappeared. He could hear the final cry of the great eagle but saw nothing. Joe fixed his meal and then settled down by the fire to think of the things that had happened today. He knew that this was perhaps the most important day of his life. He still did not grasp all of the things that had happened, but he knew that there was something else he had to figure out before he left this place. After he had eaten he decided that he would go back to the cave the next day. Still he had not gotten the answers he came to find. He

knew he was calm and there was a feeling of enthusiasm and youthful vigor that he had not felt in a long time. He still did not know what he was going to do about the business. He had watched the sun go down and the bite of the wind grabbed him and chilled his body. He put the parka on and sat out by the fire for a long time. He was looking for answers. As night closed in he noticed that the sky was different than any he had ever seen. In the darkness the sky had cloud-like ribbons of light green and a glowing light red. It looked as if there were millions of stars making a belt across the sky. He watched as the belts waved as if on a sea of black. His mind seemed to clear of all things and he sat as if there was nothing in him. He was part of the sky. Sometime later he realized that he was still sitting in front of a dwindling fire, and that something or someone else was nearby. He tried to see in the darkness but there was nothing. He crawled into his tent and into his sleeping bag. There must be an answer here, he thought. What was it? Where was it? Morning came and with it a snow storm. Joe knew that he was not going off the ledge today. He had enough food but in order to keep warm he had better go back into the cave. Getting his gear quickly, he gathered up the wood that was still near his tent. After two trips everything was in the cave as the heavy snows started to fall. This was one of the heaviest early snow storms that Alaskan's could ever remember. Most storms didn't come until November, not August. Everything was covered and covered deep. Denali could not be seen, even from the settlements. This was the storm that held Joshua Tanana Caine captive.

CHAPTER 29 Joshua Caine looked different when he returned to his home nearly six months from the time he left. His hair had turned almost totally grey and the trim, well developed body was gaunt. The face was lined and there was a strange gleam in his eye. Joe's wife called her father-in-law when she had learned that Joe had been found and that he was on his way home. James, Polly and Maria's father and mother came as soon as they got word. Joe had gotten there just a day before them and had some time

to spend with his wife. He was still tired, having lost over forty pounds while trapped in the cave for three months. He had survived on snow for water and the small quantity of food that he had disciplined himself to eat only when he was at a point where he was becoming delirious. It was no good asking him what had happened while he was in the cave. He said, "I saw lives of our family, from the first of our family to that of grandfather. I saw the things that I needed to know, and the people that I should always remember. I saw the eagle and it talked to me and the woman saved me." Maria thought that he was still delirious but Joe's father was not so sure. He tried to explain to the woman what the mountain and the eagle meant to the men of the family and indirectly to the women as well. She started to try and understand but soon gave up. It was weeks before Joe started to regain his strength and with it his sense of humor. The glint in his eye brightened, and he was once more back to work. Now, however, he was looking at the business with a different viewpoint. He had talked to his father about what he thought they should do and his father told him, "You're in control now and the decisions are yours. You can talk to me about them but you will have to make them without my advice." Jacob Ashton called him early in March of 1927 asking him about the sale of the shipping company. Joe told him that he had one or two prospects but nothing new as yet. Jacob told him that the doctor's had told him that he could not spend another winter on the coast. The dampness was eating into his lungs. He also told Joe that there was a group that would be contacting him about a purchase of the company, but they were not the kind that would keep the company or it's employees together. He had heard that they wanted to buy the company and then split it up. Joe listened and then told his friend that he would not sell to them and that the shipping lines would be sold within the next two months and that Jacob would have to stay and help the new owners for a month. Meanwhile Jacob was to find some land where he wanted his house and then tell Joe where it was so that he could have a house built for the other man. When Joe finished talking to Jacob he called Isaiah and asked him to come to Texas. He had something he wanted to talk to him about. He asked him to bring his family since Maria often said how much she had wanted to see them. Isaiah said that they would be there in three weeks. Red Cloud was next on Joe's list and the two old friends would also meet in three weeks. He would reshape Caine Company for the future. Joe Caine was about to do what he had found the answers for, in the cave. The answers were what he had gone to the mountain to find. He had found them. Three weeks later, after dinner, the three men went into Joe's study. They were surprised when they saw him. He looked at least twenty years older than when they had seen him the previous year. Both Red Cloud and Isaiah knew better than to ask what had happened. If he wanted them to know he would tell them. The discussion was brief and to the point. Joe spoke first. "As you can see I have been through an interesting experience. I was caught

in a storm, in Alaska, and lived in a cave. Many things happened there. I have told you both about the eagle and the mountain. This is where I went to make some decisions and to find some answers. I have done both. Part of it involves both of you, if you are agreeable. It seems that we have a problem with the Caine Shipping Lines. Jacob Ashton is sick and has asked to be replaced. There have been a number of groups who have wanted to buy it but for one reason or another I don't want to sell to any of them. The company is one of the best profit centers we have and if there is ever another war they will make a lot of money shipping goods and materials. I want the company to go to someone who will keep it a profit center as well as keep our family in a good position." With this last statement, they knew he had regained his sense of humor, and they all chuckled. "Isaiah I want you to take over the lines. It will be your company. I want one hundred thousand dollars down and five thousand dollars a month for the next sixty-five years." There was a low whistle from the old veteran. "Joe, this is one that I have to think about and talk over with my wife about. Also I will have to raise some of the money. I don't have that much." "Red", Joe said, I want you take over all of the company's holdings, everywhere but Texas, New Mexico, Arizona and California. This includes the east, north,south and midwest as well as the northwest. I will make you the same deal as Isaiah has, with the same terms. Both of you must keep the name the same and whenever any one of the families of any one of us wants to use any of the company's assets they will have use without charge. I will control the states that I have mentioned as well as the properties in Hawaii, Mexico and other countries, except as they are used for the shipping lines." The indian looked at the other two men. Here he was a red man and he was being treated as one of them, and he was being given the chance to be rich beyond his wildest dreams. "I must think this over. I can get the money from our peoples in the tribe. I must talk to my wife and consult with the leaders of my tribe. They must tell me what I can do since I will have to live like a white man. The tribe may want to disown me. "The three men parted with the idea that they would talk more in a few days. The men agreed to the terms that were given to them They made the provision that they would start the monthly payments starting with January 1930 and that it would last until 1995. They had six months to raise the money. Red Cloud left his wife and daughter at Joe's house and headed for the reservation and the tribal council. Isaiah stayed at the ranch for a few more days. He wanted the two women to have time together. Randall was now fifteen years old and Joanna was seven. It was strange how much they looked alike. Both had the same color hair and the dark eyes. Both were quite agile and Joanna was more like a boy than a girl. The women were happy as two children spending time at the ranch and traveling around the state and into Mexico. When it was time f 124124124124124124124124124124124124124124124124 124124 124124 124124

125125 125125

12612 6¤12 612612 612612 612612 612612 6126 µ126126§126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126-126126126126 126126!126126"126126#126126$126126%126126&126126'126126(126126) 126126*126126+126126,126126-126126. 126126 /12 6126 0126126112612621261263126126412612651261266126126712612681261269126126: 126126; 126126 <126126=126126>126126?12 6126 @126126A126126B126126C126126D126126E126126F126126G126126H126126I126126J 126126K126126L126126M126126N126126O126126P126126Q126126R126126S126126T1 26126U126126V126126W126126X126126Y126126Z126126[126126\126126] 126126 ^126126_126126`126126a126126b126126c126126d126126e126126f126126g126126h 126126i126126j126126k126126l126126m126126n126126o126126p126126q126126r1 26126s126126t126126u126126w126126ýÿÿÿx126126y126126z126126{126126| 126126}126126~126126126126€126126or Isaiah to leave he thought that it would be a good idea for Rebecca and Joanna to stay with Maria and have a good time. He would be spending a lot of time travelling from the east coast to California setting things up. It was agreed and the man left with the promise that he would always come back through Texas. Joe laughed, "So you'll waste time and money to see a woman. I think I made a mistake. You'll put me in the poor house." The two men chuckled and said good-bye. As soon as he left Joanna told them that she was going to have another child. She had not told "Ike", as she called him because he had so much on his mind she didn't want to worry him. Maria smiled and gave her a hug. She had wanted more children but the doctor's told her that if she tried it might kill her. When she told Joe he smiled and told her that they would have to spoil the one that they had twice as much. Her life was worth too much to him. They had a fine son and her life revolved around her son and her husband. They both promised not to tell "poor Ike." Joe called Jacob and told him of his decision to sell right now. The new man who was buying the Caine Shipping Lines would be there in about two weeks and he had better send him the plans for his new house or he would be sleeping under a cactus. Joe and Maria had talked about the rest of their life. Now there would be more time for them to do the things that they had always talked about. Randy would be ready to go off to college in two years. He had already shown an interest in geology and had spent a lot of times in the company oil fields and around the gold, copper and silver mines that the company owned. Joe was told by the chief geologist that Randy had a feel for the rocks and for the soil. He was also had a business head and always seemed to know the price of the various ore's and the closest places to deliver the metals. More than once he had suggested that they have their own smelters.

By 1931 all of the other parts of the business had been sold to the two men. Randall had entered the Missouri School of Mines in Rolla, Missouri. Jacob was settled near Tuscon and was still working for the company, checking on shipments to Baha California which had to go through Mexicali. Isaiah and Rebecca had another little girl. This one was named Maria. They had asked Joe and Maria to be the godparents, to which they happily agreed. Rebecca had found a beautiful house high on a hill in San Francisco and decorated it in a manner that showed her not to be one who would flaunt money to others. Red Cloud had moved to Denver with his family. From here he could go to most places within a week. It also gave his family a chance to be closer to their successful son and his lovely wife, and their three children. Maria had always heard Joe, his father and her father talk of the territory of Alaska. Now, she told Joe, this was the time for her to see what they had told her about so many times. Polly had not been back for many years and she was getting to the point where she would not be doing much more traveling. Maria's parents had also talked about going to Alaska. It was decided that they would all take the trip together. The women would spend time together for a short time while the men made a trip to the "mountain." Arriving in San Francisco they all met at the Mark Hopkins Hotel. After taking in the sights of the city they headed to the north coast up to Mendicino and then to the Redwoods. The trip took about a week. By the third week in June all were ready to go north. They had contacted Isaiah and he had an entire ship at their disposal. It was a small sleek ocean going yacht that had room for ten passengers and crew. The weather was delightful and they decided to stop at the cities of Juneau, Vancouver and Seattle on the return trip. In just the few years since Joe had been to Alaska he was amazed at the difference. In Anchorage hotels were well built and had heat. There were more restaurants and transportation around the city. There was also a new railroad from Seward to Anchorage. They took the train down to the little port that was so special. It was here that the medicine that was to save Nome, was carried by dog sleds in relays across the frozen tundra over 1200 miles. The ride through the trees was breathtaking. At the end of the ride they came around a huge glacier. Joe's mind was already at work. He must talk to "Ike" about using this deep water port. After the sight-seeing was over as far as the men were concerned they settled the women in the hotel in Anchorage. Joe had made arrangements with the manager of the Kani Kompany to take care of the women and see that they got anything they wanted or needed. If they wanted to travel the manager would see that they had a safe escort. The manager assured the man that he would do anything necessary to see that the women had a pleasant time. More than ever Joe had wanted to get back to the mountain. He had always felt, since the first trip, that there was something he had missed. Something that was important in his life. He knew that he had touched the eagle, that he had found the ledge but he was still not sure that he had seen the woman on the mountain. He also wanted to see the cave again. He wanted to spend more time in there so he could copy down the writings. This time he was taking plenty of supplies and going

at an earlier time. There would be time for the men to study the area around the cave. That had not been done by his father who had not even seen the cave. The next day the three men started out on their journey. The weather was good and the days were long. They spent many hour in the saddle and were able to reach the mountain in three days, without pushing the pack animals and the horses. Setting up the camp was easy since the men all knew where it would be best for their climb to the ledge. They also wanted the campsite to give them a clear view of the rocky ledge. After a hot supper of soup and salmon the men decided that they would try to sleep longer and start earlier. They had brought black paper to cover the tent because of the constant light. Now they put it over the tent and crawled into their sleeping bags. It was a clear morning and it was warmer than usual. The men did not have to don the heavy coats that they had brought with them. After a hearty breakfast they fed the animals and started off on the trip to the ledge. They had been moving for about four hours and still had not found the path to the ledge. Surprisingly the eagle had not appeared. There was something wrong, James could feel it deep in his stomach. He did not know what but he was sure that something bad was going to happen. Shortly after noon they found the trail and started to climb to the rock. Going up the path made them slow down. The packs and the age of the two older men made the climb a long one. By seven in the evening, with the sun still high they reached the ledge, still with no sound or sight from the eagle. The men put up their tent next to the wall of rock that was Denali. Dinner was finished and they sat and waited for.............. It was time to sleep but the men could not get themselves to go into the tent. Where was the eagle? It was not possible that the great bird had not known of their coming. Why would he stay away. They discussed the matter and finally it was decided that the eagle had died and there were no others that knew of the sacred rites of man and the eagle. The men felt sadness but knew that they were here for a reason. Morning came and with it the search of the ledge. The men had decided that they would start at one end and work their way toward the place where Joe has found the cave. As the day wore on they had found nothing of interest until they came to a tiny crack in the mountain wall. In it was a small shiny object. Joe pried it loose with his knife and found it to be a small piece of jewelry made from bone. Strangely, father and son felt that it had some meaning in their lives. They talked to each other about the sadness that gripped them but they could not understand why. Juan Carlos saw the tiny object that they had found as a thing of beauty. Joe put it in a small pouch he carried where he also had dried moss. The search continued well into the afternoon when they decided to stop and eat. They would continue later but the air was getting colder and the men did not want to get caught without having eaten in case they could not keep a fire going. After the evening meal the wind had picked up to the point that they had to double stake their tent and then crawl into the sleeping bags. The wind howled and it seemed as if when it stopped Joe could hear the cry of the eagle. He asked the others if they heard the cry but they said no. The days would become shorter by almost three minutes each day

and they would start to see the dim light that signaled night. In two hours it would start to get bright again. This day it was different. The morning was a dull slate grey and the sun was not to be seen. The wind had died making the day even stranger to the men. Juan Carlos woke with a racking cough that seemed to sap all of his strength. The other two told him to stay in his bag and they would continue the search of the ledge. By noon the two had found nothing and were heading to the area where Joe had found the cave. It did not take long to find it and, grabbing some of the dead wood that had found it's way to the ledge from the tree line, they started a small fire in the cave. James went back to the tent to get the lights they had brought with them. "Joe, come here, quick!" A shout to the man in the cave came from his father. Joe rushed to the tent and it was then that they understood the sadness which had been on them. Juan Carlos was dead. This quiet, friendly man who they all had grown to love was with them no more. Decisions had to be made and made quickly. Should they start back at once? They decided that it was too late to start down the mountain that day. The cold weather that set in would keep the body from detiorating. They carefully wrapped the friend and father-in-law in a blanket and set him on the edge of the rock where they would start down the next day. As they started back to the cave they heard the cry of the eagle and looking up into the leaden sky saw the giant bird slowly circling the far end of the rock. The bird did not land but flew overhead and disappeared around the mountain. Another strange happening on this strange trip. After getting into the cave they made the fire larger. The warmth felt good. The father and son sat silently with their memories for several minutes. Getting up Joe started over to the wall where the pictures were. He lit one of the lanterns and started over to the beginning of the of the picture line. James came over to where his son was and looking with him at the drawings he said, "This could be the picture writing of our family. Perhaps this is part of the story of the mountain. Each of us has added to the wall pictures." His son turned to him and said, "Dad, did you ever see this cave or put anything into the wall? I have never seen it" said the older man. The two men continued to look at the wall. Suddenly Joe let out a loud gasp; one that was filled with fear and surprise. "My God, this can't be." he called to his father. The older man came to where the boy was and looked at the wall. There were obviously some new pictures on the wall. They showed a man in the cave with what looked like a fire in the middle. The pictures continued with a drawing of three men and then with two of the men carrying the other. "None of this was here before. Look! That's what it was when I sat by the fire I had built in the middle of the cave. There is a drawing of what happened today. No one knew we were coming and that there would be three of us. Juan Carlos was not sick when we left. He was not sick yesterday and now he is dead and the story is already on the wall. There is something strange and I am frightened; more frightened than any time during the war." The father nodded and looking at his son said, "We have no answer. Remember the eagle returned only after Juan Carlos died, and then did not come down as he has always done with our family. There must be a message to be understood from all this but I'll be darned if

I know what it is. The men continued to search the walls of the cave but found nothing. As they started to leave James saw an object in one corner half covered by dirt. Going over and picking it up he saw that it was a knife. It was different than any he had ever seen. It was not one of the ones that the family had been making for hundreds of years. This one was made entirely from bone. It still was sharp. The handle was a large bone with a slender blade pushed through the middle and down so that the handle was long enough to let the fist go around the handle and still have a tight grip. The blade was about ten inches long and came to a point so that it would seem to go through the toughest of skin and meat. It was strange, thought Joe, that I never saw it when I was here before. Someone has been here and left it for us to find. "Joe, there are pictures on the handle and on the blade." said the father. Joe went to look. On the blade was a small picture of a boat of some kind landing on what seemed to be a beach. There were what appeared to be two people next to the boat. On the handle there was a picture of a man with a spear. He was between two trees and there was a large animal, probably a bear, thought Joe. The bear was caught between the two trees and the man had pushed the spear into the front of the animal. Neither man said anything. Leaving the cave they packed up most of their goods, saving their night and morning meals to cook. They avoided the body and after they had everything ready to go they ate and went to the tent. They were about to go to sleep when they heard the cry of the eagle. The cry was somewhat different. Getting out of the tent they saw two eagles that looked alike. The two landed at the far end of the rock. Putting their boots back on they moved toward the giant birds. Slowly as the moved the birds also moved, coming toward them but moving apart. Joe noticed first that one bird had brown feathers. His father had told him that young eagles had brown feathers until they were five or six. Could this be an offspring of the older bird? Perhaps this too was father and son. For Joe this was a good sign. He and his father. Could anything be clearer? The older of the eagles had broken a wing sometime in the past and it had mended slightly crooked. Morning came and with it a cold blast of frigid air, that happens even in the summer. The two men put on their great coats and went down the mountain to get the horses ready and put the supplies in order. They would come back for Juan Carlos. The day was long and the weather was getting worse. The two men hurried about their tasks, not speaking but each thinking the same thoughts. They knew their loss but how would Maria and her mother handle this tragedy? After they had every thing ready to go they went back for the now stiff body of Juan Carlos. The path was not wide enough for the two of them to carry the body sideways. Having plenty of rope, they tied the man inside the blanket and used the rest of the rope to lower the body. In this way they could pass the body to each other. The trip down took the better part of the afternoon and when they reached the bottom and were ready to leave both looked back at the ledge, for each thought that they would never return. For an instant

both men were held spellbound. There on the ledge were the two eagles and between them was a woman!

CHAPTER 30 The year 1936 had come and gone. Randy had graduated from college and had taken a year to, "sow his wild oats." James was noticeably older, Polly had died and Maria"s mother went back to Spain to live with the two boys who were handling the European interests of VegasCaine Industries. With much of the world out of work and hungry it was indeed a dark time. Randall and Joe would sit and talk for hours about what would happen if the two who had bought the other business's could not keep up with their payments. Joe told him that their family would never do anything to Isaiah and Red Cloud that would bring shame to either man. "If they can't make the payments we will make it for them. They're only paying us so if there is a problem we will add it on to the end of the note." When your grandfather and I are gone it will be up to you to honor this pledge to those families. Always remember that they are part of what you have now and what you will have in the future." Randall was gratified that he had a father who cared so much for others. The time was coming that the world would be tearing itself apart. Already the overtones of the beleaguered League of Nations were crumbling. A new and sinister threat seemed to be coming from the orient. As he had taken a trip around the world on one of the ships of the Caine line, he saw that the Japanese were people who had a lot of skills and were making copies of the things that the Germans and the Americans had made. They were quick to learn and to modify for their needs. He had seen many new naval ships in Japan. While in China he had seen the first movement of communism come into the country and was surprised at how many of the people embraced it. He had always taken America for granted and it was this trip that changed his viewpoint forever. As a scientist he could put things into their right order and what he had come up with was a world with no direction or real leadership. One night he was discussing this with his father and said to him, "One day one of the countries of Europe is going to have a leader who will be able to control the whole of the continent. When that happens we had better be ready to hold our own, both in leadership and in strength. We never seem to be ready to fight when we have to until the other guy hits us first." Joe looked at his son, remembering his days not too long ago. "I remember seeing just that back in the war. You know that was only

twenty-one years ago and here, by your reasoning we are about to do it all over again." The two men talked until late in the evening and then went to bed, each thinking of the other and what his role in history was or will be. When When Randy woke up the next morning he told his family that he was going to Oklahoma to see if there was a place for the Caine's in the mining industry of the state. His father smiled and his grandfather laughed a hollow laugh, "Souns' just like a Tanana, eh Joshua?" The old man chortled. Joe turned to his son and said, "Remember to always follow our methods and you won't go wrong. If you have someone working for you treat him with respect and pay him all that he is worth. If you want to open a part of the company while you are there, be sure to call me so that I can come and see if it is what we want. You are the last one left to take over all that we own. You must take care of your grandfather, your mother and me. Remember you are a Caine." At this point the eldest one of them all looked at the boy and taking his hand he said in a cracked voice, "and a Tanana." For several weeks Randall wandered all over the state looking for the right mix of materials that would make a blend of workable materials that the company could use and make a profit on as well. It was on trip to the farthest part of Northeastern Oklahoma that he found what he was looking for. The town was called Bartlesville. Only about eighty miles from Tulsa the oil city and only forty or so miles from the Kansas border and a days drive from western Missouri or Arkansas; the area was rich in mining, oil and oil refining. This is what he had been looking for. In the back of his mind, for time now he had been toying with the idea of using mud to lubricate the oil drills and the drills used in the mines. Here was the place he could test this idea. Calling his father he told him what he had found and what his plan was for the area. He needed around twenty thousand dollars to get everything up and running. Joe told him to open an account at the local bank and then have the banker get in touch with their company bank for the transfer of the funds. He also told the boy that he expected a report each week on all that had happened. Randall did what was asked and the reports were starting to show what his family had known all along. He was a "rock hound." In a matter of weeks Randall had everything running to his liking. He had hired good crews and was paying them more than the other crews working for someone else, but as he told the men, "Be honest with me and I will be honest with you. Give me a full days work and you'll get a full days pay, without someone coming to collect for getting you a job." The men were happy and worked hard to please this young man who was so good to them. In a matter of weeks The first mine was opened and the men were already pulling forth lead and zinc from an area just to the east of Bartlesville. Just to the south he was building the first of the new Caine refinery's. It was 1937 and the dust bowl of Oklahoma and Kansas were taking

their toll. Men, women and children were making a mass exodus from the states. Many of these people had little or nothing but the clothes on their backs. Randy saw this and knew that he had to help. He called his father and asked him if he would "loan" him twenty-five thousand dollars to buy land from the farmers and workers who were leaving the area. Randy knew that this could not last forever and that the land would be worth a fortune later on, but now he could buy it at an honest price of twenty-five cents an acre. Joe listened to the young man and the stories of his ancestors flooded his mind. He said to his son, "I won't loan you the money." The boy voice was low and the sounds he made were ones that touched his father's heart. He had not heard his son cry in since he was a young boy. "I said I won't loan you the money, but if you will pay each of the families seventy-five cents per acre I'll give you the money. You say the land will be worth a fortune later, but we must not make this fortune on the misery of others. If you will do this the money is yours." The boy's voice had a new and vibrant sound to it as he said, "I see in you what I will become. It is strange how many lessons I get from you and never read a word. There is also another matter. I have met a young lady and dad, she is great, wonderful, beautiful and smart. I think you and mother and grandfather had better meet her before I do something foolish." Joe said,"We would like to meet her but grandfather is not doing well. I was going to suggest that you come back soon for it may be the last time you will be able to talk and see the old man. Bring the young lady down to us. Bring her mother if she would like to come. Just finish what you are doing and come quickly." Little Bird was a Cherokee. She was a light bronze color with jet black raven hair. Her eyes were a deep brown that seemed as if they could see everything. Her features were soft and dainty. She came up to Randy's shoulder and probably weighed about one hundred pounds. When she sang it sounded like one bird calling to another. She never walked, but seemed to glide. This was the girl that Randall was bringing to his home in Texas. Little Bird's mother, Dancing Waters, came along so that the family of this man would not think that her daughter was not perfect in every way.Little Bird's mother and father, White Buffalo, the Shaman, were not happy with their daughters choice, but they had hoped that with mother along the other family might not let their son continue this courtship. After ten days Randy had finished buying the land that he had sought. If his instincts were right and his knowledge of rocks and minerals were also correct they would have much to be thankful for in a few years. Randy, Little Bird and her mother, Dancing Waters took the train from Tulsa to the home of the Caine family in Texas. The greeting was much more than Dancing Waters had expected. The mother of the boy put her arms around her and walked her into the house telling her about how Randy had said so many nice things about her family, and how proud she must be of the important place her husband held in the tribal hierarchy. Then as they entered the large entrance hall she showed her a picture of Polly. Dancing Waters looked puzzled and Maria laughed.

"You see your daughter will not be the first of your blood to be in our family. This was my mother-in-law, Randy's grandmother. His great grandmother was also indian as was his great-grandfather. In fact the only one that does not have the blood of the indian in her is myself." Randy is three-fourths indian. Great-great-great-grandfather had married a Russian girl about two hundred years ago. The indian blood always returned as surely as the eagle returns to the Tanana's." The woman did not understand this last statement and the other woman told her it was part of the ritual of the men in the family. That the women only found out about it after they were married. It was said that only the one who would be the last of the Tribe would know the secret of the ritual, and then just before his death. All of this Dancing Waters took in for she too was acquainted with such thoughts and rituals as her husband did his sacred dances and chants. Was this to be a joining of two tribes, she wondered? The time the evening meal was to be served they had all managed to become good friends, all but grandfather who still had not made an appearance. Joe went up to get the old man and bring him to dinner so that he could meet the girl that was to be his granddaughter. As they came into the room Randy gasped. He had not seen grandfather for several months and the way that he looked the boy knew that this was, indeed the time to be home. A once robust, strong and vibrant man was now a mere shell with deep set eyes and hollowed cheeks. His color was ashen and yellow. His walk was slow and unsteady. He clung to his son's arm as they made their way to the table. Randy came over to him and gave him a squeeze and a kiss on the forehead. During dinner as they chatted and talked of the future plans there was little doubt that the two young people loved each other very much. Little Bird's mother saw that this was the way that it was to be and knew that this was the right thing for the families. As the talk continued and the coffee was served, Grandfather Tanana slowly pushed himself up out of the chair. Leaning on the table, he said. "Well Randy it looks like you have decided to cast your lot with me and marry a beautiful indian princess. When your grandmother and I got married everyone but our family thought I had lost my mind. The funny thing was that I had found it, in my Polly whose name in indian was Pohatas or wise one. That she was, was Pohatas. She took the name Polly when I was away and when I returned she told me that she had this new name. It was to make me look better and to go farther. If she had never done that it would have made no difference. Love is not in a name. It is in a look, and I have seen that look between you and your young lady. Our family has always been part of the indian nation, this was and is, because of our actions to our friends. Your father's friend for years, Red Cloud, is an indian, but more than that he is a friend. You live in a world that is harder to understand than when I was your age. Now we have a radio to listen to people from everywhere. A telephone to talk to people everywhere. There are talking pictures so people can see people everywhere. The best thing is not in all of those things but for people to see each other in their hearts. This is what you two young people must do if you are to have a marriage as good as your parents. I can see that you have done this and I am glad that I am living long enough for the day when you two will be married. Just don't wait too long for I am coming to the end of my journey back to the mountain. When you get married I have already planned your wedding present,

but that is for the wedding. Now I think it is time for me to go back to bed. Joshua remember don't think because I am old I can't see or hear. I'm still smarter than you any day. After all I am a Tanana. Now help me to bed." As he said the last part they all laughed and Little Bird went over to the old man and gave him a hug and rubbed her nose on his. Maria and Dancing Waters spent much time together in the week that followed. Joe and his son also spent a great deal of time together working on plans for the new mining and refining programs that Randy had started. It looked as if the Caine family fortunes were again on the rise, this time to what could be its highest level. Oil was at an all time high. Lead, zinc and glass were in great demand. Randy had opened up one oil field, three refineries and a zinc mine, with plans to open a second and even a third field. The young man had a lead smelter working to capacity. One of the things that he did, that made all of the people in the area very happy with him was to give jobs to those who stayed. Many of the other mines were worked by itinerant workers who were paid about half of what Cain Mining Inc. paid. It was the spelling of the first word that attracted his fathers attention. "Where is the last letter of our name, Randy?" The son replied. "There was a miner who had a small claim and was working it. His name was Jacob Caine. I felt that I could not use the same name. It might cause others to take it out on the old man. He is a "hard hat rock zincer", and I feel that our name is what we have and we are known by it. The sound is the same. In fact I will change my spelling to that so people will not confuse us. I know that you would not object since you yourself did the same thing many years ago. Also it is good to do something good for someone else who is less fortunate. I tried to buy him out and even offered him more than I could get out of the ground, but he refused. Too proud, I think." Joe could only agree with his son. He felt a glow of pride in this son who was so much like him and like his father, but had the kindness that was the way of his mother. Little Bird and grandfather James were inseparable. They sat for hours in the sun and talked, or rather he talked and she listened. It was the story of a great family, she decided. One that would make her parents happy. The old man and she would laugh over some of the stories of the early indians who lived on their land. How his daughter would teach them all of the white man's words and signs and they would go back to their families who did not understand, so they ended up talking in their native words. Mostly the old man talked of the future for the two young people. He had asked her if she was in love with his grandson and she "yes." He wanted to be sure that they would be married before he died. This was the sad part of their talk, for he knew, like an indian, that his time was close by and that he would be leaving the earth for his heaven. The young girl promised that if he would wait until the spring she would bring her family here for the wedding. He had to promise her that he would "go nowhere." Time was all too short and the two families had to separate. Randy knew that he could not stay away for long periods of time. He had no one to run all of the mines and handle all of the many details of the refinery. He also was looking at other business in the area. There

was a small paper mill about seventy miles away that he was interested in buying. Dancing Waters also wanted to get back to reassure her husband of the fine match her daughter had made. Little Bird had one last talk with the old man. She had a secret to share with him. The old man cried with tears of joy and holding the girl close said good-bye to the beautiful young lady who told him that her english name was to be "Polly."

CHAPTER 31 The wedding was a brilliant affair. White Buffalo invited all of his relatives who wore their finest clothes and feather bonnets. The women wore their soft deerskin dresses with bright beads sown into the fabric. It was beautiful and colorful. The friends of Maria from Mexico all came dressed in the look of the Caballeros. Jacob Ashton came looking old but fit, his cough gone. Maria's mother came from Spain with others in the family. The guests ranged from Paladins to old Jacob Caine who worked the Caine Mine. Many were just the plain people who had known this family and had never begrudged them their wealth. Also two other families came; families that would bind the ties for all of them. Ike and his family and Red Cloud and his family. After all of the ceremonies and the music and dancing were over the young couple were about to leave on their honeymoon to Europe. Grandfather Tanana said, "Randy, you have made a good choice. In fact if I were fifty years younger I'd take her away from you." The room full of people laughed. "Since I'm not you're safe. Now you have a person who will share all of the things in your life. She is wise. She has good instincts and comes from a proud and noble family. Your blood will again be united with the blood of the indian. That will bring to you honor and truth and wisdom. I am old and I may be rambling but these are the words that I feel in my heart and know to be true. You will get much good counsel from your new father-in law, White Buffalo, who by his very name is sacred and above all forms of pettiness. I hope that you will remember all of this for you are now going to carry a larger burden in life. I am coming to the end and I only wish that your grandmother lived to see this, but I know that she is looking down from heaven and is smiling. When I finish, your wife has a special gift for you but now I want to give you a small gift that has no meaning for you now but will in the future. You will never be in need of money, but

this will be something that you will always need." With that the old man took from his coat a small leather bag. He handed this to his grandson. The young man looked in the little bag and saw some fine weblike material. "What is it grandfather?" "It is dried moss. It has always made fires to warm our family since the first of our people came to Alaska over three hundred years ago. Keep it with you and when the time comes you will know what to do with it." The young man knew of the eagle and the mountain and knew inside that this would have something to with the mountain and the legend. Turning to his wife in a choked voice he said, "My grandfather said that you have a gift for me Little Bird. What is it?" The girl went over to her father and led him to the old man and with one on either side of her she said to her new husband, "When I was with your grandfather I saw his wisdom and heard his words. He is more like my father than anyone I have ever known. I will now live in the white man's world, your world. For that reason I must take a name that will bring honor to you and your family. I have talked to my father about this matter at great length. He has agreed that when I am in your world I will have an American name. When I am at my peoples home I will be Dancing Waters. But in this new and wonderful life that I shall share with you I will be called, Polly." Both families looked on in silence as the two men slowly embraced each other, a smile between each of them. No words but the thunder of their emotions could be felt by everyone in the room. The following day the two newlyweds left for New York and the start of their honeymoon and their life together. The trip was to be about four months. Joe said that he would look after everything for them. He knew that it would be good for him to get back into doing something useful for the family. That night Joe, White Buffalo, Ike and Red Cloud went into the study to smoke cigars. Joe liked White Buffalo as soon as he had met him and the feelings seem to be shared by the tall, proud indian. The talk came around to the children and Red Cloud seemed to be ill at ease. Joe sensing that something was bothering his friend but this was not the time nor place to discuss the matter. Tomorrow they would walk alone and talk. Tonight the talk turned to the times of each one's past, together and apart. It was as if a great spirit had descended on all of them at the same time. Joe thought of the eagle and wondered of its true meaning. Was this to be the linking of all their spirits, past and present. When a week had passed all of Dancing Waters family had left as had Ike and his family. Maria cried as Rebecca left, hoping that they would see each other soon and yet feeling that time was going fast in their lives. The year was 1938 and America was showing signs of coming out of the Depression. The two women hopped that they would be around to see the ne world that the new president Franklin Roosevelt said was coming. Red Cloud had stayed behind. He needed to have a talk with his old friend and benefactor, Joe. Red Cloud was worried, Joe could see

that and he turned to his friend as they walked the land and came to the stream that always had made Joe feel good inside. It was a quiet place where he would come to be alone with his thoughts. "Joe, I've got a problem with one of my sons, James. It seems that he has decided that he wants to travel and be on his own. He wants others to see him not as an indian but as an indian who is better than others. I have to get him into a different state of mind and I don't know what to do." Joe thought for a moment and then a smile came across his face. Red Cloud had seen that smile before when Joe had figured out how to capture the enemy twenty years ago. "Red, what do you think of James coming to work in Randy's business. We can give him some responsibility now, before the young couple comes back and if he works out I will see that he gets the traditional offer of a percentage of the profits. That has been the trademark of our family for over one hundred years now and I know you see how well it works. In Fact I probably gave you too much. You look more like a white man now and probably your math is better than mine. You cheated me, you tricked me, you could always read and write. You just wanted me to take pity on you and think that you were a dumb indian." Both men sat and laughed so hard that tears came to their eyes. It was soon agreed that the young man would come next week and that he would work with Joe doing a lot of the dirty jobs that had to be done as well as make some decisions in some of the smelting operation. This would be the place where he could be most useful for the heat of the operation would be too much for Joe for long periods of time. He would be so tired and dirty by the end of the day that he would have no desire to show off. He would be in an area where many poor indians, mexicans and white men lived together. He would see what he had and why he had to be proud but not boastful or arrogant. Before leaving Red Cloud and his wife, Alicia, talked the matter over and the next day Alicia said to Joe and Maria, "We are so lucky to have friends like you both. You are always there when we have needed you. What you will do for James is almost too much to hope for, but in your hands it will be God working for us and our boy. I will light a candle for you each day. I am so proud that Red Cloud had chosen to name our son for your father." That was the first time that Joe realized that fact. He was overcome and cried for some minutes before he could even speak. "Have you told this to my father?" Joe asked when he was again able to talk. "Your father has known it from the time the boy was born. We called him and got his permission." The following week James Cloud came to the house. He was a tall, well built, handsome young man. He dressed in what was the latest rich man's fashions. His coloring was a blend of his mother and his father. He had the mannerisms of neither. He was aloof and arrogant. It was as if he was the one doing them the favor of coming to live with them and help out in trivial matters. After a tour of the land and dinner the young man said that he was going to the town to see what there was to do. He dressed in his "quality" clothes and left. Joe and Maria were stunned that such a person even existed. They had known wealth and had lived with the poor as well but this was someone that they had never encountered. Joe went to the phone and called Red Cloud who had just gotten home from the office. "Are you sure this is your son?" He said. "Did they make a

mistake at the hospital and switch babies with you two? He is different than anyone I have ever seen. He reminds me of the German officer we captured who had to be sure he was dressed properly before surrendering." Red Cloud's voice was almost a whisper when he said, "I think you had better send him back. I never should have even asked for so great a favor. I had hoped that he would, at least, be somewhat subdued when he arrived." Joe laughed, and told his friend, "I'll send him back when he is a better man or else a broken one. He is about to learn the ways of my fathers. I'll keep you posted. Tomorrow will be his first test when we get up at five-thirty and head north." The morning was dark and cool when Joe got up. He had asked Maria the night before if she would fix breakfast and tell the cook and the maid to sleep in until the two men had left. After Maria had headed down to the kitchen he went to the boy's room and started to wake him. James could hardly open his eyes. He had spent a good part of the evening drinking something called Tequila and he was paying for it now. Joe told him that breakfast would be in a half an hour and they would leave for the mines and the north one hour after they had finished eating. When the boy came to the table he looked as if he had not slept in days. Joe and Maria smiled. They knew that he had learned his first lesson. Also they were pleased to see that he did not whine or complain. He drank lots of coffee but little else except for some toast. By seven that morning they were on their way to the station to catch the train that would take them to Bartlesville, and a new adventure. Joe was feeling good. He was going back to work and he was helping a friend. It was a two day trip and for the most part the boy had little to say to the older man. As they approached the end of the trip Joe turned to the boy. "This is the only time I will ever tell you this. Your father went to school because I told him that was the way he would be able to better himself. He did not need to spend his life on a reservation. He did what I asked. He worked hard for our family. He became one of my two most trusted friends. If I had a problem I only had to call. When he bought the part of our company it was as a friend and he has never let me down. You, on the other hand, have let your parents down. Your father asked me if you could come here and see if I could help you straighten out your thinking. Money is not the sign of success. The friends you make, the loyalties you earn and the respect that people have for you are the greatest riches you can possess. Two weeks ago my son married a beautiful indian girl. Her name was Dancing Waters. In front of her father and me she took the name Polly, which was my mothers name. She also was an indian. The first of our family to come to this land over three hundred years ago were indians. I am probably more indian than you in my heart. That is pride. You on the other hand show none of those features; but with me, and with my son later you will be able to become what you really are inside. If you do well you will be given the same opportunity that all the others, including myself and your father have been given through the Tanana family, which is the true family name. If you do well you will be given a chance to own a part of a business. That is, you will manage and receive a percentage of the profits as well as a salary. You do not

have to give me an answer. Your actions will be your answer. You will go back home a better person and a far richer person than you are now for you will have much more than wealth. On the other hand you may choose to leave any time and go home a far lesser person than when you came, for you will show your parents that you are a failure. The choice is yours. This is the last time we will ever speak of this matter. Do you hear what I am saying?" The boy nodded and looked as if he had been hit in the stomach and the breath knocked out of him. He did not know how to react. No one had ever talked this way to him, ever! The train pulled into the station and the two men climbed off and headed for the only decent looking hotel. The town almost looked like a boom town in the old west. Cowmen rode horseback through the streets, passing motorcycles and cars while trolley's, on tracks, were pulled by mules. Indians, and whites, mostly poor from their looks, and mexicans walked the wooden sidewalks. Dust was everywhere, and was soon all over their clothes. Both men went to their rooms and agreed to meet in the lobby in two hours and find a steak dinner. When Joe came to the lobby he was surprised to see the young man dressed in plain pants with a jacket and was wearing older boots. Joe smiled to himself. He had hopes for this young man. The blood of his parents was starting to run in his veins. They found the biggest steak in town, along with mounds of mashed potatoes and beer they were soon full and ready to walk some of the meal off. They came to a beer hall and Joe asked the younger man if he wanted to get a drink. "Are you kidding? I won't go near one of these places for a long time. I get sick even smelling the stupid place." Joe laughed and said, "We had better get a good night's sleep. Tomorrow will be busy. You will start to take over some of the work and I will get myself back to doing things that I used to do.

CHAPTER 32 Randy and Polly returned to the house where they had been married. Randy wanted to hurry back to his office. He had not heard from anyone for the past five months and was worried about his father and the young man he had brought to the smelter. Polly on the other hand had to stop and see Grandfather James. They shared an unspoken bond and could sit for hours, not talking but saying much with their eyes and their expressions. A week later having talked to his father, and being assured that nothing too terrible had happened, the young couple went to the home of White Buffalo where they spent the better part of a week. Some of the braves decided to see if Randy could ride and hunt and they set about a three day trip to get meat and fish. When they returned a feast was held and the ceremony of giving of the name was held. Randy was to be called, "Hunter Of Many Things." The next day the couple left for their new home.

Arriving at the offices of Cain Mining and Exploration Company Randy was shocked to find the place cleaner than when he had left. There was a bright, smiling young woman sitting at the desk in the front. "Good morning sir. Is there something I can do for you?" "Is Mr. Caine here?" the young man asked? "Who should I say is here, sir?" Asked the woman. "Tell him it's an old acquaintance." The girl went into the office and soon Randy's father came out of the rear office. "Randy, your back! Darn it all I was hoping you'd stay away longer. I really like the idea of working again. I see you've seen Irma, the office girl. She takes care of all the calls and the mail and people who I don't want to see. Irma, this is my son Randall. He owns the company and that makes him your boss." The girl smiled shyly but with some uneasiness. Randy quickly put her at ease. "Glad you're here. It sure looks a lot better than when I left." Joe and Randy spent the better part of the day going over the books and records of the company. Towards the end of the day Randy called Polly and asked if they had enough food to feed two hungry men. Polly laughed at her husband and told him that they could get by. That night Joe felt better than he had felt in a long time. He was in the house of his son and his daughter-in-law. The feeling was of warmth and happiness. After the meal the two men sat on the porch and talked of the future. "I think that you have the right idea here, Randy. What are your long range plans?" "Dad I think that the smelter business can spread to many parts of the country. While we were in Europe it seems as if the whole world over there is gearing up for war. The Germans have some crazy guy named Hitler building far better guns, tanks and planes than we have here in America. They have started a campaign against the Jews and he has the people believing that they are responsible for the depression all over the world. We need to be ready to melt many things in our smelters and I was thinking that we also need to build smelters near some iron mines. There is going to be a great need for iron and steel in the next five years or I miss my guess. The company can grow rich and at the same time do a great deal of good for the nation and maybe even the free world, if there is such a thing." Joe listened to all of this and knew that the boy was right. He remembered how it was with the Germans during the last war. They had better equipment than we had at the time. We won because of might. Polly came out to where the two men were sitting and said, "Have you solved all of the problems of the world; and if so how about a new one?" The two men looked confused as she went on. "It seems as if your son is a very strong man. He must have overpowered me in a moment of weakness and now he going to give you a grandchild." Randy was stunned and Joe was glowing. "Wait until I tell Maria and Grandfather James. They will be on cloud nine." "I have already told grandfather and by now he has told mother Caine. I will tell my parents soon, but this is the time for you to know. The baby will be born in February, maybe on Valentine's Day. If so it had better be a girl. The two men looked at her and then at each other and broke out in laughter and tears.

The next few weeks were busy ones for the Cain Company. James Cloud had proved to be an excellent manager of people. He had taken to calling himself "Jimmy." He told them that it made him sound like one of the "guys." Jimmy had taken over the hiring of men for the mines and all of the rest of the company projects in the area. He understood the philosophy of the company and he respected it as one that did the most good for the most people while it made huge profits. Everyone wanted to work for the company. People who had lived here before the draught and the dust were coming back to the town. They had heard of the Cain Company and how it paid a living wage so that its employees did not have to beg. They also heard of the school that Jimmy had set up for the migrant people of the area so that they could learn the basic skills of reading and writing and how to count money so the merchants and others could not steal from them. Joe had realized from the first that the boy was trying to impress his father by attempting to be a white man in a red skin. The talk Joe had with the boy on the train was all that was necessary. In fact over the next two months even Randy knew that this young man was something that would be special to the company, and he was doing everything in his power to keep Jimmy with them. He gave him a raise and then a percentage of the profits while he was working at the smelter. The family had never done this before. Usually it was when a person was put in complete charge and the family left them alone to manage by themselves. Fall was in the air and Joe wanted to get back to a warm fire and to Maria. Grandfather was still alive and had, in fact, shown some improvement over the past few months. All of them knew why. On the first monday of October Joe told Randy and Polly that he would be leaving friday to go back to Brownsville. He said that he was going to stop and see White Buffalo and maybe go fishing and hunting with the other man. Randy was caught between emotions; his father had never looked better and was like a new man, vital and alive. He was not sure that he would be able to do all of the work that the other man had been doing plus his own. He had planned to set up a mining and smelting operation in Arizona, where there was a great deal of copper and some iron. He was also buying up small iron mines wherever he could find a seller. He was absorbed with the idea that America would go to war, and soon. With his father gone he would have to slow down. He knew that he had to let his father go back for that was his life and someday he would be in the same position. That night he discussed the idea he had been thinking about concerning Jimmy. He would make him head of the Arizona operations and give him ten thousand dollars a year as a salary. In addition he would get a bonus of ten percent of the profits. Joe turned to his son and said that he was doing the right thing but there must be a clause in the agreement that would raise the other man's salary each year that the company made a profit. That meant that he also had to produce more each year to get himself a bonus. Randy agreed that this was the best course. Joe said that before he did this he wanted Jimmy to go back to his parents for a visit. "Make it a vacation." The older man said. "I want his father to see if the boy has really changed. He will know by

the clothes the boy wears and the people he goes with at night. Then you will know if he is indeed ready for the responsibility of running such an operation. After all he has only been here for about nine months." Randy agreed and the next day he told the other young man that he had earned a vacation and the company was buying him a round trip ticket home. By now Maria was well along in the pregnancy and she seemed bigger than normal,if there was such a thing as normal. She had told her mother about the baby and Dancing Waters had told White Buffalo. When Joe got to their village the three of them spent much time grinning at each other. White Buffalo said to Joe, "It is time that you bring your wife to our lodges. She needs to feel what you and I feel as brothers, with Dancing Waters as a sister." Joe agreed and said that he would get word to him next week on when to expect them. He would also see if Grandfather Tanana would be able to come. He was sure that there would be much that the older man would want to see and to say. It would bring him back to his childhood and his youth. It was agreed by all and the next day "Tanana" as he was called left for his home in Brownsville, Texas. Maria could not get over the difference in Joe. It was as if he had stepped into a fountain of youth. His step was strong and springy. There was a sparkle in his eyes that had been missing for many years. Even his face looked so much younger. She was happy that the work had been so good for him. Grandfather also noticed the change and said to his son, "I think that I need to have something to occupy my time in such a way as to make me also lose some of my age. With a great grandchild on the way I've got to get in shape." The younger ones laughed but were happy to see the old man with a twinkle in his eyes once again. Joe called Red Cloud to say that his son was being sent home so that Red Cloud could see if there was any difference in the boy or if he was the worse for wear. He told that when he started he was working in the mine and the smelting plant for about twelve hours a day. It was back breaking work but the boy was a worker. He was up early and was the last one to quit. Red Cloud was to let him roam the streets at home and see how he reacted to a big city from a dust town. The indian said that he and his wife would let him know how far the boy had come. He would let him know after the boy went back to work. Joe did not tell his friend that the boy was to be given his own operation not too far from where Red Cloud and Alicia lived. It was a strange trip to the home of White Buffalo. It was as if someone had given Grandfather Tanana a new elixir of life. He was always awake. His eyes were clear and his step was much firmer. He still used a cane but not like before. He talked to everyone on the train and they could not get him to go to sleep at night. Maria also seemed to be happier than he had seen her in a long time. What was to happen in the village was even stranger. Maria and Dancing Waters spent much time together thinking about the new baby and what they could make for the child. Maria thought it would be a girl and Dancing Waters, a boy. They decided that each would make clothes for both sexes, just in case. Joshua, as the indians called him, his father and White Buffalo walked the camps of the village. Grandfather had a strange look in his

eyes. He told the two younger men that this reminded him of his youth in Alaska and the early times in Grangeville to the north. So much was different and yet the feelings were the same as his youth. He could see in his mind the homes of his friends: of Running Antelope and Bright Eyes and of Polly. The world had changed but the memories still lingered of a time when all was good. And he thought of the mountain. Once more he knew he must go to the mountain. He had told White Buffalo of the mountain and the eagle. The other nodded gravely and then surprisingly said,"I have heard the story. I heard it from an old chief of the Souix, many years ago. He told of the man who could tame an eagle and who carried a magic flame." James Karl Tanana felt as if he had been kicked in the stomach. He sat in a chair trying to get his breath back when his son came into the room. He took one look at his father and then at White Buffalo, who in spite of being younger than his father looked every bit his age at that moment. Getting his breath back he told Joe what the indian had just told him. How the story must have been passed down from the Tanana family to other tribes and now from a chief in the Dakotas. Suddenly Joe got a funny feeling in his head, as if it were about to explode. "He turned to his father-in-law and asked him if he knew the name of the old chief. "His name was, Running Antelope. He was over ninety years old but the story came from him as if he had just heard it. He told me that the story had come from his father's father, and had been told before. James knew what had to be done. He knew that he was still alive for one purpose, to make the last trip back to the mountain--with the men of their family. Joshua and White Buffalo tried to talk the old man out of it but to no avail. He would go alone if the others did not want to make the trip. Their arguing raged back and forth for several days with Maria suddenly thinking that there was a way to solve the problem. She went to the telephone and called Polly. Polly, after hearing the story, told her she would be there in three days. Polly's arrival was a surprise to the rest of the family, for Maria had kept it to herself. She knew that Polly and Grandfather James would work out the right answer. A great feast was held for Little Bird that night. She sat next to her parents and across from Grandfather James. She could see the excitement in his eyes. They would talk and then she would be able to say the right things to the old man and to the family. Tonight was for eating and story telling for the unborn baby to hear. The two mothers sat and looked at the girl who by now was huge. When they were alone later in the evening Dancing Waters said, "I think it was wise that we decided to make two different sets of clothes. She looks as if she is going to have more than one child. Maria agreed. Soon they were to find out how right they were in their preparations. The next morning Dancing Waters packed a lunch for her daughter and the old man, who was now getting around without his cane. He had grown remarkably stronger and much more alert. The old man and his granddaughter walked slowly down to a stream and sat by a few trees. Winter was not quite here but the weather was

turning cooler. The conversation was about the trip he wanted to make back to the mountain. There must be something there that he has to find before the end of his life. They talked calmly for several hours and then sky started to darken and cold air started to blow. They walked back to the village holding hands, laughing like lovers out for a walk. That night as they ate dinner, White Buffalo turned to his daughter, Little Bird, and asked her for her opinion regarding the trip that the old man had wanted to make. All had agreed that she was the one that all would listen to and abide by her decision. Both fathers and Grandfather James listened intently as the young woman spoke. "I have tried to talk Grandfather out of this trip. He is much wiser than I am. He has told me of why this return to the mountain is so important. He wants the three of you to come also. He knows there is something special about this time. My father is a Shaman and he must know, above all others, the spirit that moves Grandfather. It is surprising that you would not honor his request. All that he has done for you he has done in the spirit of the eagle. I tell you that this is the most important thing in his life. It keeps him alive. He must go. More important you must go with him. Father this is a great honor that he gives to you. You will be bound, for life, as brothers. It is a sacred trip much like the ones that our forefathers took over a century ago when they left Florida to find their own land. There is nothing more that I have to say. It is the will of the spirit god's of our fathers. The spirits of our people have spoken to me as I have spoken to you this night." Nothing else was said that night. Everyone went to their beds with many questions and thoughts to sleep on before morning came. There was no other decision to be made. The men had agreed to listen and do what Little Bird said. White Buffalo had much to do. There was the picking of another Shaman if he did not return. Joe had to go back to the house with grandfather James and prepare all of their papers in the event that one or both did not return. Randy had to take Little Bird back home and he had to go to the office and make sure that all was in order. Irma would have everything under control inside of the office, but what about the outside, the mines and the smelters. Joe would call Randy in a few days to give him Red Cloud's report. If it was what they both thought then Jimmy could run the operations until they got back. If something happened he would be able to keep it going or sell it and give the money to Polly and Dancing Waters. There would be more than enough for the women to live well for the rest of their lives, and also for Jimmy to have a good nest egg to start on his own or work with his father. After getting home Joe called Red Cloud to get a report. The Indian had been trying to reach him for several days. He could not believe that this was the same son he had sent to Joe. He was as different as the night was to the sun. Red Cloud and his wife were happy beyond belief. The boy apologized for his "stupid" actions before he left. They saw he had changed, especially when they went to church on Sunday. Jimmy went with them and they were surprised to see that he knew the service almost by heart. They had asked him about it and he said that there was "a very nice girl" that he went to church with each sunday and then they would walk and talk of the future. Joe told him to send Jimmy back as soon as he could get there.

When he returned, Joe told the young man of the trip they were about to take. He asked that he watch over his wife in the event that he didn't return. He would take care of everything, but nothing was going to happen to the men. CHAPTER 33 The four men reached Anchorage in the spring of 1939. They had to wait for four months before leaving. Both the weather and the birth of the new child came first. Only there was a slight surprise for Randy and Polly. Polly had a fine strapping boy, and then a beautiful little girl three minutes later. They named the boy, Peter, for Joe's cousin, and the girl was nam146146‚146146ƒ146146„146146… 146146†146146‡146146ˆ146146‰146146Š146146‹146146Œ146146146146Ž146146 146146146146‘146146’146146“146146”146146•146146–146146— 146146˜146146™146146š146146›146146œ146146 146146ž146146Ÿ146146146146¡146146¢14614 6£14 6146 ¤14 6146 ¥14 6146 ¦146146§146146¨146146©146146ª146146«14 6146¬146146146146®146146¯146146°146146±146146²146146³146146 ´14 6146 µ146146¶146146·146146¸146146¹146146º146146»14 6146 ¼146146½146146¾146146¿146146À146146Á146146Â146146Ã146146Ä146146Å146146Æ 146146Ç146146È146146É146146Ê146146Ë146146Ì146146Í146146Î146146Ï146146Ð1 46146Ñ146146Ò146146Ó146146Ô146146Õ146146Ö146146×146146Ø146146Ù146146Ú146 146Û146146Ü146146Ý146146Þ146146ß146146à146146á146146â146146ã146146ä1461 46å146146æ146146ç146146è146146é146146146146ë146146ì146146í146146î146146 ï146146ð146146ñ146146ò146146ó146146ô146146õ146146ö146146ø146146ýÿÿÿù146 146ú146146û146146ü146146ý146146þ146146ÿ146146146146146ed Robin for the little bird that had blue eggs. This was sacred to her people. Randy agreed and the whole family gathered at the little Methodist church in town. Red Cloud, Alicia, Ike and Rebecca and White Buffalo's whole family came for the ceremony. They almost filled the church but there was still room for Jimmy and Irma. The townspeople knew that Jimmy and Irma were in love with each other. Now she was to see Jimmy's parents together for the first time. After the baptism of the children Jimmy and Irma went to lunch with Red Cloud and Alicia. The lunch was warm and friendly and Irma was happy to be with such a loving family. Her parents had been dead for many years and she had no one to give her the feelings she saw they gave to their son. Jimmy was given permission to keep his relationship with Irma. This was the tradition of Red Cloud's people. As soon as Polly was able to travel the family went to the home of her father. Family and friends came to the town and filled the rooms of the little hotel in the town. White Buffalo had gone ahead to make sure that everything was in order. The ceremony was sacred to his people and since the babies were to be brought up knowing both of their heritages he wanted the village to part of the children's life. As the Shaman it was his duty to lead the ceremony. When the time came for the ceremony Randy did not know what to

expect. He had seen the dances but this was a new and mystical experience for him. White Buffalo, in all of his robes and feathers stood in the center of a ring of fire. He chanted slowly for many minutes and then started to move in a circle doing the traditional dance of the bird. As he danced, one by one the chiefs of the tribe came into the circle and danced with him. Unexpectedly Red Cloud stripped off his shirt and he too entered the ring with the others. White Buffalo saw this and a fleeting nod showed his approval. In his native tongue White Buffalo called to Little Bird to hand him the boy. He took the child and holding him up to the sky he stopped and chanted in song for several minutes. The others in the ring then passed the child, each holding him up to the sky. It was as if the child was being offered to the heavens. The boy was then passed to his mother and the girl, Robin was handed into the ring. This time it was Dancing Waters who came into the ring and held the little girl to the sky while her husband chanted. Maria, feeling the moment, stepped into the ring and was followed by Alicia and then Rebecca. At this point the wives of the chiefs came into the ring and sang a different chant. Dancing Waters smiled broadly and gave the child back to her husband who once again held the child up. The people became silent. White Buffalo slowly took his knife from his belt, cut his finger and then put the tip of the knife into the little girls hand. He ran his blood into that of the girls and slowly raised the child to the sky. The child made no sound through all of this and in fact looked down at her grandfather and smiled. All of the indians broke out in grins and the singing was loud and happy. The ceremony was over and the festivities began. Polly explained to her husband, telling him that since the girl was the second born her blood was to be united with the family so that she would carry all of the wisdom and traits of her people mixed with his people. She also said that the children had been given proud names. Peter was to be known as Soaring Hawk and Robin as Blue Egg. When Randy laughed at this Polly explained that this was a high honor and meant that Robin would be treated as something almost sacred as the eggs of the robin were sacred to her people. Two days later the party broke up, but not before White Buffalo and Grandfather James went for a ride to the river. Joe was surprised to see his father almost leap into the saddle and gallop away causing the other man to race after him. When they returned in the afternoon Grandfather seemed not to be tired at all, but instead looked around for someone to play horse shoes. The following day, with everyone going their separate ways Joe, Maria and James Karl went back to sit out the winter in Brownsville. It was this time that they used to make plans for the coming trip. It was late in March when the four men arrived in San Francisco. Ike had rooms reserved for them at the "Mark." They spent the first day and a half touring the city and the areas to the south as far as Monterrey. On the third day they met with Ike and getting their luggage together they made their way to the steamer reserved for the length of their stay here and in Alaska. For White Buffalo this was like a dream world. He had never seen so many people. The cable cars fascinated him as did the motion pictures that talked. They took him to see a western and he laughed at how badly the indians acted.

Once at sea White Buffalo continually stood at the rail and smelled the air. He had never seen anything like it and was amazed that there was no land. Joe would bring his father up to spend time with old friend. The sea air did not seem to agree with him and he took to wheezing and coughing. After three days of this the old man stayed down in the large living room. Joe and Randy usually took turns being with him during the long voyage. At night the large wood stove gave off a great heat that made Grandfather James almost doze off while they ate their dinners. Six days after they left San Francisco the ship pulled into the narrow passage that brought them to Juneau. The mountains reached skyward on each side of the craft and looked as if they were going to close and trap the visitors if they made a foolish mistake. It was obvious to the men that this was a different world. What had been a great gold bearing area seemed to be settling into decay. There were some mines still operating, the largest being the A-J mine. Old Joe Juneau, for whom the city was named probably never expected an end to the gold bearing earth but the time had arrived and with it came the exodus of people. After a hearty dinner at the Alaskan Hotel and Bar the four men returned to the ship preparing for next day's final leg to Anchorage. Grandfather James sensed that they were getting close by the end of a week. You could see his spirits rise and the color return to his face. The others were ready to leave the ship as well. There had been a violent storm four days earlier and all of them had gotten sick. Now the sun was out and the coastline came into view off to their right and up ahead. The captain called to them that they would make land the following day. Early the following morning the ship rounded a point that put them between what appeared to be two islands. They headed up a passage way that was called Cook Inlet. For the better part of the day they slowly moved toward Anchorage. The tall forests and the sight of the great birds riding on the currents gave all of their spirits a lift. They knew that they were nearing the end of the first part of their journey. In the afternoon, about three o'clock, when the sun was still holding fairly high up in the sky, they docked at their berth in Anchorage. Since Joe's last visit much had happened. He could see there were many more buildings and a railroad came down to the docks. There were people everywhere and snow was moved off of the streets so that horse drawn trolleys could take passengers around the city. Finding a small hotel off the corners of 4th and I Streets the four men had their baggage brought to the hotel and they went to their rooms to take a long hot bath. Eating at a local bar and grill the men decided on a good night's sleep and an early start in the morning. Randy was to take a course in "mushing." The following day as the four men started out to find the old Kani Kompany store, Joe looked over to the north. The day was bright and clear and in the distance he saw "the mountain." He turned to his father and pointed. The old man looked and the others did also. Grandfather James' eyes brightened. Somehow he seemed to stand straighter and looked younger. He could make out Denali. The old indian also saw the mountain and a startled look came

across his face. "That is more than a mountain." He said. "There is great medicine on that mountain. I must climb and do the sacred rites of our people to the great God who lives above all. Never have I thought that I would see the dreams of our people. It has been spoken at our fires about this mountain but we had always thought that they were stories that were made up. Now I know that you and I are more than just brothers of blood." He said this while turning to James. He slowly moved closer to the old man and held him tightly as he spoke in his native tongue. Grandfather James looked at his friend and smiled as if he understood all that was said. The moment was one that none of them would ever forget. The day was spent in getting the goods from Kani Kompany. The store still had the faded picture of the eagle and the mountain over it's doors. The manager of the store came to meet them after being told of their presence. He could hardly believe that here were three generations of the original family who had founded the business and built the empire of Kani. Nothing was to be spared for their needs. The best of everything. After all he was a Tanana and his family had run the little store for over two hundred years. Word spread quickly about the strangers and soon many of the old time settlers and the leaders of the community were at the store to meet them and to see the living legend that was Grandfather James. They had heard the story of Joe and his ordeal and wondered at this man who they called, "the man who would never die." They were amazed to see that a "foreign" native was with them. It took the better part of the day to complete their shopping and to make arrangements for their trip north. All during the day White Buffalo moved as if in a trance. He said little but kept his eyes always to the north and the mountain. The following day Randy was now ready to learn to become a "musher." He was taken to the little track out west of town out towards the area called Potter's Marsh. When he arrived he found two sets of dogs harnessed to two sleds. The old man that was to teach him looked as if he would not be able to move very far. The first thing the old man did was to show him how to stand at the back of the sled, holding on to one of handles. Then the man yelled at the dogs and the two sleds took off with the men holding on to each sled. Randy was out of breath within seconds and letting go of the handle fell to the ground. Onumusu, the old Athabascan native, slowed his dogs and turned to laugh at the younger man. "So, did you think that I could not teach you because I am so old?" The man chuckled, "Your grandfather was taught by me many, many years ago, and your father as well. If you will do all I tell you, you will be OK. If not you will die and so will your party." By the end of the third day Randy was able to do all that was needed to feed, harness and drive the sled. He found that his stamina was coming back to him as he became used to the cool air. Onumusu told the others that perhaps Randy would be able to do "an honest day's drive." It was decided that Joe would drive the other sled and decided to take a few turns to see if he could still handle the sled and the dogs. After two hours he was pronounced "a returning musher." The next day the dogs and sleds along with the equipment were loaded onto a train and the party headed north to Wasilla.

Some time later the men decided to get off and travel by sled over to an area called the Matanuska Valley. They had heard of this remarkable place where people were farming and growing large vegetables and wheat. This was not the Alaska that had only cold weather and no crops. When they got there they found that the planting had been done and the people of the valley were building more buildings to store crops. The trip had another benefit. This gave them a chance to load the sleds, position the two men on the sleds and work the dogs. It proved to be helpful and after spending three days in the valley, the men headed to Willow. Arriving in Willow they picked up the rest of their food supplies, as well as food for the dogs. This they would have to carry for the entire trip. Boarding the train they again headed for Talkeetna, arriving shortly before dark. Unloading the dogs, sleds and supplies lasted until darkness had set in at the rail siding. After bedding the animals down the four men headed to the restaurant on Main Street. Joe had remembered the town and saw that it had changed little since that last fateful trip. The following morning the small party loaded the sleds and headed cross country to the little town of Trapper Creek. The trip took about an hour and they were in high spirits as they passed through and headed for the few huts that made up Petersville, about five hours away. The men were hungry and fatigue was starting to set in on Joe and Randy. As they pulled into the little stopping place the sun broke through for a moment and the mountain was seen in all it's grandeur. As if it was directed, the four let out a loud gasp at the sight. Nothing could describe the feeling of the men. It was a spiritual experience that seemed to bond them to the mountain. A bond that was to last forever. Stopping for the night at a new road house called "The Forks", they bedded the dogs down for the night and proceeded to eat a hearty dinner and get a good nights rest. The next morning showed the men how quickly the weather could change. As they woke the wind was howling and snow was flying everywhere. The day dawned cold and the men knew that this would not be the day they were to start for the little path that was to take them to the mountain and their next adventure. As day changed into night the weather showed no sign of changing. Randy fed the dogs and hustled back into the little road house, to wait out the storm. It was on the fourth day the snow and wind started to slacken, and by the next day all was quiet. The sky was still leaden and the clouds were heavy with moisture; the air was brisk and the ground covered with several inches of fresh snow. The men knew that the storm had done one thing in their favor. The fresh snow would make things easier on the dogs and the sleds would glide at a much quicker pace. As they loaded the sleds and hooked up the dogs they knew that this would be the last part of the trek to the mountain. Many of the glaciers and peaks that surrounded the great mountain had started to be named for people and native groups. The men were heading for the space between Mt. Hunter and Mt. Foraker known as the

Tokositina Glacier. After a late breakfast the small party headed north towards Denali, and the discoveries of the past and the future. The men covered the twenty odd miles in good time reaching the west base of Mt. Hunter by the late afternoon. Setting up camp, feeding the dogs and checking their supplies carried them into the dark part of the early evening. The men all went into the big tent and planned their meal and the next day's activities. After finishing supper the four men studied the maps that they had brought with them. After planning their ascent they each drifted off to sleep and the dreams that each had brought with them for this adventure. As if by design the sun came up and the weather warmed. The dogs were fed, the men ate and prepared their packs. Each would have light packs for all that they would need would be food, tents and extra clothes. Each would have a large rope that was carried over their pack. A new climbing cleat that fit over their boots and made the climbing much easier than ever before. It was late in the day when they reached the rock ledge where they were to find the cave. There was still no sign of the eagle nor had they even heard the cry of the bird. The day had been ideal and the men were comfortable in the knowledge that they had been able to climb without too much effort and that they had conserved their strength. It was as if the trip was making the two older man young again. White Buffalo and Grandfather James had held their own and did not hold the others back. When they got to the top the two older men dropped their packs and headed to the far side of the ledge as if they had wanted to be alone. It was just what they had wanted. James had told his friend that perhaps there were so many of them the giant bird was afraid to come near them. Grandfather James was right. As soon as the two older men got to the far edge of the ridge the cry of the giant bird was heard. Spiraling toward them came the great bird. It slowly circled them and came down on the rock between the two groups of men. As if it was planned Grandfather James moved slowly to the bird that hopped from one foot to another. As the old man moved closer the bird ruffled his feathers and finally settled down. James smoothed the bird's feathers and quietly called Joe to come next, then Randy. Before they could call White Cloud over the bird suddenly lifted off of the ground and flew to the old indian, settling down next to him. What happened next was something that those who would make it back would never forget. The eagle reached back into it's body and plucked a feather from the underside of it's wing. Slowly the bird turned to the old indian and dropped the feather at his feet. Both the indian and the others knew that this was the ultimate sign of friendship. It was also a sign of great bravery. Slowly the old indian picked up the feather and placed it in his hair. The bird returned to the others and the indian slowly walked over to them and joined the group. It was as if the eagle had known the old indian and wanted the rest to know that he was worthy to be here. As the men started to fix their meal Joe gasped and then pointed to the rock above the far end of the edge. There silhouetted against the darkening sky appeared the shape of a woman. Joe had seen this once before but was still startled.

The others looked in silence as if the shape would disappear with any noise. Suddenly the shape vanished and the eagle let out a loud and different cry and soared off into the night sky. Strangely there was little discussion of what had taken place as the men had their evening meal. They each had seen something remarkable and it had left each with their own thoughts. Sleep was hard to come by for the three men of the family but the old indian was asleep as soon as he lay down. There was a quiet smile on his face and he looked even younger than they had ever seen him. Morning came and with it the anticipation of the climb to the top of Denali. The morning meal finished, the men adjusted their cleats and started up the side of west ridge. The first part of the climb went slowly so that their lungs could become accustomed to the higher altitude. By midday they had passed the 18,000 foot marker. After eating the older men decided that they would go first so that the pace would not be staggered. By nightfall the four men had reached the area below the face. They could feel the wind around them as the darkness settled in. The night seemed to be different than any other they had known. They knew that the climb that was left was the real test. As old as Joe was he could not imagine the two older men making this last part of the trip. Tomorrow they would own the mountain, but at what price. Morning dawned clear and bright. Day came earlier than when they had first come to the territory and lasted longer before the darkness came to signal the night. On this morning they ate quickly and packed their gear for the climb on the face of the great mountain. Joe had hoped that they would reach the area just below the summit before the end of the day. If they did not they would sleep standing up for there was no place where they could stretch out between where they were and the narrow ledge that they could settle down on to rest and sleep before the final assault. The climb was rugged but with the two older men leading the way they reached the final resting place well before night came. With a day well spent and time drawing near, the four men slept the sleep of a job well done but still not finished. After a cold dry breakfast the party, once more, prepared themselves; this time without their packs. It was only several hundred feet to the top. Without the extra equipment they would make the climb much easier. It was shortly before noon when the four men got the breathtaking view from the west peak. They had reached the summit. They had defied the odds for the three older men were, in fact the oldest to have ever climbed the mountain in it's short recorded history. White Buffalo started to chant. He moved with a grace that seemed to belay his years. The chant became louder and the pace more frenzied. The old indian reached into his sacred pouch and threw what appeared to be ashes into the wind, to be scattered and never found again. The chant suddenly changed to a slow sing and the man moved and swayed with the words as if in a trance. This lasted for several minutes and the other three knew that they were witnessing the most sacred of all indian chants and ceremonies that only the Shaman could perform, and then only at a very special time. The chant ended and the indian looked tired and sat down to rest and

gather himself together. Looking off to the north Grandfather James saw a shimmering river in the distance. Something deep inside him told him that he was looking at the river of his heritage. The old man spoke to the rest saying, "Look into the distance where I am pointing. Do you see the river? I think that is where our family first started out. Who knows where they were before then but today I know that this was birthplace of my great ancestor Rangak. That was the place where we began over three hundred years ago. That is where we must go from here. We have conquered a great mountain. Now we must go to the source of our lives. There must be a village in the area that will help us to trace our heritage." The son and grandson listened in silence, but White Cloud now spoke. "It is a wise thing that you do my brother. My people have come from the north as well and we have always wondered if we would ever see the place of our ancestors birth. Much wisdom comes from within when we are in touch with the spirits. They lead us and will guide us to the right answers if we are pure. We are much alike my brother and the great spirit that is the one true spirit guides us both. We must follow." It was settled. The men would camp on the top of the mountain that night, take pictures of the setting sun and of the rising sun the next day. Then they would repack their gear and head back down to their base camp, and then down to where they had started and where the dogs were tied. Joe and Randy went back to where they had camped last night and brought the things back up to the peak. After the picture taking and all of the warm clothes were put on the men sat around the small fire and each with his own thoughts feeling the presence of a spirit stronger than anything they had ever felt before. The second day of the descent brought them back to the rock ledge where they had last seen the eagle. The wind was picking up and the men decided to find the cave and to sleep inside in the room that Joe had spent so much time that winter, so long ago. Finding the little cave they quickly built a fire and ate their evening meal. Then with their small flashlights they studied the inside of the cave. Joe showed them the writings on the wall and White Buffalo looked in amazement. "I know this writing for I have seen it in the caves of my people to the north of our lands. These are messages that tell of the animals that lived here and of the tribe that lived only two suns from here. This is the sacred cave where the spirits bring those special members of the tribe. It is here, according to the writings, that the eagle watches over the chosen family of the tribe when they are brought here for their last rites. The writings say that when each one has been brought something of value is brought with them to keep them from being without, when they return from the upper world." The men fell silent thinking of what they had that would be of value to leave here so that they too would not be without in the next life. The following morning the base camp was packed and the men carried their burdens down to the camp where they had left the dogs. The dogs had come through in fine shape. They were chained far enough from each other so that could have their food without one of the others taking it from them. The were still close enough together that wolves could not get to them. Morning came and with it came another bright and beautiful day. The sleds and the dogs were readied for the return trip to Petersville.

The ground had stayed cold and the snow was now packed and more like ice. This would make the going easier. They were leaving earlier and Randy thought they would be able to get to Trappers Creek that day. As they started to push off they once more heard the cry of the eagle and looking up toward the rock on the mountain they saw two large eagles soaring around the rock and swooping down toward them. Looking up at the rock again there was a loud gasp and there clearly outlined against the sky was the shape of a woman. The eagles came to them and just as they looked like they were about to land they rose once more into the sky screaming. Dropped at their feet were four small rocks. Each one appeared to have been scratched by the beak of the eagle. A gift from one who had brought them there. They thought of the great spirit. Looking up to the eagles they saw them soar over the now vacant rock. Now they too were leaving this place and wondering if any of them would ever return. For two of them they knew that if the spirit had it's way they would be back. It was past nightfall when the little party reached Trappers Creek. It was here they stayed for the next few days. On the second day while Joe and Randy were eating breakfast and talking business the two older men went to the trading post and asked about the towns and villages to the north. When James Karl asked the name of the great river to the north he was told that it was called the Tanana River. His eyes lit up and he tried to find out more about the region but was told that the only person who would know was an old native called Oonooska. Oonooska was about ninety years old and had been born near the area and had lived around here all of his life. Oonooska was not hard to find and the next day the four men set out for the little cabin near the train stop. As they waited for someone to answer their knock, Grandfather James became thoughtful and seemed to be looking off into the distance, as if he could see what was there. Slowly the door opened and a small, frail woman appeared. In almost a whisper she asked what was it they wanted. Randy stepped forward and said, "We are looking for the man called Oonooska. My father and my grandfather and my father-in-law are here to find out about our past and we were told that he has lived in these parts his whole life. We want to ask him some questions. We come from the "lower forty-eight" and it is important to my grandfather." The old lady turned and went into the house, motioning them to follow. The place was only two rooms and were small by anyone's standard. One room was the living room, dining room and kitchen. The other was the bedroom. They could see an old man lying on the bed. The old woman went into the bedroom and spoke softly to the old man on the bed. In a moment he was up, and moving surprisingly fast joined them in the front room. "I knew that you would come it was told to me in the dream world. Sit by the table and tell me what is it you want of me." the old man said in broken english. Grandfather James said, "My family has been traced back in the years to this part of your land, which is ours also. I am the son of Rangak, the son of Karlek whose father was named Kolosh who was a son of one of ours who was also called Karlek. His father was Natchusek and he was the son of an older Rangak. We do not know who was his father, but he also must have come from the north. You are older than I and may still have some memories of where we came from. I felt a

strange feeling when we were on top of the mountain called Denali. Is there a town that bears the name of our ancestors who were called Tanana?" The old man was quiet and thought for a few minutes. The rest finally stood and prepared to leave when they were stopped by a voice suddenly stronger and more vibrant. "You have been to the top of the mountain and that is powerful medicine. Only a few have ever done it and no one has ever done it more than once." Grandfather James smiled and said to the old man, "Both my son here, pointing to Joe, and myself have just come down from our second trip to the top of Denali." Oonooska sat quietly looking at the two men. "What you ask I will tell. There is a village toward the setting sun. It is three days from the village of Nenana. It is very hard to get to because you must cross the river where it joins the great Yukon River. You will have to have a boat to cross for the water is deep and fast. The ground is starting to get soft now and the snow will not cushion the feet of your dogs. It will be better if you walk in to find the village. The walk will take you five or six days from when you leave Nenana. You must walk on the south side of the Tanana River. When you see the village of Tanana go past it two hours and maybe a boat will pick you up. If the people of the village see you maybe you can get them to bring you across. I have heard the stories of your family and I once was in the big village of Anchorage I bought a new coat in the store with the painting of the mountain and the eagle. The coat is still here." With that the old man went to the bedroom and brought back a heavy coat that was starting to show it's age. "When we return to Anchorage I will send you a new coat and one for your wife, and I will also send other things that you can use," said grandfather James. The following day the party made the decision to take the train to Nenana. Randy found out that the train would come through in two days. They needed the time to gather what they could take with them and add to their supplies. The two older men carried lighter rucksacks filled with clothes and some food. Joe and Randy carried most of the food and supplies they would need. They took two of the dogs with them, each pulling an indian sled of cross poles that would carry the rest of the food that they might need. They knew that a wrong turn could lead them astray, and without food they would be in trouble. There was still some snow on the sides of trees and rocks. The run off would fill their canteens. The train came and the four men and the dogs boarded and headed for Nenana and then to the place where it all began, or so they thought. CHAPTER 34 The train stopped at the small station that was called the Alaska Railroad Depot. The area around the station was booming for this was a construction site for the railroad. They were soon told that this is the place where President Harding drove the golden spike for the junction of the railway to Fairbanks. Nenana is on the Tanana river and the men soon found out that there were tugs and barges that could carry them to the town of Tanana in just one day. This was the best news they could get for they all had

started to get homesick; all but Grandfather James. His step got firmer and he seemed to be stronger than he had been in years. The river had a good current, but they saw that it was muddy and they were sure that they would have caught no fish to supplement their food, as they had planned. Nenana means "a good place to camp between the rivers." It's name had been changed not too long ago from Tortella, a white man's interpretation of the Athabascan word, Toghotthele. The men had unloaded their dogs and their packs and headed to the Bed and Maybe Breakfast for a nights lodging. The night had again turned cooler and the stars would not be out this night. Getting their rooms and taking care of the dogs the four men set out to eat a hearty meal. All of their appetites had increased since they had come to this northern land. From dinner to bed, for each was tired and eager to make the final leg of their journey to the town of great mystique. The next day dawned and they knew that there would be no trip this day. The snow and the wind would not let any barge move on the ice choked river. The bad weather lasted for a week and they only ventured out to eat and feed the dogs. The day came when the wind and the snow stopped and the river settled back into it's running pattern. The party loaded themselves and their dogs and goods onto one of the barges that was due to stop at the village called Tanana. There were three other people who were also getting off at the village. One was a missionary and the other two were trappers that lived in the village and had taken their furs to Anchorage to sell. They arrived in the little village in about six hours. Word had come to the people that there were four strange men who were on there way. It had been rumored that they were descendants of the first villagers. When the barge docked all of the people turned out to see who were these people who had come to see where their ancestors were born. When the small party walked onto the docks with their dogs and packs they looked around and saw that there was no place that they were going to be able to stay. They decided to go out to the edge of town and put up their tents. As they walked the villagers followed at a distance. It did not take long for them to find a spot where there was space to put up their tents and room to put the dogs out almost as guards. Grandfather James went to the crowd of men who were watching them and asked if there was anyone who spoke English. One boy came forward. He was about nineteen or twenty years old and taller than the rest of the villagers. The boy said, "I have gone to the mission school and I can speak your language. Is there any one of you who can speak our language?" Grandfather James laughed and said, "Why would I need you to speak my language if we could speak yours?" The boy turned to the rest of the men and told them what the old man had said. The villagers chuckled to themselves. They knew that these were the kind of people who would want information but would not try and take advantage. After the four had set up their tent and staked down the dogs,

fed them and themselves they sat around a campfire and discussed what they would try to find out from the villagers. White Buffalo said, "The people of the village look much like my people. The boy is built much like the warriors that you show in your movies. He is smart and it looked as if the men in the village treat him as an equal. We should first try and talk with him. He will tell us much if he knows the past history of your people." Grandfather James was tired but he also had some ideas that needed to be spoken about before they could talk with the elders of the tribe that lived here. "What we want to find out the boy will not know but there are others here who are as old as I am and they will have memories of the past. Between them we may be able to find if there are any of our descendants still living here. If there are none maybe they will know where we can find some of our people. There must be some clues." Joe could see that his father was starting to weaken and that they would have to go back soon so that he could get to the warmer climate of Texas. "There will be something here that will tell us something. I can feel it. It is a strange feeling, different than anything I have ever felt before. The closest thing to it was when I saw the girl on the mountain for the first time. Don't ask me how or why; it's just there. We were brought here for a reason. Everything has pointed to this trip. The older have been younger in body and spirit from the time we planned this trip until we came to this village. There is a force that is much more powerful than any we know that is guiding us and we must follow that force." Randy had been quiet through all of the discussion, but now he spoke. "Have you noticed that no one from the village has come over here to see what we are doing or how we are set up or what they can offer us. It is not natural for someone not to be curious by now. There is an area across the river where it is shallow that I want to see tomorrow. There is a well worn path into the trees and it may have something to do with why no one has come here. We are in line with the path and people must come through here to get there. Tomorrow people will come, I just know it." The four men talked some more but the conversation was about Denali and the feelings that each had when they had reached the top. Randy was excited. Joe was prayerful, James was misty eyed but also prayerful; but the most interesting was White Buffalo who was awestruck, not by the beauty but by the spirituality on the top of this mountain. As a Shaman he was used to prayers to the spirits who were always high above them. Now for the first time in his life he felt that he was in with the spirits. It was as if he could talk with the sun god, the god of light. He was with the eagle. It had given him a feather and had led him to the highest place in the world. He had danced the dance of gratitude to the great spirit who looked at the world and gave it life. He had lived his life in a good way and now he had been rewarded. When he got home he would make another a Shaman and he would take his place with the gods. The next day the sun was almost at the top of the light when Randy went across the river. As he started over the villagers ran to the edge to see what he was doing. There was a great deal of talking and gesturing at him and at the other

side. The young man who they had spoken to the day before came over to their camp and asked them where he was going and what he was going to do. Grandfather James said, "My grandson is going to see what is on the other side we have always been a curious family. I see that your people seem to be concerned. Is there something we need to know. Is my grandson in danger?" The boy said, "It is the story of my people that one day when the land was young, a member of our tribe went across the river and when he came back the great eagle came back with him. The eagle landed and walked over to him and the boy became a leader. He travelled away from the village but always came back each year. He was the grandson of the son of the man who founded our village. It was hundreds of years ago and the eagle has never come back. It is said by our people that if the eagle ever comes back the story of our people will come back with it. We will find a new leader and he will be the friend of the eagle." The three men sat in silence and looked at the boy. He did not know them and what they had each seen. They did not tell anyone of their individual experiences with the eagle. Grandfather James and Joe had more than one experience and the others had each had one with White Buffalo's being the most significant. They would say nothing to the boy or to the villagers. This was something that they had to tell Randy about. That afternoon Randy returned and they told him of the boy's story. Randy said nothing but smiled. He had been on the other side for some time and was some distance from the campsite when he heard the rushing of wings and a large eagle flew over him several times and then finally disappeared. Perhaps the eagle was saying that one of the others would have to cross the stream and the eagle would find the true leader. That night the leader of the village came with the young man and asked them if they would like to come and sit in the council lodge with the rest of the men. The people of the village wanted to know more about these people who came and were living with them. The four men went with them to the council fire. For White Buffalo this was much like the days of his youth and the days of his father. He had heard many stories from his father about the days when there were still buffalo to hunt. Now he would sit in the hut of the leaders as one of them for they were guests of the village elders. There was much they could learn from each other. As the men walked toward the hut White Buffalo pulled Grandfather James back and as they walked together he said, "This is much like the way our people do things. It would be good to find out much from them tonight and tell them some about us. In this way they will want us to come back each night until they know all about each of us; and we know the history of their people." The fire in the large wooden and bark room seemed to rush to the center of the ceiling and out as if to say, "I need to go to the sky to keep it warm." The men all sat for minutes looking at the curling wisps of smoke as they wound their way to the heavens. Then suddenly one of the men spoke in what sounded like rough words. The rest of the men in the hut were not smiling. Suddenly the boy who spoke for them stood and looked at the Americans. He spoke at great length in what they could only guess was a debate about how to handle the situation. Just as they wanted to learn more about their hosts so to did the natives want to learn more about their

"guests." The night was surprisingly warm and the men seemed to loosen up as they asked the questions of the newcomers. Finally Grandfather James with a large yawn told the young man to give his apologies but he was going to sleep. All of them laughed for each was waiting for someone else to rise so that no one would feel that they were breaking up the party. As they left it was with the assurance that they would get together the next night. The day dawned bright and clear. In front of them lay the river and beyond the forests and what appeared to be a gentle rise. Behind them and to the sides there were mountains. On this day it was so clear that they could see "their" mountain. They set about cleaning up the camp and then decided how much longer they would stay and what they would do while they were here. They had found out the history of the village from what the villagers could remember. Some of what they had talked about was not new to Grandfather James. He had heard some their last remarks from his grandfather and his father as well. What were the missing pieces and how do they get them to fall together? All of them were now sure that they were sent to this place for a very special reason. White Buffalo was making strange chants and rolled his eyes frequently. Grandfather James prowled the riverbank as if looking for the clue to what they were after. Joe and Randy each went off in different directions looking for something that would bring sense to this part of their trip. They had already done things that no one else their ages had ever attempted, let alone completed. What then was still left? On the fourth day the village boy came to them and said that the villagers would have a someone special in the village that night who would be able to answer many of their questions. Grandfather James turned to the young man and asked him his name. "They call me `the smart one' but my name is Rangak." There was a loud gasp and grandfather James clutched at his heart. His color was ashen and they could see his breathing was labored. Quickly they laid him on the ground and put cold water on his face and wrists. Slowly the color returned and the breathing became lass labored. In a few minutes he was able to sit up. By then most of the village had come to see what had happened. Grandfather James turned to the boy and said, "How did you get that name? The boy replied, "It is a name that has been passed down in our history. It was the name of one of my ancestors. My grandfather told me that there had only been three others with that name and that they all were famous. " Grandfather James smiled and his eyes were as clear as they had ever been. "Rangak, we are of the same tribe. One of my ancestors was named Rangak. He was the son of one of the members of your village whose name was Karlek. We have traced our family back that far and now you are part of the puzzle that we are here to unwind. This must be why we have been sent here by God." Rangak translated all of the to the villagers who suddenly started to murmur and then chant. White Buffalo heard the chant and joined in the melody of the words and soon was swaying with the men to the beat of the chant. A great feast was held that night for they were to have a visitor from out of the past. Perhaps one who would be able to add more links to the chain of their lives. There were great quantities of a thick soup and a delicious meat

that was cooked to perfection. They were told that this was the deer that ran in their forests. White cloud asked how they hunted the animal and they laughed and said, "With our bows and spears. Is there another way?" A pudding-like substance was for dessert. Everything was wonderful and they were full. A sudden hush came over all of the people. Seated at the far end of the feast was a small person who the four had thought was an older women from the village. There were so many that looked alike that it was hard to tell one from another. Slowly the frail person rose and they could see that it was a man. He was older than Grandfather James, or so it seemed. He walked over to the four men and sat next to them. It was only a few seconds, but it seemed as if was several minutes, before the man spoke. "I am glad that Uuloonbog asked me to come tonight. I have heard that you are seeking the trail of your ancestors. One of you looks like we do but the rest of you seem to be different. More like the white man who comes to steal our meat and our skins." For several minutes the old one went on about how the white man had always taken from the indian, especially from the Tananas. He told of the great freeze when the white man used the dogs to carry medicines to the villages and then killed many animals for their skins on their way back home. The rest of the villagers made rumbling sounds when the old one spoke of these events. "Which of you thinks you are from a family of this village?" the old man asked, and before they could answer he continued to speak. "I have lived for over ninety years. I have lived at the other side of the great mountains to the east, closer to the great waters of the sea. My people talk of the man who left our lands to come to this part of the land. The old people have passed the story of how this man came to the village because of his brother who lived with the animals and yet became the head of our village. I first heard the story from my father's father's father. He told us that he had heard the story from old people who had heard it from others in the village. The man who left us came over the mountain pass that my people use to come here now. He was a good man and taught our people how to survive against the bear and the other animals. He taught us how to make clothes of the skins and how to cover the walls of our huts with skins to keep us dry. He was a very wise man, and very brave. He was also very sad for the story tellers say that he had lost a wife in a storm and that is why he came our way." The four men were spellbound with the tale but they did not understand why this man had come to tell them this story. Joe stood up and stretched. "Old man this is truly a great story but why do you find that you have to tell us this story? What is your name, old man? "My name is Toomgak and I am named after the other brother who lived with the animals. The one who came through the pass and came upon this land was called Rangak!" There were tears in the eyes of Grandfather James and in White Buffalo's as well. Both men knew that they were standing at the beginning of time, as far as each was concerned. For White Buffalo, he was hearing the story as if it was one of his ancestors who had come down from the great plains and mountains of the North. For the others it was as if they had found something that they could not believe. Grandfather James was the first to speak. "I have

always wondered where our people began. Who they were and who they became. My life started in the north of the States, but it was also in a place called "Yukon." It seems as if our people have lived throughout this land and yet we only know of what has become of the last few before us. I am old and tired. My strength for this trip has come from the Almighty. He has guided us to this place to fulfill our destiny. To unite our families once more. Rangak, for us you are the newest part of our family, and you Toomgak are the oldest. We bring together centuries of knowledge that must be written down and preserved. This is your job Randall. You are the one with the most education and it is you who must find and record all of the details of our history." Randy was silent but he knew that this was the way that it had to be; he was the only one who could do it. He nodded to his grandfather and then said, "This has been a long day and I am tired. Let's go to sleep and tomorrow I will start to write what Toomgak and Rangak tell me. There are others here who will also be able to give some information. We will have to work fast for we must be heading back so I can see Robin and Peter take their first steps." It was agreed that they would get an early start the next day. They all drifted off into a sleep that was filled with dreams of past adventures, and perhaps new ones. . Morning came and with it the start of Randy's work. He was enjoying it for he was learning more and more about his family each day. The work was hard for Rangak had to interpret almost everything for him, but he was also learning the language and could, in fact, say a few sentences now and then to speed up the work. During this time Toomgak and White Buffalo spent much time together. White Buffalo had not figured out how the old man had learned English, since he came from the other side of the mountain range where it seems there was nothing else but the ocean. When he asked the Toomgak he was told that there were many villages over there including a large one that was called Nome. Missionaries would meet with the people and they would teach them the words. He had studied for many years. Joe and his father were busy trying to find out all that they could from Rangak, when he was not with Randy. Grandfather James told his son, "This may be the last time any of us shall ever see our people. We must learn all we can before it is time to go." The son agreed, but he had a sinking feeling in his stomach that something was going to happen and happen very soon. After more than a week of hard work Randy had all but finished his efforts with the boy and was ready to question Toomgak. The days were now with them almost all of the time. The sun never seemed to set for more than a couple of minutes. There was a frantic pace now as they all knew that they would have to leave soon. One evening as the sun was moving to the west just behind the mountains and the trees a great cry pierced the air. Everyone in the village stopped and looked, with fright, to the sky. Nothing was to be seen, but a few minutes later the sound was heard again. The villagers all huddled together, the look of fear etched on their faces. It was a sound they had never heard before and they did not know what was going to happen. Randy, Joe and Grandfather James were all nearby when they heard the first cry. They knew that it was the cry of the eagle. Surely the

villagers had heard and seen eagles before. Randy went over to Rangak and asked him if they had ever seen the great bird they called "eagle?" The boy said that they had seen a large bird high up in the sky, usually in the time when the sun was out for only a few hours early in the year. The bird was so high that they had never seen it close by and had never heard it at all. The three men decided that they would not say anything to the rest of the village until they had talked with White Buffalo. It proved to be a wise thought for the next day was to be never forgotten. That night White Buffalo and Toomgak came back to the village. They had been on the other side of the river and been walking through the forest when they too heard the cry of the giant bird. Toomgak smiled and said to his new friend, "I think that the giant bird has come back to the village. Most of the people there have never seen the bird up close. In fact most of the villagers think that it is only a story that is passed down to the young so that a leader will be chosen to lead them for some strange reason. I do not know if this is a fact but in all of the times that I have come across the great mountains I have seen the eagle only at the first part of the journey, but when I reach the part of the mountain that leads down to this river the eagle disappears. There is something different here than anywhere else. White Buffalo listened to the old man and then said, "There is more to this than we know. There is a legend of my people that says when the bird flies so high that it cannot be heard it is talking to the gods. We are not able to hear what they talk about but they will send a message for us to understand." The two men headed back to the village and each walked with his thoughts; always turning and looking to the sky. The next day Randy told the others that he was though and they could prepare to leave. They had been here at the village for the better part of a month and now was the time to head back. It would still be almost a month before each got home. The villagers were sad to see that the four men were getting ready to leave. Randy made Rangak promise to write each month to tell him what was happening in the village. He would pass it on to the others. Dusk was now earlier and by eleven o'clock it was almost dark. Campfires were started earlier and the weather was starting to change. They had told the villagers that they would be leaving on the next boat. The people were saddened for they had become friends with the four men. Toomgak looked at White Buffalo and said, "Be aware that you are someone who is special to the gods." About five in the afternoon it happened. The cry of the bird was heard and the four men moved to the area just below the river and along a flat space that led to the village. Suddenly with a great swoop the bird flew over the heads of the startled villagers. Many of them fell to the ground and chanted messages to the spirits. The bird circled the village three times and then slowly lowered to the ground in the cleared area where the four men were standing. The villagers stood as if rooted to the ground. They were silent. The stories of the past were now the story of the present. The eagle turned to look at the four men. Randy started to move toward the bird, but it lifted off the ground and settled further away from them. In turn Grandfather James and the Joe did the same. The bird

moved further away. It was now White Buffalo's turn. He turned to the bird and chanting in his native tongue he moved toward the huge bird. The eagle ruffled his feathers and moved from one leg to another but did not move away. Slowly White Buffalo went to the bird and standing to the side of it smoothed the feathers on it's head. The villagers gasped and suddenly started talking between themselves. The eagle stood there while the old indian talked to the bird. After a short time the eagle rose and climbing high it suddenly dove toward the ground and White Buffalo. Quickly the bird came down and when it was only a few feet from the indian it changed it's course and landed at his feet. In the eyes of the villagers the old prophecy had been fulfilled. The eagle had picked the one to lead them. White Buffalo was aware of what had happened; and to him this was the will of the great spirit. It was a command and it must be obeyed. He knew that he would not be going back to his family. This was his destiny. He was the one that had been picked to lead these people. He had done this back on the great plains, and now in his old age he would do it again here in the north. Back to where his people had began.

CHAPTER 35 It was a warm autumn day in 1943. Randy was in the South Pacific. His unit was in a place called Guadalcanal. Polly had put up a big map of the world and she and the two children tried to find where their daddy was. The Marines had just come there from Australia where they had been training for some time. Randy had written about the people and the land down under. He told them about how the families of the "Aussie" soldiers would take them in for meals when they were on pass. Being a Marine made him a special person. Everyone had heard about the battles and how the marines had fought against the much larger forces of the Japanese. Most of the time Randy was on patrol, still looking for outposts of the enemy that had not surrendered. There had been many men killed by the hidden forces that had vowed not to surrender.

When Randy came off duty that night he had a surprise waiting for him. Polly had made a home movie of the family. He saw the picture of his grandfather who now was confined to a wheelchair and barely able to talk. His father had also aged but seemed to be in good spirits. Best of all Polly and the children looked great. It was the first time he had been able to see what they had looked like in over a year. They were both now almost five and each was a delight to watch as they tried to do cartwheels and tumbles. Robin had dark hair, long legs and a great smile. She also seemed, from her antics to have a lively manner. Peter was blonde and had dark skin. He was a quiet child and had never cried very much as a baby. He walked by the time he was ten months old and started to read words when he was three. The family knew that this was a special boy and that he was destined for some greatness. He was a Cain and that counted for something. After watching the movies several times Randy went to his tent and wrote his wife and children. "My dear family; I have just finished watching the home movies that you sent me. It was great seeing all of you. Dad you look great! Grandpa it was great seeing you again. I can't wait to see you when I get back. I have something for you from Japan. Polly, what can I say. You have done a great job in raising our children. You can see in them your looks and strength. Robin you are my favorite little girl in the whole world and Peter you have the looks of a Cain. You children need to sit down with great-grandfather and have him tell you the story of our people You should know where you came from. You need to hear from your mother about her family and the great thing that your grandfather, White Buffalo, did for everyone. He was a great man. You share his blood just as you share mine. I wish I could be with you when you hear these things but I am far away in a place that you will read and hear about someday. I am here so that you and all the children will be safe at home in the years to come. There are many men here who have children back home and they want to be with them just as I want to be with you. First I have a job to do before I can come home. When we finish we will all come home to all of our wives and children and we know that we will not have to leave you again.

There are bad people in this world and they have tried to take away all that we love from us. Many of my friends are dead so that you will always be safe and free. I guess more will also die but these are the sacrifices that have to be made for our families. Wars are bad in every way but they are real bad for those who have to be away from the ones we love. I think of all of you all of the time. Polly your picture is next to my heart. If anything should happen to me know that I love you. I am not a hero but I have a job to do and I am not afraid. Tell grandfather and my father that the spirit of the eagle is with me and that I can always see the mountain in my thoughts. Last night I had a dream about the mountain and it was clear as if we were there. The eagle was circling the ledge and the woman with the sunlight in her hair was there. I could not see her face. I heard the cry of the eagle and then I woke up. Well I have to go to work now. Our platoon is going out to check out the last section before we leave this place and go back to a rest area. When we get where we are going I will write you again. I love you all, Randy It sounds strange, Randy said to himself, Hill 341. He thought, thank goodness this is the last day on this miserable piece of rock. The hill had a gentle slope upwards to a knob that was pocked from const7777777777777ant shelling in past weeks. They could not see any sign of life and Randy was beginning to think that they had made it. As they reached the top the platoon was told to spread out in twos and comb all of the shell holes. If they came across a bunker or cave they were to throw a grenade into it before they looked to see if there was anyone there. They were all aware of the fact that the enemy was fanatical and many would never surrender. They had seen the mutilated bodies of other marines who had tried to coax the other soldiers out and to give up. Randy and Jeff, his foxhole buddy started to work to the left side of the ridge, across the top. They came to a small bunker and as Jeff started to pull the pin on a grenade they heard a cat in the bunker. As Jeff looked in a burst of machine gun fire hit him in the face and chest. As he fell back there was nothing but his dog tags to identify the man who had been an all-

american baseball player with a professional contract signed and waiting for him back home. Quickly Randy pulled the pin of a grenade and threw it into the opening. The blast did it's work, but too late. Randy lifted the dead marine and carried him down the hill. It was the end of the battle of Guadalcanal. On May 27th Gen. Douglas MacArthur announced the strategic end of the New Guinea campaign. For many of the Soldiers and Marines it was the end of one battle and the wait for the next one. The Marines did not have to wait long. On the morning of June 5th the 2nd Marine Division along with the 4th Marines were once more loaded onto boats, bound for another island. They still didn't know the name of the place that they were going, and for many of them it was the same old story. Wait for a letter from the family or girl friend to find where they were and where they were going next. It was joke that the brass wouldn't tell them but the war correspondents could figure it out and send the information home almost before they landed. Along with the Marines, the 27th Division of the Army was to land with them at one of the other beaches on the island that they now found out was called Siapan, in a group of islands called the Marianas. Unknown to the high echelon commanding the operation, the Japanese had built a garrison of approximately 32,000 men. When command found this out they proceeded to shell the island beaches and hills with over 2400 16 inch shells, the Navy's biggest. With strong support from the air over 20,000 young Americans men and boys stormed the beaches on that first day. This was by far, the largest concentration of troops put ashore in any Pacific amphibious operation. The date was June 15th. The Japanese resisted fiercely and Randy's unit found themselves under constant attack. The Marines had dug in just below the crest of sand that marked the place where the beach and the trees started to come together. The shelling had done it's job for the most part and the trees were almost naked with palms leaves scattered everywhere. Here and there a tree stood untouched by the battle. It was here that the Japanes 166166166166166166166166166166166166166166166166 166166 166166 166166

167167 167167

16816 8¤16 816816 816816 816816 816816 8168 µ168168§168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168-168168168168 168168!168168"168168#168168$168168%168168&168168'168168(168168) 168168*168168+168168,168168-168168. 168168 /16 8168 0168168116816821681683168168416816851681686168168716816881681689168168: 168168; 168168 <168168=168168>168168?16 8168 @168168A168168B168168C168168D168168E168168F168168G168168H168168I168168J 168168K168168L168168M168168N168168O168168P168168Q168168R168168S168168T1 68168U168168V168168W168168X168168Y168168Z168168[168168\168168] 168168 ^168168_168168`168168a168168b168168c168168d168168e168168f168168g168168h 168168i168168j168168k168168m168168ýÿÿÿn168168o168168p168168q168168r1681 68s168168t168168u168168v168168w168168x168168y168168z168168{168168| 168168}168168~168168168168€168168e had their snipers, firing down on the troops as they lay in the sand. Quickly flame throwers were brought up to the front lines and the brave Marines who handled these torches moved into the open to set fire to the trees and their occupants. It was a matter of an hour or two and the front line of trees were secured. Slowly the Marines moved forward and found places to dig in for the night. Randy heard it first. It sounded like a low moan coming from somewhere to his left. He had heard of the tricks that the enemy played, sounding like a wounded GI; but this did not sound like any trick. After a few minutes the sound faded and Randy fell asleep in his foxhole. He often wondered why they called it a foxhole, but no one seemed to have an answer. The next day dawned clear and bright with the sweltering heat a factor even in the early morning. Randy's company was to move forward to the ridge about a mile to their left and probably the same distance to their front. As he moved he thought about the cries from the night before and he kept a watchful eye out for a wounded man. They had been moving for about two hours when they came upon an empty pillbox, blasted open from the naval gunfire. It was here that Randy saw what could happen to men when hit with one of the world's largest weapons of destruction. Skin, body parts and bones were everywhere. Nobody seemed to be in one piece. By noon the company had reached the bottom of the ridge. The men deployed and started the move to the top. They wondered at the lack of resistance encountered so far. Could it be that the enemy was withdrawing to the other side of the island. If so the 27th Division would take care of them. Still they were not sure of what was happening as they slowly moved forward.

As the men dug in at a point below the crest they heard sounds from the other side of the hill. Easing forward three of the men, including Randy, moved to the top and looked over to the other side. Down at the bottom of the ridge, about forty yards from their tents were a group of men sitting around a camp area eating and laughing. In the middle of their circle was a young girl who seemed terrified. As the men finished their food the girl would pick up their dishes and scurry to wash them and return to the men. As she did each of the men tried to grab her. A sickness came over Randy as he realized what was happening. Slowly he crawled back to the far side of the crest. It was late in the afternoon when the mortar attack started. The shells were landing on the far side of the crest and the men seemed to relax. Suddenly there was whistling sound and then a dull "crump." When the smoke and dust cleared Randy was lying several yards from where he was before the shelling began. Blood was coming from his nose and from a large wound in his thigh. Slowly the mortars crept down the ridge causing widespread fear and some panic. After about an hour of the constant shelling the enemy came over the top of the ridge. Their fire was heavy and soon the tired marines were starting to retreat down the hill. Because of the withering fire all of the dead were left in the hope that they could recover them the next day. It was dark when Randy became conscious that he was still alive and could think. He heard the enemy talking around him. His eyes focused on several of the soldiers moving among the dead, poking them with their bayonets. He silently moved his good right arm down to his side and pulled it close to his body. Suddenly a blinding pain shot through The arm as he was jabbed by one of the soldiers. He blacked out again. When he came to he was aware of the dull pain in his right arm. His left side was numb. He slowly opened his eyes and tried to look around. Seeing nothing he lifted his head cautiously and looked at the area. Down below him he could see shadowy forms. He heard guttural commands and men scurrying around. Slowly he moved to an abandoned machine gun with the gunner still draped over the loading breech. He tried to use his left arm to pull the man off but was too weak to move him very much. After what seemed hours the man was off and Randy saw that the gun was loaded and in the firing position. Swiveling the gun around he picked out the largest group of men and started to fire. Men were screaming and falling in heaps. The soldiers turned and started to fire at him. At that time the marines started to fire at the enemy soldiers, who by now thought they were caught in a cross fire. Randy pried open the breech and reloaded the machine gun and continued to fire at the enemy. Slowly they retreated away from the area around Randy. Suddenly a command was yelled and a large body of men started to charge Randy's position. As they dropped one after another their cries of "Banzai" tailed off. In a matter of seconds the charge was over and the cries of dying men gave testimony to his accurate fire; but not before he was hit several more times by enemy fire. Randy's company charged back up the hill and soon overran the enemy. Blackie, the company medic rushed to the hero of the moment and started to treat the wounds. In minutes he was taken off the hill and

to an aid station where a team of doctors worked feverishly to save Randy. He had lost too much blood and the wounds were too many. The young marine, husband, father and hero died that day, June 19th, 1944. CHAPTER 36 The Oklahoma sun beat down on the sweating young man. He was stripped to the waist. His hands had long since calloused from working in the oil fields that were called Cain Oil and mining. His mother and his sister had showed their pride in him for starting at an early age. He had worked on school holidays and during the summers, starting at the bottom and learning all of the skills necessary to master the art of bringing in a well. Peter Cain was six feet tall and was well built, with blonde hair and dark eyes. His skin was dark and the sun gave it a bronze look much like his mother's people. Robin was dark and had her fathers laugh and his ready smile. She was every bit the tomboy and could run faster than most of the boys her age. When she graduated high school she had already decided to be a teacher. She had heard of her great aunt who had done such wonderful work with the schools in Idaho. Robin knew the plight of the indians of the area and the lack of schooling. She and her mother decided that if she were to get her teaching certificate she could go to the indians and start a school. The family would help pay for the books and she would be their first teacher. Polly had long since quit mourning the death of her husband Randy. She had a family to raise, as well as Randy's father and grandfather. For the past fourteen years she had seen to it that the two young people never forgot who their father was and what he had done. A greatful nation had given him their highest award and the blue ribbon with the medal on the end was placed in a framed case and hung in the front hall of the house so that all who came in would know of the brave marine whose home it was. The year was 1957. The Korean War was over. A new way of entertainment was around. It was called television. Cars were big and fast. Movies were better than ever. Life was good for the little family. Grandfather James had died shortly after Randy. Joe died last year and now Polly's family had only each other, and the few close friends that they had made during the hard times after the death of Randy. Mary Jane Thatcher was quite a handful. In high school she was head cheerleader, captain of the field hockey team and beautiful. She teased the boys and laughed with the girls. An excellent swimmer she often challenged the boys to races, which she usually won. Peter was the one she challenged the most. He was a year older and one of the best athletes in the school. He could have gone to "State" on a football scholarship, but decided to devote himself to the family business. At least one of the family businesses. As he became older he found out that the family had many interests and it was his choice as to what he would do with his life. He was made aware of all of the principles the family followed. He had been told of Denali by his grandfather from the time he was small until the old man had died last fall. He had made the promise of going to the mountain when the time came. It had been told to him that he

would know when that time was. Peter liked girls and Mary Jane was the one he liked the most. It was not just her looks but also the way she was around him. She let him be a man, and she gave him all of her attention when they were together. Mary Jane was graduating this year and she asked Peter to take her to the prom. When they showed up at the dance everyone knew that they were made for each other. The young couple knew it as well and that night Peter asked her to go "steady," with him. She sighed, moved close to him in the car and said, "yes." A warm feeling came over him. Work in the mines and the oil fields was hard. Peter decided that he would learn the operation of both when he was fairly young. Now that he had gotten through the oil part he headed to the mines. Mary Jane went away to college and Peter went to work in the family mining interests in Arizona. He knew that the mines were started by a man from San Francisco almost a century ago. His family had bought the land and had a Mr. Ashton run it until he died. The man was running them for his great-great-great grandfather. The man never had children and when he died the mine foreman took over the running of the properties for the family. He had grown rich for he received regular pay and ten per cent of the profits. It was a Cain family tradition to reward those who rewarded the family with their labor, and their loyalty. The man was Leonard Poston. His grandson, Mark who had no family of his own was now in charge. When Peter arrived at the copper mines northeast of Mesa, Arizona, the hot summer sun of June was already doing its work. Peter felt like a limp dish rag as he got off the bus. It was only ten in the morning but the temperature was hovering near one hundred degrees. Mark chuckled to himself as the young man got off the bus. He thought to himself, "another softy from the owners come to try and be a man. Others had come from different parts of the family but none had made it past a week in the summer." He gave this young man three days. Peter saw a man striding toward him with a smile on his face. "Hello, I'm Peter Cain, but everyone calls me Pete." Mark looked closely at the young man and at his hands and thought to himself, maybe he would last a week. "I'm Mark Poston. I suppose you're here to learn about the mining business this summer. You're one of the Cain's so you tell me where you want to start?" Mark knew the answer before he asked the question. Like all the rest he would start in the office where it was not so hot. The rest had never lasted long enough to learn anything and he knew it would be the same with this young man. Peter Cain looked too young to be able to get much out of this except a beer or two. Peter looked at the other man and saw that he was being tested and that Mark had little use for him or his family. "Where do most people start?" He asked. "A new guy starts in the pits as a digger. If he does well he moves up to a pusher and then a "sapper" and then a "lead man" and finally, a "foreman","but you can start wherever you want. You see you're really the boss." His voice took on a hardness that Pete had heard in the oil fields when a new man came to work and was told that Pete was the owner's son. The men learned quickly that they had misjudged this young man. The first fight in the oil field told them that this was no

ordinary soft kid from the rich side. "I'll start in the pits. You move me when you think I'm ready to learn the next step." The answer startled Mark, both by the tone of the younger man's voice and the fact that he was not an office flower. "OK, let's get you started in the bunkhouse and then we'll fill out your papers. I'm not going to tell anyone who you are. Just your name and that you came from Oklahoma. No favorites this trip, Amigo." Pete laughed and said, "You call it and that's the way it'll be." The next day the crew crawled out of their bunks about five thirty in the morning. A quick breakfast and the little bus took them to the pits; a large open circular area that had been carved out of the mountain layer by layer, each one wider than the one below them. Pete was assigned to a crew headed by a short wiry man named Carlos Estaban. Carlos had been in the pits for about seven years. His skin was almost the color of the copper they were mining. That first day was the longest in Peter' life. If he thought the oil and gas fields were tough he thought wrong. Here was the hot blazing sun burning into every fiber of his exposed body. There were few breaks, in fact just one per hour for five minutes for the men to get some water into their dehydrated bodies. Lunch was at 11 in the morning and when Peter settled down by himself to eat the food brought up on the little bus he could hardly keep his eyes open. The sun was doing it's job and his eyes were feeling seared and his skin tight and drawn. Lunch lasted for half an hour and then back to work until 4PM. Back on the bus Pete could feel his skin starting to stick to the back of the leather seat. He sat forward so that he did not touch his back to the seat. He was tired, dirty, sore and had a king size headache. When he got back to the bunk house some of the men were laughing at him and he became angry. One of the men, Domingo, saw his face and told him to look in the mirror in the bathroom. As he looked in the mirror a shock wave went through him. His body was a bright red. His hair was a dusty green and he could see the fatigue written all over him. He walked back into the main room with a sheepish grin on his face. Domingo laughed and said, "soon you will be one of us, amigo. Now go and take a shower and then put some grease on your body to keep from burning up." As he hurried to the shower he noticed that the men were also getting ready for the showers. He stepped in and turned on the cold water. A loud yell sounded throughout the building. Peter had just felt what it is like to have what seemed a ton of water falling on him. The cold water hitting his hot body was the most painful thing that had ever happened to him since his father's death. It was a cool night and the young man did not feel too much pain. The men had put an herb or flower of some kind on his body and it was soothing and restful. In a matter of minutes he was asleep, forgetting about dinner. The next morning when he got up he could feel the skin seeming to peel off of his body. Domingo came over to him and put some more of the medicine on him. "This is called 'aloe` he said. It is very good for skin like yours. You are lucky that you have worked in the sun before. We will keep the aloe with us and you can put it on whenever you feel the burning. Put it on your eyelids. In a couple of days your skin will

be darker and will not burn. You must be used to hard work You didn't break down yesterday like the other "gringos." You work hard and in a year or two you will move up. You are going to be OK." The first week went by in a blur of pain and fatigue. Friday after work all of the men went home to their families. Peter used the time to rest and get his strength back. Saturday morning Mark came into the bunk house to find Peter writing a letter. "Well you made it through the week. How do you feel?" The younger man smiled and said, "Like a well done steak, which I could also use now. Does everybody go through this or did you reserve this weather just for me? I've worked hard before, but never in heat like this. How do the men stand this for so long? Some of them have been here for years and they never complain. Is the money that good?" Mark noticed the real concern that Pete had for others. He was changing his mind about this man from Oklahoma. He had lasted the week and had not begged for anything that others did not have. He had talked to the men and they also liked Pete, who they called "Pedrocito." His last statement was one that he had never expected to hear from one of the owners. "So you would like a steak. Come with me tonight and we will have one at a jail in Mexico. You may get many answers to all of your question." Mexicali was a bustling town just south of Tuscon. Poverty was an instant sight to any outsider. The old jail had been in the side of a hill and was now a restaurant. The place was dimly lit but the smells were out of this world to Pete. He was hungry enough to eat a cow. As he looked around he saw that most of the people there were from the states. He said something to the other man, who smiled to himself. This member of the ruling family had a good head on his shoulders and noticed everything. Pete got the biggest steak he had ever seen. Along with it were refried beans and tall beers. When they were finished it was becoming dark. Mark took him to a row of shacks that were near a dirty spring. There were one or two outside bathrooms for the whole area. Pete wondered why they were coming to this part of town. "Hey, Pedrocito, come here." It was Domingo, calling to him from one of the doorways that was covered by an old piece of cloth. Pete and Mark went to the doorway and Domingo motioned inside. The first thing that took your breath away was the heat. It felt like back at the mine. Then came the smells, food and sweat all mingled together. "What are you doing down here with the big boss. He showing you where all the girls hang out?" The man laughed. "Solinda come here and meet one of the guys I work with. It is the gringo I told you about. The one that looks like a lobster." A small, very pretty woman came into the room from the back. She carried a small child with her and there was another holding on to her dress. Mark stood in the background and let Pete feel the room and the people who lived there. After several minutes he came forward and told Pete that needed to head back before the crowd held them up at the border. Sometimes it took several hours to get back if there were a lot of people going back at the same time. The ride back was a quiet one. There were many thoughts going

through the young mans mind. The letter he had been writing that morning was to Mary Jane telling her of his first week, and of his feelings for her, his future wife. The next day he wrote another letter; this one to his mother and sister. It was a different side of him that had finally come out. One that his mother always knew was there, just like his father. After the second week Pete was called to the office when the men were finished. Mark was there and they had a cold beer and Mark told him that he was going to be the lead man on a new crew that would be starting the next week. "It is now your responsibility to lead." "What will the men who have worked so long say about this?" the young man asked. "They don't ask, they do." was the reply. On Monday the new crew showed up and Mark announced that Pete would be the lead man. No one said or did anything, but looked at him with blank expressions. Pete took over and the new men had thought he had been there forever. By the end of the second week the crew was one of the smoothest working groups in the mine. The other man saw this and nodded approval at Pete. After a month on the job, Pete was moved into the office. Mark was moving Pete along as fast as he was able to grasp the complexities of the mine operations. Now was the part of the business that Pete knew he had to learn and learn well. He already had learned many things that he would take back to the oil and gas fields. This was the part of the business where the profits were made and lost. It was his job to see that there was to be little loss and more profit. After three months of hard work learning the mining business Pete still had not gotten into the smelting process. Mark knew that this would be the last part he would learn here. The next step would be at the metal exchanges that the family used to sell the finished product. Next week he would begin the final process of his mining education. The two friends worked well with each other. Pete had not heard from his mother and sister since he wrote them almost five months ago. This was strange since he knew what he had proposed would be something they would be interested in doing and it would make more money for the mining concerns. In fact his idea might work in many of their operations. It was the end of October and the weather was delightful. Mark was sure that he could send Pete home knowing the business of copper mining. On friday, every thing was shut down unexpectedly at noon and the men were called to the office area for a meeting. Pete joined the other men in the yard as Mark stood on the high porch in front of the office. "I called you men together because one of you has been writing letters to the owners. They have talked to me and there are going to be some changes made around here. Before I go into that I need to tell you that someone among you is not what he seems. He has worked among us, learning the business. It was his choice that you not know that his family owns the company that owns the mine. He wanted to be one of you and learn as you have learned. Many of you have told me that he was a good friend. He has been a better friend than all of you can realize. `Pedrocito,' come up here." Pete felt the heat rise on his face as he walked to the little porch. He had not wanted his new friends to know why he was here. Now he was afraid they would look at him differently and the bond might be broken between all of them. His fears were meaningless. As he walked

through the men they clapped him on the back and joked with him about coming back into the pits. When he got to the porch, next to Mark, the older man said, "When our friend first came here I took him to see your town and how you lived. He has never said anything about it, but he has done something for all of us." The door opened from the office and out came his mother, sister and Mary Jane. The five of them stood on the porch. Mark told the miners of the wonderful news that Pete's mother brought with her. "Señora Cain says we are going to have a new town here. Each family will have a house of their own with indoor plumbing. They will have bedrooms, kitchens, dining rooms and living rooms. Mrs. Cain said we will also have a hospital and stores. There will be new buses to take you to Mesa or Tuscon or Phoenix for more shopping. This will help you to live better and have your children grow up in a healthy way. Señorita Cain is going to move here and start a school for the children and the young people. She is going to prepare them to take over the school and the stores. They will learn to work in the hospitals. We will have a church to pray in and I know that we will have many weddings and then many christenings." Pete knew why he had not heard from them. He was overjoyed that Mary Jane was with them. He realized how pretty she was, and how she looked as if she belonged in the family picture. He made up his mind that they would get married as soon as they got back to Oklahoma. It was a tearful goodby two days later when the family left the mine. All of the families of the miners had been bused in the night before and tents had been set up for the families. It was a giant fiesta that lasted for many hours. Pete noticed that Mark was spending a lot of time with his sister, probably to protect her from the young men who were not married. Mark pulled Pete aside as they were about to leave for Phoenix. "When you first came I thought you would be like all the rest who came before you. That first day I gave you three days, but when you said you wanted to start like everyone else, I gave you a week. See what a liar you have made out of me. Never again will I make such a judgement." Pete laughed, "I gave myself little or no chance to live after that first day in the mines. I thought you were going to make it as tough on me as you could so that I would quit. If it had not been for Domingo and the others I probably would have quit on that first Friday. After I am gone, amigo, raise each miners pay by five dollars a week. Raise each of the leads by ten and the foreman by fifteen dollars. Raise yourself by twenty-five dollars per week. I think when the town is built we will make much more copper and the men deserve their share." Mark turned to the young man, and grasping him in a bear hug said, "Via con Dios, me amigo. Via con Dios."

CHAPTER 37 The year was 1962, Bartlesville, Oklahoma. Karl Cain had learned to walk last year and the house showed the effects. The youngster had gotten into everything that wasn't tied down. Pete and Mary Jane seemed more in love with each day. He went to work in a happy frame of mind and returned home the same way no matter what the problems of day brought to him. As for Mary Jane she spent most of the day looking after the small child, cleaning up after him and visiting with her mother-in-law, Polly. It was like spending time with someone who seem to know her very thought, even before she said what was on her mind. One of the things she spoke to Polly about was going back to school. Mary Jane had finished one year of college and had promised her family that she would go on and get her degree. Since she had made the trip to Arizona, she knew what she wanted. She was going into the new field of Social Work. Many people, she saw and heard, needed help with their lives. Poverty and poor conditions were found everywhere. She had heard about how bad it was in other states and countries. Someday, she thought, I will be able to make a difference, just as Polly and her daughter, Robin who was now in Arizona helping to start the new school in the newly named town of Saguaro. She was supervising the construction of the school and the other buildings and had the help of her constant companion, Mark. "The poor guy just makes sure I have everything. I think I'm falling for him. I hope he isn't just being nice," she had written Mary Jane. The other girl assured her that she had talked to Pete and he said that it was obvious before they had all left that Mark,"had met his match." Now as her child was older, Polly talked to her mother-in-law about going back to school. Her problem was that there was no school nearby and that she didn't want to be away from Peter. Polly listened to all that the pretty young woman had to say and told her not to worry. "God will take care of everything." she said. In her mind was the thought of what she needed to do to find the answer. It had only been the men who had gone to the mountain, Denali, to look for the truth and the answers. Why not a woman. She was the head of the family. There were only two others that could help her. One was very old and the other was not much younger than her father-in-law would have been if he were alive. She decided to contact Ike and Red Cloud, the only two she knew who could help her. Ike was now retired but his three sons were all ready to help her in any way they could. They booked her trip to San Francisco, got her a room at the

"Mark" when she refused to stay with any of them. Even old Ike called her and tried to get her to stay with him. She need to be alone. Then she called Red Cloud who she had met many times. He insisted on coming down to see her and talk about this idea. He was there in two days. The two talked for hours about Randy, the old days, the people that were in both their lives, and of the people in both of their lives. The conversations went on for three days and neither Peter or Mary Jane knew what was going on. All they knew that someone who had known many of the family had come for a visit. Red Cloud left on Thursday. It was the beginning of August and the heat was deadly. You could see it rise from the ground in layers. On Saturday, Polly asked Peter and Mary Jane to come over. She had a surprise for them. Dinner was at seven and after dinner when Karl went down for a short nap before they woke him to go home, she talked to the two young people. "I have to go away on a long trip." she said. There are some things that I must find out for myself. The only place I know to get the answers is on Denali." Mary Jane was not familiar with the name and Pete explained that this was the name of the sacred mountain that the Cain family had always gone to for answers . When they got home the two stayed up most of the night while Pete explained the history of the family and the role that the mountain had played in their lives. He explained that the mountain had never given up an answer that the men in the family did not follow. Of course he did not know that the answers had never come from the mountain. It held no answers and yet it held all of the knowledge that the family had ever needed. On Sunday Pete's mother, Mary Jane's family, Pete, Mary Jane and young Karl, stayed after in the little Methodist Church. The minister, Reverend Gilespie, met with them. Polly had asked that he give them communion. The other family did not know what was the reason but there was no hesitation. They loved the church and always felt that it could only help in time of need, and this seemed to be one of those times. After they left the little church they all went to Mary Janes's family for the traditional Sunday dinner. It was here that Polly made her announcement. She would be leaving on the train that night and would be in San Francisco by Tuesday evening. She would be leaving there by plane for Seattle the next day and would board one of the Caine ship's for Anchorage, Alaska. Silence greeted the words of the slim proud woman who had braved the loss of a husband, the husbands grandfather, father and mother; and still raised two fine children. Polly was still an attractive woman who did not look her age. Everyone in the room was aware of this and they all worried that someone would take advantage of her when they found out her vast wealth. Polly laughed at them and said, "If I find a man who can match up to Randy then I'll have no problem letting him take advantage of me. Let's hope I find such a person on the mountain. That night Pete and Mary Jane held young Karl up to his grandmother for one last kiss for no one

knows how long. With a kiss for the boy and a hug for the other two she climbed aboard the westbound Central Pacific. Late in the afternoon on Tuesday the train pulled into the station. Waiting with a big sign that spelled out," Polly Caine," were four men and two women. There was no mistaking that the old man was the one who had been always called, "Uncle Ike." Three men of varying ages stood to the rear of the old man and next to two of them were two women; one plump with a sunny smile, and the other short and very tiny. She looked as if a good wind would blow her out of the train station. She walked quickly toward the group with a broad smile that seemed to say, "Well here I am." After getting settled in her suite, Polly went to dinner with the family. Old Ike told her of the times with grandfather Joe and greatgrandfather James. He told of how they had been the "Great War," and how they and Red Cloud had become what they were because of the kindly old man named Joseph and his family. He told him of how Joe had given them a chance when they got out of the Army. How he provided for their families while they were starting out working for the Caine family. Old Ike was surprised when he heard that the name was shortened to "Cain." The boys laughed with the old man and told him like the times changed, so do people and their names. That was why Leon, the youngest was called Lee. James and Joe, the other two boys knew of the heritage of the names and would wear them as a badge of honor. Polly cried and laughed with them for about three hours when Ike said, "What are we doing here? This woman has been travelling for over thirty hours and then spends hours with us. She must be exhausted. Joseph, take her to her room. Polly, my dear, we will see you in the morning. Your plane leaves at 2:30 and will get you into Seattle by dark. Your room is all arranged and someone from the shipping lines will meet you at the airport and take you to the hotel and the next day to the ship. I have arranged to have you met in Alaska by the head of the firm in Anchorage. He will take over from there and will be available for all your needs. It was hard to believe that things had turned out for Ike the way that they had. After ten years heading the East coast operations the giant shipping company had severe financial problems. Joe and His father had talked it over and bought the company back, on the condition that Ike would go West and manage the operation. Ike had agreed. The pretty little girl, Joanna had died of pneumonia two winters before they headed west. Grief had stayed with them even though they now had two sons. They thought that with the move they would heal. The moved proved wise and the family assumed a place in the community. Another son was born, Leon. The company was once again on a sound footing. By the time World War Two came the company was large enough to handle government contracts, which made the company's coffers swell. Polly awoke at 9:45 the next morning. She scolded herself for sleeping so late. She had wanted to see the city. As she walked out of the elevator, young Lee was there to meet her. "Father said that you might want to see the city. If you pack your things I'll have them taken to the airport. My mother wants to meet you. She could not come last night. She had a fail and broke her hip. She gets around on crutches now. Thank goodness she'll be rid of them in another couple of weeks. She drives us all nuts." He laughed as he

said the last part, and Polly knew that this must be a happy family. "Mother has breakfast waiting so hurry up. I'll send a bellboy up to get your things in five minutes." Lee took her through the hills of San Francisco, making sure that she saw the Golden Gate Bridge, the port area and Telegraph Hill. The brick road fascinated her. She saw the great prison in the bay, Alcatraz, and then they were down on the flat area coming to a large house that was set in a wooded area. She thought that this was a perfect setting and that someone knew how to take care of the property. They turned into the driveway and Polly's eyes grew wide as she saw the perfectly trimmed hedges and the beautiful lush ferns and flowers. It did not take long for Polly to feel at home. Rebecca was already at the table and Lee brought Polly into the older woman who had such bright eyes. They were the brightest blue she had ever seen. Along with the silver hair she looked like a picture of regalness. She started to get up and the younger woman rushed to her side. "It is so good of you to have me to your beautiful home. Every one here has been so good to me. I can see why my father-in-law loved you all so much." Polly put her hand on the older woman's shoulder making her stay in her seat. It was a great breakfast with great conversation. Polly was hearing many things of the family's past that she had never known. Full of food and contentment, Polly said her goodbyes and Leon and Ike took her to the airport. The last goodby with Ike was hard for in the short time she was with them she again had become aware of the heritage of the family. She now knew that she was, in fact, carrying on the tradition that gave the family it's wisdom and she understood that friends of old were all part of the family; it's connections and extensions. Boarding the silver Constellation she flew on to her next appointment with the future. Little was she to know that her family and their fortunes were to be changed forever, except for the mountain and it's calling. Anchorage was growing. The airport had become an important link with the rest of the world. Planes taking the great circle route to the east and west stopped here to take on fuel for the rest of the trip. It was a bright morning when the big plane landed at the field. It looked to Polly as if the plane was going to land right in the main part of the city. Merrill Field was at the edge of the city near Medfra Street and 6th Avenue. The plane rolled to a stop and as Polly got out she was amazed at the sight of a city almost surrounded by majestic snow covered mountains. The blue sky contrasted brilliantly with the mountains just to the south of the airport. As she made her way into the terminal she wondered at the weather. The sun was high, but she knew that most of this part of the year was light. The temperature was delightful, not like what she was used to in Oklahoma at this time of the year when the thermometer reached into the mid nineties and even into triple digit numbers. The air was also clear and had none of the dust of the land that she had so recently left. Going to the luggage area she saw a sign held by a striking looking man. He was about six feet, well built with a shock of black

hair that was shiny and almost alive. His skin was almost the color of the copper of the family mines. She could see many of the features of the plains indians about this man. Peter also had some of the same facial structure. Then it hit her. He looked remarkably like her dead husband, Randy. The sign held aloft over the man's head read, "welcome to Alaska Mrs. Caine." The old way of spelling the name sent strange feelings through her. She walked over to the man and said, "I'm Polly Cain." It was simple and direct and yet when she said it she felt that feeling like the first time she had ever said it to people back home when she was Randy's bride. "Mrs. Cain I'm Thomas Tanana. I am in charge of the Kani Kompany stores in Alaska. We are all so glad that you are visiting us." The man spoke like he had memorized what to say. Polly looked closely at the man and saw that he was not as young as he looked from a distance. Slight streaks of grey were forming at his temples. Sun wrinkles showed on his neck and forehead. She saw that his eyes were kind and soft brown. He stood tall and straight. He gathered up her luggage and strode briskly toward the outside door. Suddenly he stopped and turning he flashed a sheepish grin. "I'm sorry to have walked so fast. I forgot you were a woman. When I come to pick people up here they are always men who are going to be outfitted for trips to the interior." He paused to let her catch up and then walked slowly so that she could keep pace. Polly laughed to herself. He didn't know that he was going to outfit her for the same thing. She had heard the name Tanana before. Something was in the back of her mind about that name. She would have to search her mind, but for now she was going to let this man make decisions for her to get her ready for her trek to Denali. He had taken her to a little hotel on the corner of "K" street and west "5th." The hotel was clean and the couple who ran it had been told of her arrival. They had a room for her that looked out over Knik Arm, the port of Alaska harbor. There were flowers in the room and fresh cold water in a beautiful pitcher. The old four poster bed had a down comforter and a large mattress. The floor had a large bear skin, covering the area around the bed. He had suggested that she take a rest and that he would pick her up later in the afternoon and show her downtown and the dinner. A warm feeling came over her and she told him she would be ready in about four hours. It was four in the afternoon when she woke up. Quickly she dressed and went to the little bathroom next to her room. She returned to her room and finished her dressing and headed downstairs to the lobby, where she found him sitting and reading a magazine. "I'm sorry for oversleeping. You must have been waiting a long time. Please forgive me." Thomas looked at her and suddenly felt feelings in him that he had never felt. She was pretty enough but it was something else that grabbed at him. Her strength of character was evident as she walked toward him; a firm step with her head tilted slightly back. Her eyes were steady as she looked into his face. He knew that this woman did not waste words. She meant what she said. As they walked through the six block area that made up most of downtown, Polly was amazed at the stark simplicity of it all. The sky

was still bright blue and the sun hung almost straight up. She wondered at crowded docks and the railroad that ran next to the docks. There were people of all colors and races. Here is where a"white" person was seldom seen. "You don't have many people from my part of the country do you?" she asked. He looked at her and smiled. "We only became a state three and a half years ago. Most of the people from the `lower forty-eight' are servicemen who either stayed here after WW II or came up when the government gave plots of land to people who would homestead the land and settle the country. They didn't want us eskimos to own the country." He said this last with a smile and a laugh in his voice. They went to dinner at a small restaurant that served a variety of dishes, many of whom Polly had never heard or smelled. The food was outstanding and the quantity was more than anyone could eat, she thought. Thomas had no problem though and ate all he ordered and when she did not finish hers he ate that also. After dinner they walked back to the hotel and the man said that if she was not too tired he would show her where the first "Kani Kompany" store was founded. She was both delighted and surprised that he would make time for her. After walking back to the hotel they got into his Jeep and drove down to an area on the other side of the port where everything and everyone seemed to head out to the north. The store was on a road called the Loop Road, near the corner of Ocean Dock Road. The building was old, and the wood withered. The sign above the doors had been painted over more than once. You could see the many faded spots and the slightly different fresher colors on the wood. There it was, the mountain. Around the center of the mountain was a cloud-like formation that seemed to cover much of the sides toward the top. On a ledge stood a girl with reddish hair and a long indian style dress. Next to her perched an eagle. The sign was old but to Polly it was a fresh sign, full of hope and answers. That night as she lay there, half way between sleep and dreams, the thought came to her that she was being tested for something. But what? Why was she really here? What would she find on the mountain? Thoughts ran through her head in a whirl and soon she was asleep. Morning came and with it another bright day. Polly didn't wake until almost 9 AM. As she moved about the room she glanced out of the window which faced the end of the inlet. Suddenly she stopped and moved to the window. There far in the distance was a mountain. She was sure that was Denali. It had to be. It stood above several other mountains as if they were surrounding a huge structure to protect it from intruders. In her mind she could see the giant, but here in real life it was almost a blur on the horizon. She made up her mind to find out if that was "her" mountain. When she came down stairs she asked the woman who was cleaning, the directions to the store where she was to get all of her things. "Mrs. Cain you just sit down and wait. Mr. Tanana said that when you got up we were to telephone him and he would come and get you." The woman went behind the counter and picking up a telephone, she called and left the message that Mrs. Cain was up. Thomas had been up most of the night. He could not get this woman out of his mind. He had many girl friends in his fifty years. There had never been one that he wanted to spend the rest of his life with; that

is until now. Thomas Tanana had worked for only one company since he was old enough to remember. His father had worked for the Kani Kompany all of his life. He had told his son that his people had worked for the company since two of their ancestors came to the little town of Knik over two hundred years ago. The company now had stores in every city that had a population over 2,000 people. Nome, Fairbanks and Juneau were the largest stores in the chain. Tok was the second oldest; but the store in Anchorage was the one that did the most business. Thomas had his headquarters at that store. He travelled to the other stores during the summer months. Sometimes he had to get to the stores in the south during the winters. He had learned to fly and had bought an airplane to use when he went to the various stores. For now, however, he was content to take the little Jeep and pick up the fascinating woman who had come into his life. Polly, too, had thoughts about the handsome man who reminded her so much of her dead husband. He had a soft voice and he looked directly into her eyes when he talked. There was nothing to hide. His face spoke of honesty, sincerity and gentleness. He was so much like Randy that it scared her. Thomas had not really known what she was doing here or why, but he knew that if she wanted him to know she would tell him in her own good time. For now he would be content to just be with her. As they drove to the store Polly asked him to stop by the railroad tracks so that she could ask him about something she had seen. He was puzzled but did as she asked. When they pulled to a stop, Polly pulled him over to the tracks where there was nothing to obstruct the view. She pointed to the mountain, showing faintly in the distance. "Is that the one they call `Denali'?" He looked at her in surprise. Yes that is the one that has two major names, Denali and Mt. McKinley. The word Denali means "high one" in our language. The Russians called it "Bolshaia Gora" which meant "Big Mountain." She smiled. At last she was to come face to face with secrets of the family, going back as far as they could be traced. Perhaps she would find things that would carry them even farther back. She would once more walk and stand where her dead husband had walked and stood. When they arrived at the store Polly walked through getting the feel for the place. She could see that it was old, very old. They walked together and he could feel her closeness. It stirred him almost to the point of telling her what he was feeling. Only his great self control stopped him. She too felt the closeness but her mind had only one thought; she must get to the mountain. They turned and went into his office. She was surprised to see how comfortable the room was, with rich paneling and dark rugs. Large sofas covered in hides and furs gave the room a rich feeling. He walked over to his desk and sat behind it so that he could hide his shaking knees. Polly sat in a large chair that seemed to make her look so much smaller. She told him why she was here, and Thomas who knew the story of the family's tie to the mountain, said little. He attended to all of her needs and made all of the arrangements to get her to the little used new airstrip called Montana Creek. From there she would be driven to Petersville. The last part of that drive from the highway to the town would be over 40 miles of a rough hand carved road. The same route that her husband and his father and grandfather had taken with White

Cloud twenty-three years ago. They went to dinner after nine that night and the sun was just starting to grow dimmer. He took her out to a place called the Brown Bear Restaurant and Saloon. It was not far from Potters Marsh where millions of birds came to nest each year. They stopped at the large area and Thomas pulled out a pair of binoculars so that she could see the few birds that were still nesting. As they walked into the Brown Bear, he took hold of her hand. Shock waves went through her. She shivered and when he felt her movement he let go of her hand. Instantly she reached out and putting her small hand in his large one she looked up at this gentle man who had brought out feelings long hidden, even from her. She had always like steak and when he asked her how she liked her meat she looked at him and laughed. "Tell the cook to kill the cow, drop it on the grill, count to ten, turn it over and count to ten again. Then he better take it off the grill. If it's dead it'll be ready." She had never heard him laugh before; but his laugh came from deep inside and seem to explode out of his mouth. Everyone looked at Thomas as he turned red from laughing so hard. "Little lady, I've never heard anyone describe cooking steak like that. I'll tell the waiter just what you said. In fact, I'll always tell that story to anyone I go to dinner with, from now on, so help me." He laughed again but it was lower now and his eyes were sparkling. By the time they left the saloon he knew more about her than she had ever told anybody. She spoke of her feelings after her husband died. She told how she had wrapped herself in her children. How her daughter and son had made something of themselves. How she had run the empire of the business for years, counting on old friends and new. People always seem to come along at the right time to help her when a problem proved to great for her to solve. Now there was a problem that she didn't know how to solve and there was no one to get her out of where she had found herself. She knew that this was a man that she was comfortable with now, but what about in the future? In her mind she knew that he would always be there. She was happy now though she knew the next day she was scheduled to start the trip to the mountain. As they left the restaurant, the sky had darkened and for the first time she saw what an arctic sky filled with stars looked like. She felt that she could grab any one of them. Thomas looked at her as she gazed at the sky. Seeing her profile, he reached down and taking her shoulders he turned her toward him, leaning his head to hers kissed her softly and with great tenderness. After a few moments they continued down the hill to the parked jeep. She held on to this big man with all of the strength she could muster. Her knees were weak and he was all there was to hold her up. She had not remembered the last time that she felt like this; but she knew that was more than some twenty odd years ago. The next morning she woke with the feeling that she somehow had lost control of her life. It seemed as though she could not make any decisions. Everything had a question without an answer. She knew that now more than ever she must get to Denali. Now she knew that the blood of all of Randy's forefathers coursed through her and that she was to be the person who would lead them all into the future. But what of her future? She felt sure that she would find her answers on Denali. A little after nine there was a knock on her door. When she opened it she found a beautifully carved Puffin, one of the prettiest

birds found anywhere. She had read that they were found in many parts of the state. There was a note on the bird that read simply, "We shall take the journey with you." She did not know the meaning of the note and when she went down to the lobby to check out she asked the woman at the desk where the bird came from. "I have no idea. It was on the counter with a note to deliver it to you." the woman said. After checking out of the hotel, she set about getting her gear together. Getting everything together she sent it on ahead to the airport. She decided to make one more trip to the old store that was the family's foundation. She told herself that she wanted one last look at the old building and to feel the history; but she knew that what she really wanted to see him again. Getting into the taxi she told the driver to take her to the Kani Kompany. Without hesitation he moved into the morning traffic and headed for the store. As Polly went through the door of the old store her eyes fell on an old carved wooden statue of a small native indian boy. She had never seen it before and yet she had the feeling that she knew who it was supposed to be. Could this be one of the "Caine's" from earlier times. She made a note that she would have to find out the early names of the family after she came down from th e mountain. She quickly picked up the carving and took it to the sales clerk who wrapped it for her. She started to pay and the girl looked at her. "You cannot buy anything in this store Mrs. Cain. We have been told that anything you want is yours." Polly smiled a shy smile and said," Thank You." She asked for Mr. Tanana and the girl told her that he had not come in today and may not be back for sometime. Sadness came over her and she left feeling that at least he could have been there to say goodbye. When she got to the airport her bags were quickly unloaded and she had the baggage man take them to the little chartered plane. Looking once more through the terminal she saw no familiar face. Certainly not his. Was last night a dream? Finding her way to the hanger where her plane was waiting she climbed into the little plane. Are you ready, a muffled voice said. Almost in a whisper she said, "Yes let's get out of here." The pilot turned and smiled. It was him. He was there for her! "I couldn't let you go. I know how important this is to you for I have heard of the trip of your husband's family over the generations. I also know that a woman has never made this trip. More important to me is the fact that I want to be with you. I could not sleep last night thinking of you; thinking of us." Polly felt the blood rushing to her head. She felt warm all over. "Thank goodness you're here. I was afraid that it was a dream last night. I went to the store and they told me that you were gone and would not be back for some time. I wanted you to hold me once more and I needed to see you again. I told my family that I was perfectly safe and that if I ever found a man that matched up to my children's father then I would let him take advantage of me. Will you take advantage of me? she asked him. "Yes," he smiled and then they both laughed. The little plane surged forward and they were on their way to the future and the mountain.

CHAPTER 38 The little plane landed at Montana creek and the two passengers got out and headed to the little hanger to the left of the runway. Waiting at the hanger was Frank Simmons one of the men who had helped rebuild Talkeetna, a town about fifteen miles from the air strip. Frank was an old friend of Thomas and was more than glad to meet him and the lady that he had with him. Frank had never known Thomas to even mention a woman. In fact Frank always said to Thomas that he had better settle down soon or it would be too late and he would die a withered old man. When Frank saw Polly he let out a low sound of approval. Thomas had struck pay dirt in Frank's mind. He wondered what this woman wanted that was up this way. No woman, other than the natives and a few wives of the settlers had ever come to this area. In fact the only strangers that came were either to fish and camp or to climb the" great mountain." When he found out her reason for being here he smiled as if to say, "Try it little lady; you'll never make it. No woman has." Thomas told the other man that he needed a Jeep for the next several days. He would either pay for the use or Frank could take it out in trade goods. Frank told him he would trade for the vehicle. Through all of this Polly stood and listened. This was something she had never seen or heard in her life. Men actually traded for goods and services with no bartering. That night they stayed at the Talkeetna Road House, a place that had been built back in 1944. The food was delicious and had a family atmosphere about it that gave it a comfortable feeling. Polly was tired and after dinner she told Thomas that she was going to bed. He told her that he would make all of the arrangements and that they would leave in the morning for Petersville. The following morning Thomas and Polly got in the little Jeep, followed the road back to the Montana Creek junction with the main highway. From there they headed north for about fifteen miles until they came to the settlement called Trappers Creek. This was an area that had been homesteaded in 1948 and was still giving government plots of land. The road to the settlement was rough and bumpy, filled with the ruts of winter. It was here that they turned westward on the Petersville Road. If the first road was bad this was even worse. The little vehicle bumped and slid over the so-called road. The going was slow and difficult. It was obvious that it got it's best use when there was snow and the road was packed for sleds, trucks or jeeps. It took the better part of three hours to get to the little stop called "The Forks Roadhouse." Polly was not really hungry but forced herself to have a bowl of soup and some crackers. Thomas ate well. Nothing seemed to affect his appetite. It was well into the afternoon when they came to the end of the road. From there they drove slowly across the rough tundra and rock to the area between the first of three glaciers that stood out from the mountain. The day had started out cloudy but by now the sun was bright and the mountain shown like a jewel. Around the center of the mountain, about half way to the peak was a cloud-like ring. It was as she had been told by Randy and his family. They made camp, cooked a hot meal and then started to look for the landmarks that were so familiar to her even though she had never

been here before. She had heard the story of the mountain from Randy almost from the time that she had known him. When the four men took the trip to the mountain it had left a feeling in her that seemed to be with her at this time. She suddenly remembered White Cloud had stayed behind at the village next to a big river. She remembered that the village and the river had the same name. She knew that she should remember the name. All of a sudden it hit her! "Thomas, did your people come from a town that has the same name as you?" she asked. He looked at her in a strange way and said, "Yes it is the name that my family has had for over two hundred and fifty years. Why do you ask and how did you know? Have you seen it on a map?" " 186186‚186186ƒ186186„186186… 186186†186186‡186186ˆ186186‰186186Š186186‹186186Œ186186186186Ž186186 186186186186‘186186’186186“186186”186186•186186–186186— 186186˜186186™186186š186186›186186œ186186 186186ž186186Ÿ186186186186¡186186¢18618 6£18 6186 ¤18 6186 ¥18 6186 ¦186186§186186¨186186©186186ª186186«18 6186¬186186186186®186186¯186186°186186±186186²186186³186186 ´18 6186 µ186186¶186186·186186¸186186¹186186º186186»18 6186 ¼186186½186186¾186186¿186186À186186Á186186Â186186Ã186186Ä186186Å186186Æ 186186Ç186186È186186É186186Ê186186Ë186186Ì186186Í186186Î186186Ï186186Ð1 86186Ñ186186Ò186186Ó186186Ô186186Õ186186Ö186186×186186Ø186186Ù186186Ú186 186Û186186Ü186186Ý186186Þ186186ß186186à186186á186186â186186ã186186ä1861 86å186186æ186186ç186186è186186é186186186186ë186186ì186186í186186î186186 ï186186ð186186ñ186186ò186186ó186186ô186186õ186186ö186186÷186186ø186186þ ÿÿÿþÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNo" she replied, "It was the name of my husband's people from the earliest of times. They changed sometime in the 1700's, and a couple of times since then. I had forgotten that until now. I wonder what our relationship must really be. Can we be related?" There was a note of sadness in her voice. Thomas saw her face and heard her voice. "We aren't related. Perhaps I could be related to your husband's family, but the relationship would be over two hundred years ago." What we need to do is go to the Tanana village and find out what we can about the past." said Thomas. Before it was dark, the shadow of the mountain gave their camp an appearance of being in dusk and then as the soon started to sink it was night for the two people who had no idea of their future together. Morning was early, and by nine o'clock they had finished eating and had gotten all of her gear together. He would stay behind for this was her quest and he could not be part of it. Placing her pack on her back and gathering up her rope and little climbing axe she looked once more at the faded drawing of the route and back to the mountain. Slowly she started toward the giant, picking up her pace with each step. As she started up the slope she looked back

at the man who had given her new life. Would he still be there if she got back? Would he still want her? Would she find her answers on the ledge or in the cave? And what of the lady or the eagle? She had not seen either. By early afternoon she had found the narrow passage that led to the way to the ledge. It was here she stopped to rest and to eat something. The air was much cooler here and she took a light jacket out of her pack and put it on to keep the chill away. She was about to go into the cloudy area and she knew that it would be colder. As she climbed she was aware of the fact that she had to stop more often and take more breaths in order to move forward. It was getting darker and she moved as quickly as she could. She was not a young person and her body was reacting to the pace and the cold. She looked at her watch and saw that it was only three in the afternoon. She moved forward and suddenly she froze in her tracks. A loud and piecing cry made her tremble. She moved forward and again she heard it, almost as if it were directly above her. Looking up she saw the shadow of a large bird on the side of the mountain in front of her. Moving up the little trail she finally came to an outcropping. Struggling, she scrambled to try and get up the rocks. After several attempts she took off her pack, tied her rope to the end of the pack. Putting the other end around her waist, tied it securely and then started to climb to the top of the rock. This time she succeeded and found that she was on a long ledge that narrowed at the far end. Pulling her pack up she moved to the center of the ledge and sat down. She was tired, cold, scratched, bruised and disoriented. She did not know where she was or where she had started. What was she doing here? She propped herself against the mountain, closed her eyes and tried to compose herself. Back at the little camp had set up, the man looked at the darkening sky and quickly covered all of their open belongings in the little jeep. He moved everything else into the tent, knowing that this would help to keep it from blowing away or getting pulled up from the ground. The clouds had already hid the mountain and the wind was starting to blow harder. The man knew that this was going to be the first storm of the coming winter. The temperature was probably down into the thirties, he thought. Would she find the cave before she got caught in the cold and wind? Polly slowly opened her eyes and looked around. She had only rested for a short time and felt that she was in control again. She felt the wind blowing, now harder than before and saw that it was getting darker by the minute. It reminded her of the weather just before a tornado back home in Oklahoma. Quickly she set about finding a place to put her small shelter. She walked to the narrow end and looked out but could see little. Turning, she walked back toward the other end. She suddenly let out a little cry of pleasure. She had found the cave. It was not a big opening but she quickly brought her things inside. Putting everything down on the inside she went back out and gathered up some loose branches. Polly saw no trees but this was wood for a fire. She would not have to use her precious fuel and her stove for this night. Feeling that the cold may get worse she went back out and brought in more wood, as much as she could carry. She remembered the story of Randy's grandfather and his stay in the cave. Lighting her lantern she looked around the cave, studying the

walls and the roof of the little room. She found the writings that she had heard about. There were some that looked new and she made up her mind that she would look more closely at them tomorrow; for now she would build a fire, cook her supper and get a good night's sleep. She wondered, as she went about her tasks, about the large bird. The shadow was larger than any she had ever seen. Was it the eagle of the legends? For now she would eat and sleep. She tried several times to light the branches but they seemed to be just a little too damp. Polly walked around the cave looking for scraps of paper or other dried leaves. Suddenly she came upon a small pile of dried moss. She looked in amazement and wondered how it got in here. Carefully she put some of the precious moss under the leaves and branches and put a match to the dried material. A burst of flame rewarded her effort and slowly the other material started to glow and then to spring into burning wood. The little room started to heat up from the fire. Polly got her food from her pack and started to fix her dinner. As hungry as she was she held back on some of the food. She realized that she was in a storm and that she did not know what to expect. Taking some water from her canteen she made soup and tea along with dried beef. She also made some powdered potatoes and ate a small can of fruit. Going to the mouth of the cave she saw that it had started to rain. She ran to get her coat on and then went out to gather more wood and leaves. In the gathering dusk she saw it! Near the far end of the ledge sat a great bird. It was black with some white feathers on it's tail and a large white topped head. She stopped what she was doing and started to walk toward the bird. As she neared the bird dropped something and then gave a shrill cry and lifted into the sky, quickly lost from view. Polly ran to the spot and picked up the object. It was a funny kind of blade. It had a curved handle that seemed to be made of a bone like substance. Carved on the handle was the crude picture of a bear between two tree trunks. A man was standing there with a spearlike object thrust at the bear. The blade was curved, flaring out from the ends. She put the small knife into her jacket pocket and quickly gathered up another load of wood, taking it back to the cave. She took her little cooking pot to the mouth of the cave, wiped out with a cloth and set it out to catch water. She thought that this would make sure she would have enough until she returned from the mountain. Polly sat down on her sleeping bag and tried to understand the meaning of what had happened this day. She knew that there was purpose to all that was happening and yet she could not know what it was. She lay back on the bag, stuffing her pack behind her as a pillow, and thought of her life. From the time she first fell in love with Randy until now she had been able to keep everything in perspective. She had coped with his death, carried on with the business of the family, raised her children to be self-sufficient and to help others. She knew that she must keep the role of her husband's family in the business world; one that could nor would dim. There were too many people depending on her for their very lives. Where was her life going? She now realized that she was still not an old woman, " past her prime," as the expression went, but that she had much left to live for. Maybe for a new beginning, though she would still have hold of the old. How would her children handle this new man in her life, if he was to really be in her life. Everything had become so complex. What was the answer? It was eight in the morning when she next looked at her watch.

She had slept for about ten hours. She felt better than she had for a long time. She had a purpose in life and she knew what it was. The night had been filled with dreams. Her own childhood, Bits and pieces of history of her dead husband's family. The realization that she was part of a great legend that stretched back through the centuries, bound by a family that knew only that they blessed by good fortune and had passed it on to others. Their deeds and words had stretched throughout the world. Theirs was a heritage that had no blemishes. It was up to her to see that all of this was carried on. She had become, at a young age, the matriarch of the family. She was here to put the final pieces of her life into perspective. Where she went from here and what she did would be a reflection of her role in generations of his people. When she woke up she went to get the little pot outside the cave. The snow was falling in large soft flakes. The sky around her was leaden and she could see only a few yards. The wind gave her a chill as she picked up the little pot. It was full of water, frozen water, ice. She took some of the dry moss and rekindled the small fire, and feeding it small branches she put the pot on top to melt the ice. She thought that her first move would be to refill the canteen. She had melted snow before, on the plains of home and knew that it would take a lot to make a pot full. When the ice was melted she refilled the canteen and then made herself a cup of hot coffee. Taking her little pan she made some thin batter and made herself a stack of pancakes. Using some of the powdered eggs she had fashioned a good breakfast. She saved the little bacon and ham she had for the time she might need it for it's fat content. Now was the time to explore the drawings on the walls. She had read much about the indians of her own land and had studied some of the drawings that told stories. Looking at these she realized that she had before her a great story of life. From the beginning of the story on the wall, it seemed to her she was looking at the progress of a people. After what seemed an eternity she approached the far wall. It was here that she found the picture; four men, one who seemed to be slightly set apart from the others. He seemed different as if the others were of one family and he was a stranger. OF COURSE, she realized this was the drawing of grandfather James, Randy's father Joe, Randy and White Cloud. They must have drawn it on the wall for the next one to enter the cave. But how did they know who would be next or if there would be a next one. Polly turned her light along the wall and stopped abruptly. There was another drawing next to the one of the four men. This one showed two men standing next to the giant bird. One of the men looked like White Cloud did in the previous picture; but who was the other man? Next to the men was a crude drawing of a large bird and a river. There appeared to be huts in the background. The drawing was crude, like all of the others. They seemed to have been here for ages and yet she knew that it had not been that long since Randy had been here with the others. The light flickered and then shone bright again against the wall. There on the wall was the last picture; a woman and the bird. Fear gripped Polly. Who did that and when was it done? Had someone come into the cave while she slept? What was the meaning of it, and why the bird? Suddenly the light went out and she heard the cry of the eagle. She moved quickly to the opening of the cave and for an instant she thought she saw the figure of a woman in a red dress. It was only a momentary

glimpse and then she saw the eagle in the middle of the ledge. She realized that the snow had stopped and that the sky was clearing and the light was bright. Putting on her boots she moved slowly out to the bird. It ruffled it's feathers as if shivering. Polly moved next to the bird and cautiously touched the head of the great bird. The eagle turned to look at her and his great yellow beak opened as if to grin. Gently she rubbed the head and then the back and the folded wings. The bird slowly moved away and took off from the ground. It made tight circles as it rose and suddenly cried out and swooped down from the sky and dropped another object from its mouth. It was a buckle. She looked at it and saw that it was indian, small and made with beads and leather. A loud gasp escaped from her as she remembered the buckle. It was White Cloud's. She knew what she must do next. Polly filled her pack and prepared to go down the mountain. The sky was bright and clear and the air was much warmer. Before leaving she gathered up the rest of the wood and stored it in the cave. She placed the tea and coffee next to the pile, left the little pot and skillet, made sure that the fire was out and shouldering her pack she set out to return to the campsite, and Thomas. The little jeep turned up the rough road to Nenana. The two had spent the night at the little roadhouse at the junction of Petersville road and Trapper Creek. They had stayed up much of the night as Polly told him of the things that had happened. He sat quietly stroking her hair and holding her hand. Thomas could see when she had gotten back that something had happened on the ledge. She was not the same woman who had left him for the mountain. In many ways she seemed more settled and closer to him and yet there was something that held her back from giving her self completely to him. It was noon and the sun was high. The snow glistened on Denali and it was as if she was still up there. In her heart she knew that part of her would always be there. They stopped at a little cluster of huts. A place, Thomas said, the natives and the people who lived there, called Cantwell. As they went into the largest hut, a fat native woman ran up to Thomas and gave him a bear hug. She laughed and chattered away in some dialect the Polly had never heard. Thomas laughed and dragged Polly over to meet her. "Polly, this is `Nachita.' She is an old friend. Her husband is away hunting and she says that this will be a good hunt. They are one of the largest suppliers of northern brown bear skins that the company has. Kani has done business with them for over twenty-five years." Polly smiled her shy smile and said "Hi." The other lady looked at her. She looked at Thomas and asked in halting english what did she say. He laughed and told her that this was the way that some americans said "hello." Nachita said, "Hi." and laughed her big laugh that seemed to make her whole body tremble. Nachita fed them a hearty lunch of bear stew and beer. They all talked and laughed for an hour or two. Polly felt as if she had known the big woman all of her life, when they left. Thomas told Polly that they had to get to Nenana before dark and the rutted road was slow going from here. Polly wondered what road could be slower than the one they had just travelled? By the time they had covered the almost one hundred miles from Nachita's house to Nenana it was almost dusk. Thomas pulled up to an old depot that had a sign, "Bed and Maybe Breakfast." He told her that this is where President Harding stayed when he came to Alaska and drove the golden spike that completed the Alaskan Railroad. When they entered the lobby they were greeted by a man dressed in

a long coattail and mutton chop whiskers. Thomas smiled and said, "Well you heard we were coming and thought you would dress for the occasion, Philip. Did Nachita call you? What's the matter can't you speak." The man put up his hand and said, "If you would shut your mouth for a minute you will live longer. Nachita said she was pretty but I didn't think she was this good looking. Lady you're far too good for this man. He is a rogue and a scoundrel." Polly blushed at the man's comments about her looks and then broke out laughing as Thomas turned red and then white. "Mister, I don't know who you are but I like you already. I'm glad someone will stand up to this man." Thomas looked dismayed and then he saw the two of them laughing at him. He blushed a dark red that gave him the appearance of the plains indian. Philip Carson was a big man, tall and with a broad smile. He took off the coat and the false whiskers and sat down with the two of them. "You know Thomas and his family before him are the ones that made so much of this possible." She looked at him questioningly. "After dinner I'll tell all, whether you like it or not Thomas." Dinner was one of those memorable meals that no one ever duplicates. Philip had fresh lettuce and tomatoes from the Matanuska Valley; salmon from the great waters. There were fresh vegetables and potatoes and a special treat, home made ice cream made by Philip's wife Dianne. After dinner there was brandy and coffee. It was a rare evening of contentment for Polly. "You know that Thomas and his family come from a little village about sixty-five miles from here. You can only get to it by boat and then only in the summer. Well for as far back as we know the Tanana family, Thomas',have worked for a company called The Kani Kompany. The natives around here are Athabascans which is what Thomas is, I guess. Anyway ever since anyone can remember his family has bought goods from the people up here. As near as anyone knows about three hundred years ago one of the people from the village left and went down to where Anchorage is now. He married a russian girl and the family grew and grew. I heard that they had changed their name to Kani or something like it." The people kept in touch with the village and it was the area that supplied much of the goods that were sold at the first store. I don't know much more except that Thomas' father was the man that helped start this little town and made it possible for the rafts to bring goods here and load them on the train to Fairbanks and Anchorage. I hear that they're lots of Kani stores that Thomas runs." Philip stopped talking and looked at Polly. There was something different about her face. She had a glow that seemed illuminate her entire being. Shyly she held Thomas' hand and looked at him with a wondering look. This man was truly one that could take Randy's place in her heart and her life. It was good that they were together she thought. Randy is dead and she loved him, but this is now and she is in love again. Small talk continued for another hour and then everyone went to their rooms. As she opened the door to her room he walked by and then turned and gave her a gentle kiss. Slowly she pulled him into the room and said, "Do you really want to marry me?" "Yes," came the answer swiftly, "If you'll have me." She said, "It means that one of us will have to move and give up what we do." He looked at her and said, "For you I would give it all up, gladly, but it is yours anyway." She laughed quietly and said, "If we are to be married come here to me and be my love." He closed the door and took her gently in his arms.

CHAPTER 39 The next day they were told that there would be a boat going to the little village of Tanana tomorrow. Thomas decided to teach her to fish. When they returned to the lodge they brought enough fish for everyone there. Thomas has caught two and she the rest, all ten of them. Philip laughed until he cried. It was a great dinner. Morning came and they boarded the barge that was to take them to the village for answers to the many questions that she had. The barge moved downstream at about twelve miles per hour. She marvelled at the mountains and the birds and squealed with delight when she saw the deer and the snowshoe rabbits along the banks and in the trees. The mountains were not as high here but they rose almost straight up from the ground giving the appearance of being much taller than they were. They reached the village while the sun was still high. It wasn't very long before they had their things unloaded. Thomas had sent a large quantity of goods from the Kani Kompany and they had arrived at the village on the same barge. The days were much cooler now and she wore a light jacket over her sweat shirt. He laughed and told her that she would never be able to live in such a country as this, if she thought this was cool. Then he remembered the snow storm and the time she had spent on the mountain. After they had been there for a few minutes, it seemed like the whole village came to see this woman who was with one of their own. It did not take long for Thomas to tell them the good news, news that he was getting married, and this was the bride. The villagers crowded around and soon, a man who looked to be about forty years old came over to them. "Thomas, you finally found someone who will listen to all your stories of the past. Our village would be famous if everyone listened to your stories. Lady, I am one of the few here who speaks english. My name is Rangak.What is your name?" he asked. She looked at him and said, "My name is Polly Cain and I was married to one of the people that came from your village many hundreds of years ago. I was hoping to find some answers here and on` Denali'. I have heard your name by my dead husband. He said that you became good friends. I have been to the mountain and it has also led me to the village." The man looked at her and said, "You are the girl that Randall married. Is that not so?" Polly suddenly felt quite dizzy, the earth was spinning and she was spinning with it. When she woke up she was lying on the ground and wet cloths were being put on her head. "She's awake." Rangak said as leaned over the woman. Slowly Polly sat up and then got into an old chair someone brought down to the docks. "How did you know who I was?" she asked. The man replied, "When I was much younger four men came to the village. They were looking for information about the past. Thomas you were here. Don't you remember you brought some supplies for the hunters? Anyway one of the men was named Randall. The others were his father and father's father and our

leader, White Buffalo." This last remark made her weak again. She quickly took a drink of water and asked, "Did you say he is your leader, now?" The man looked at her with slight smile on his face and nodded. "He is now over eighty years old. His health is starting to go bad and that is why he is not here to greet you. He has asked me to bring you to him; both of you." Polly remembered the old chief, but not as he looked now. The once stocky and muscular man was now thin. His skin hung loosely on his arms. His hair was very thin and steel grey. Only his eyes still had the clear, steel glint that she had remembered from the past. The old man rose to a sitting position when she and Thomas came into the hut. He looked at her and smiled. She said softly, "I was Randall's wife. He was killed in the great World War II. Do you remember him?" The old man laughed a cackling laugh and smiled. He had a single tooth in the middle of his lower gum. "Randall was a good boy. I remember how he learned to drive the sled in only three days. He was the first to the top of the mountain. He has written the history of this village and of the people from before. I am sorry to hear he is gone, but he is in a good place. The eagle of long ago is with him, and the spirits watch over him as does your God. He has the best of everything." She told him of the death of the others and how the area where they lived had grown. She told him about her two children Peter and Robin. When the old man heard the name of the girl his eyes lit up. "The name of the girl that I knew we left alone with two children was Polly. Are you Polly?" By the end of the third day Polly knew almost all of the history of the Caine family. What she did not know was how the name Cain had come to be. She made a note to herself to talk to old Isaiah and find out what he knew. He probably had heard the stories from Randy's grandfather. For now she was still puzzled about Thomas and his connection to the family. Nobody seemed to know what that connection was, only that his family had always been part of the Kani Kompany. It was obvious to anyone who watched the two people that they were in love. They laughed, walked and talked together as if no one else even existed. Polly spent many hours with the "old one" as the villagers called the indian. He looked as if he were one of them and she marvelled that they all seemed to respect him as their leader. She decided to see if he was strong enough to tell her the story of how he became one of them and their leader. "No one from the outside has ever heard what happened here." He said as he began the tale of his life after he had left the other three men. "The old man from the other side of the mountain, Toomgak, was able to talk english well enough to help me learn the Athabascan language. We would sit by the hour during the great darkness and he would tell me the story of how the land was settled and of the family. It seems that they go back over four hundred years. There were many problems during the early time and all but two of the brothers of one of the first families that settled the other side of the mountain range died. He told me all of their history he knew. When Spring came the old one left me here and went back to the other side of the mountain. I was able to speak the language and helped the people learn some of the things that we have taken for granted. When they saw these wonderful things like an easier way to skin the animals that left more meat for them to eat. I showed them how they could use small portions of the land in the summer to grow

some crops and how to grow potatoes. This is a good place to grow potatoes. Then I had Thomas' father send me some fishing poles, reels, line and hooks. I showed them the way that fish could be caught and how to make snares to catch small animals. One day there was a dispute among two of the men and they both came to fighting each other. This was not good. I told them that they would not have harmony of the spirit if they continued to live with the argument between them. That night the council met, and after they had finished their meeting I was invited to come in and listen to the men tell their side of the problem. After they had finished the council told them to leave and then they asked me what I thought should be done. I told them what we would do in our tribe to settle the matter and they called the men back in and told them that they would each have to go into the woods and find a tree that they would cut down and make into a canoe. They could not come back until the canoe was ready to go into the water. In fact they had to come back in the canoe." The old man continued, "From then on I was considered a man of the village and they had me sit on the council. I took another wife who died last year. We had no children so I do not have anyone to pass the leadership to and that means that the people will have to elect a new leader. I have asked them to do it now so that I can help him get the people to accept him. They do not want to do that for they think that when that is done I will die. They wait much longer and they will be right." The story was delightful and Polly felt good hearing that her family had such a person who has led both back home and now here. He was the last of a dying breed of men who helped shape the country. She often hoped that her children would be movers of the land. Peter seemed to be most content when he worked on the land, in the mines or the fields. He also seemed to like the cattle business that they had on the western side of the state and into Texas. He often found reasons to go there for a week or two. Robin on the other hand had married Mark, but continued her work with the people and was becoming one of the female leaders of Arizona. She had the hospital enlarged and had the first real maternity suites in the state built in the enlarged section. She raised money for three new bright yellow school buses so that all of the children for fifty miles around would have a way to get to school. Her family started six scholarships, three for boys and three for girls who graduated from the high school and wanted to go to college and study medicine, dentistry, nursing or teaching. Polly felt that Robin was shaping the world far better than her mother. Thomas and Polly were spending their last few nights in the tiny village and the villagers were not about to let them go without a party. That night it was a feast and a celebration that would never be forgotten. Word got out to the other villages by the railhead and special barges with small outboard motors, to speed them up, came loaded with friends to help celebrate. When morning came the next say after the party, two tired and stuffed lovers quietly said their goodbyes to the old chief and the rest of the village and boarded one of the barges for the return trip to Nenana. Putting their gear and presents in the little jeep took a lot of doing and it was starting to get dark so they decided to stay for one last night and leave early in the morning. Thomas was anxious to get

back to the little store and see that everything was all right. When morning came they quickly ate and said their goodbyes and then headed back the way that they came weeks before. To their right loomed the great one, Denali, surrounded by other mountains that did not reach quite as high, so that the mountain stood, rightfully, above the others. They reached Montana Creek by afternoon, though the sun still promised several hours of daylight. Frank was there and so was the little plane that had brought them to this place. Frank arranged to send everything by the next train south and the two left to return to Anchorage. That night they had an early dinner and then went to the store so that Thomas could see if there were any problems. After seeing that everything was in exceptionally good order, as if he were never gone, they went to his place. Polly would stay here until the ship would come for her the next week. They had much to talk about and the time was needed to solve many of the problems that they had to face if they were to get married. The most important problem was where they would live! Both had deep roots where they were and it would be hard for either one to give up what they had worked so hard to achieve. Thomas had told her that he would not have a problem just so he could be with her. Could she say and do the same? She was doubtful that she could live here. It was the second week in September when Polly and Thomas knocked on the door of the big house on the hill in San Francisco. Polly had called Isaiah's house and told them that she was bringing someone for him to meet. They wanted to know as much as he could find out about the origins of her family. The housekeeper opened the door and as they came in the old man came to meet them. "Polly I'm so glad you're back. We were all worried since we had not heard from you for so long. Is everything all right." He kept talking and suddenly stopped and turning to Thomas he said, "I'm sorry young man. It's like you weren't there. Please forgive me but this young lady is very important for all of us and we worry about her. Her family calls every other day to see if we have heard from her. I tell you they are driving us crazy." He laughed as he said the last part but Polly could see that he was serious. "Uncle Ike, this is Thomas. We are going to get married after he meets the whole family, if he still wants me. He doesn't know what he can get into with the Cain family does he?" Ike laughed and looked at Thomas. "Son watch your step this family is sneaky. Her father-in-law grabbed me out of the army thirty seven years ago and made me do forced labor. All he ever gave me was....everything. You are marrying into the finest family I have ever known. Not a bad apple in the bunch." Polly blushed and quickly asked if she could use the phone. Emily, the housekeeper took her to the parlor and she called her daughter, Robin. After she told her the news she promised to bring him to her home on the way back to Oklahoma. She said Peter and Mary Jane were on their way for a visit. He and Mark were going hunting and this was a chance for their children to be with the two families. The next morning Lee, the youngest son of Ike, picked them up at the house. Ike and his wife would not let then stay at a hotel. They went to the docks and to the offices of the great company. Lee took them to a small office in the back of the building. "This is where the shipping lines started. That was about a hundred years ago. The two men who started it all had come here from Alaska and somewhere in the

Dakotas. I don't know much about them but there are some old journals and papa said for you to read them and see if you can put it all together. Polly and Thomas spent all of the day and well into the next day before they came across something that was interesting. It explained much of the riddle. It seems that the two men who started the company were not brothers but friends. When they started to spread out they hired two brothers from the little village called Tanana, the place where they had just come from. Back about two hundred and fifty years ago the two brothers were brought to Knik, a small town next to where Anchorage is today. The two boys were used to run supplies to the different villages. They helped run the main store and brought goods to it for sale and trade. Later on as the two owners decided to grow with the business they opened stores south and east in the great snow bound land. They put the two boys in charge and gave them a share of the profits. Apparently this is what the family has always done for those who worked for them. One of the boys went north to open all of the stores and do the trading and the other brother stayed in the Anchorage area and managed the little store called the, "Kani Kompany." Thomas was still for several moments and then turned to her and said, "You know that I am not related to your husband's family. The Tanana name was the one given to the brothers to identify them and the village they come from. I have always known that I had come from the village but I did not realize until now that my family had been in Anchorage for so long. I remember my grandfather talking about how his grandfather had told him about the story of the fishing line that was used by the first peoples of the family of the Caine's, or what ever their name was at the time. I think that their family was also named Tanana for the same reason. This means that my family has always worked for your family. Well I guess I'll just change jobs and keep on working for the family." He smiled at her and she felt an electric shock go through her. The timing could not have been better. When they arrived in Mesa, Arizona, the first touches of the short Autumn had arrived. Last week it was in the hundreds and now the days were in the low eighties and the nights in the fifties. Thomas was dripping with sweat, for he had never been in such warm climate before. Even the nights were warmer than the days in Alaska, for most of the year. The train pulled into the station and the whole family was waiting to greet the couple. Robin and Peter sprinted to their mother and their children were not far behind. Mary Jane and Mark stood back and looked at the tall dark stranger with the face that looked much like the indians who lived in the area. "Well I told you if I ever met a man that could measure up to your father, and he wanted to marry me I would say yes. Peter remember that night at the table before I left I said that didn't I." She looked at Thomas who was grinning and shifting from foot to foot. "Thomas, I guess you'll have to pass the inspection of these two before everything is final, so I'm going with Mark and Mary Jane and you ride with these two hearts of my heart." It did not take long for the three of them to get well acquainted. Robin saw the look in her mothers eyes and how this tall man looked at her. As they rode they told him about what they did for a living. They wanted him to find out later how much the family was worth, after they

got married. By the time they got to the little town of Saguaro the three of them were like family. Robin rushed up to her mother and whispered, "He's so much like the way that you told us dad was that it's almost as if he was alive." Polly jerked up and then it hit her! What she loved in this man were the same things that she had loved in Randall. Now it was all clear to her. God had given her a second chance at happiness with a man. One who would be good to her, like her first husband. Peter also came over to her and said, "Well if he can ride a horse and throw a rope around a calf I guess you can marry him." Then he broke out in a huge grin and hugged his mother, almost squeezing the breath out of her. Mark and Mary Jane now had their turn, explaining what the family was really like. They had him laughing so hard the tears were rolling down his cheeks when Mark told him about Peter's first week in the mines. Mary Jane told him about his reaction when she told him she was going to have a baby, like, "How can that be." Mark and Robin had built a big house with five bedrooms and four baths. They knew that they would have people coming and going at all times of the year and the day, or the night. When they got to the spanish adobe house the six of them stayed up most of the night as he told them about his life. They could see in his eyes the look of love he gave their mother and they were happy. Mark had a great idea! Why not get married here in Saguaro. They would have a big combination wedding and fiesta. They could have it in October, the prettiest month of the year. That would give everyone time to come from all over. Mark would rent the hotel for guests to stay at while they were here for the wedding. Polly and Thomas would invite everyone they knew and the children would do likewise. The next day Polly called home and got in touch with the preacher who married she and Randall so many years ago. Reverend Polk was about to retire. Polly asked if he would come and perform the ceremony. She told him how much he was like her first husband. He knew of her trip and he asked her if she had found the answers to her questions. She told him that this was part of the answer. He agreed to come and she told him that a ticket would be at the church office in the next few days and that they would pick him up a few days before the wedding. She wanted him to see the area and to talk to Mark about religion. This was one thing that they had never seemed to have brought up. Everything was arranged. Over three hundred people would be coming from all over the world. Many of them out of respect for her family and to meet the man who was to be her new husband.

CHAPTER 40

Thomas and Polly had been married for ten years. For the past seven they had lived on the sprawling ranch near Plainview, Texas. Not only did Mark learn to ride and rope, but his natural ability for trading, buying and selling techniques made the ranch grow and prosper. Peter had moved his family there and built a large house on the other side of the ranch. The two men had hit it off from the very beginning, and worked as equals. Little Karl had a new grandfather and Peter had the father he never knew. After the marriage Polly told Thomas of the holdings that she controlled and his eyes widened as if he thought that she was joking with him. It scared him when he found out it was true. Would people think that he married her for her wealth? The problem caused him sleepless nights until he finally told her that she was to make sure that everything was in her name and it was all to go to her children if anything ever happened to her. She smiled at him and said nothing more about it. When they first moved to Texas he never worked so hard. It seems as if he was up at dawn and to tired to do anything but sleep at night. Now years later he saw the hard work paying off. They had some of the finest beef cattle in the country. Buyers were plentiful and the price was not negotiable. Everyone knew that "The Eagle Ranch," gave only fair deals and that their word was their bond. Karl looked out over the prairie and wondered at the vastness. Dim hills appeared in the distance, wavering in the shimmering heat of the day. He was fifteen years old and looking more like his father with each passing day. He had already become good at everything there was to do at the ranch. He could do any one of the men's work. Thomas was proud of the boy. He was glad they were here in Texas. He remembered the news flash on March 27th, 1964. Anchorage was devastated by an earthquake that rocked the area. The little village of Portage, forty miles south of Anchorage, had been completely destroyed. It had been covered by a large tidal wave and then the water receded and the town was no more. Roofs and debris were all that were left. The people that were still alive did not rebuild. Many of his friends had been killed. He and Polly chartered a plane and rushed to the fractured land that was his home for so many years. The weather was clear and cold. Winter was still with them and the days were about seven hours long and the snow was bright enough to blind a person if they were not careful. He rented a plane at and they flew to Montana Creek. From there they got the train to Nenana. The quake had hit here also but with much less force and there was little damage. They were there for three days before there was a barge that would be able to carry them to the village of Tanana. When they stepped onto the dock they saw it! The giant eagle lay on the dock, its wings spread out and all of the long feathers pulled from the top layers and the tail. The eagle's head was crushed as if something had smashed it where the great bird lay. Rangak came forward in a daze. His head was bandaged and he walked with a limp. He recognized the man and said to him, almost in a whisper, "You have come at a terrible time. Some men came here two days ago. They said they were going to hunt in the forests. They had a new kind of gun. They came back yesterday and they were drunk. The eagle was flying over the water and the men took their guns and fired at the sacred bird. They fired many bullets at once and they hit the

eagle. It landed on the dock and was still alive. I went to the bird and one of the men hit me behind the legs and knocked me down. Then another hit me on the head. When I woke up the men were gone. They took two of our women with them and started up the river. They pulled out all of the feathers and took of the sacred feathers with them. We have kept the ones that they had not wanted. They are in the council room where we pray to the spirit eagle to come to take them back. We know that this will be the only way that the days will become right again and everyone will be happy. If this does not happen we are doomed." The man was crying and Polly was also. Thomas was as mad as he had ever been in his life. What right had any person to take from the sacred bird. This was not the land of the white man. Always he seemed to destroy what was good. Look at all of the wars that were fought for such stupid reasons. Land stolen from honest people. People taking advantage of others instead of seeing what they can do for others. He thought of Robin and what she had done for all of the people of Arizona. What Peter had done for the families in the oil fields of eastern Oklahoma; and he and his mother had done for the people of Plainview. Polly and Peter put up the money for the land so that the Methodist church could build a new worship center. The present one was in great disrepair and was too small for the growing community. The great things that Polly had done for people all over the world, giving to good causes with no one knowing where the money or food came from. Many of the indian reservations had food and medicine that she bought but would not let anyone say where the supplies came from. They stayed in the village for several days, hoping that the boat would come back. Thomas made plans to deal with the men and then to turn them over to the authorities. The village had a link to the outside, thanks to Polly who had a full radio transmitter and powerful receiver sent to Tanana. Thomas radioed to the state police in Fairbanks and told them what had happened. The taking of an eagle's feather was against the law and carried a severe fine. These men must have taken enough feathers to put them away for many years. It was April tenth when they returned to Anchorage. The little "Kani Kompany" store was still standing. They were doing a land office business. Thomas turned to Polly and said, "There are a lot of people who now have nothing. Would you feel betrayed if we gave much of the goods that we have to those who need them. In the old days a man would write down what he got and pay when he could. It would be the thing to do." She looked at this handsome man and said a silent prayer of thanksgiving for having him for a husband. "You are so good to people," she said. "Of course I don't mind. It's a great idea." The two spent most of the day giving the people what they would need to get them through the rest of the winter. Everyone looked at the little store with it's faded sign and smiled. Surely these were the real people of the land. The ones who take care of others as did the people who started the land so many hundreds of years before. Thomas and Polly found the little hotel she stayed at that first trip to Anchorage. It had not been damaged and the same lady was still behind the counter. She remembered the story of the Carved Puffin. When she heard that they had married she gave them the "bridal suite." When they left three days later she refused their money. She had heard what they had been doing the last three days.

Looking out over the land Karl turned from the mountains and headed to the road to catch the bus for school. He was in high school now and there were lots of ne interests. Girls, cars, girls, sports and girls. Being good looking with his dark complexion and blond hair, the girls were only a problem choosing which he wanted to be with. Unfortunately he did not make the choices out of good intentions. Many times during that year irate fathers would call Thomas to tell him to keep the boy away from their daughters. Football and Karl were made for each other. When he was a freshman, a year ago, he made the team and already the colleges had heard of him. His grades were another matter. Thomas finally told him that the truck he wanted would not be available until he had passed all of his classes and made up all of his back work to get his credits. Karl did it in less than a year and next week he and his father would go to town and find the boy a truck. CHAPTER 41 Karl had been out of college for seven years. He was an All-American running back at Oklahoma M&A He signed to play with one of the pro teams and had made good money for six years, Karl had a problem. It was an old problem, girls. He just couldn't seem to find the right one and settle down. He played the field as if he was running through the line of the opposing team. One would grab him and he would carry her for a short time and then drop her for someone else. The young man went through them from one city to another. Wherever he played there was a problem. No one seemed to measure up to his mother or his sister, Polly. It was the third game of the practice season when it happened. He had taken the ball on a wide end sweep. As he made a cut to the inside he was hit from the side. A blinding white-hot flash went through his leg. Karl went down and lay there. The trainers rushed to the downed player. As they straightened his leg, to place him on a stretcher, a searing pain went through his knee and he lost consciousness. When he came to he was in a bed in a hospital room. The doctors were there and so was the coach. He looked at their faces and knew that something was wrong. He thought to himself that he must have a broken leg and he was going to miss the season. He was still groggy from the anesthetic and soon fell back to sleep. He was dreaming and the dream was about a pretty girl with bronze hair. She was laughing and riding a paint horse. He saw his mother and stepfather, Thomas and they were looking at him. Slowly he opened his eyes and saw that the two of were standing over him. It was no dream. The X-rays told the story. They would rebuild the knee and he would be able to walk, but his football playing days were over. If he were to take a hit on the leg he would never walk normally again. Several months later he was in a small bar playing some pool with old friends. He had settled down somewhat. He was now using his degree in business administration working on the ranch. He was handling most of the paper work and the business of running the oil and gas lines throughout the country. He also had started a small breeding ranch for paint quarter horses.

He still chased women but at a much slower place, trying to find the right one from his dreams. He had heard of the dreams of his family back to the mountain and the bird. He also had heard of the women who had the sunset hair. Karl knew the stories of the people in his family and what they had done with their lives. He had dreams of the girl with the bronze hair. He looked at every girl he saw but she was still not there. He no longer played the field. To be sure he still dated but they were casual, nothing serious. His mind was always drifting, trying to come up with a purpose for his life when one day, in April, his mother called him to the ranch for a conference. Polly, Karl,Thomas and Peter sat around a table and talked about the business in Alaska. They wanted him to think about going up there in a few months, when the weather was better. He had always wanted to see the country where his stepfather came from. He had heard about it from both parents from the time he was old enough to read a map. Now it was his turn to work in the business that started the family's wealth and fame. That night he went into Lubbock. There was a place that served a great steak and had the coldest beer around. He had lots of friends there who he had gone to school with him, both high school and college. He had set up dinner with three of them and Art Mason, one of the guys, was in charge of the dates. She was there, dressed in a red western shirt, jeans and boots, with a stetson tilted back on her head. Her hair, with red and gold, mixed into a beautiful bronze glow. Karl was captivated by the hair. She was pretty in a wholesome way. When he got home that night he woke his parents and told them that he had found the girl that he was to marry. They smiled and told him to go to sleep. He did not go to sleep. Instead he sat out on the porch and thought of his next date with Sharyn Morgan. The next day he told Thomas and Polly. They looked at each other and broke out laughing. He asked why and they just smiled and walked away, holding hands. For the next two months Karl and Sharyn were together most of the time. He took her to his breeding ranch and she fell in love with one of the paints. He saw to it that the quarter horse was transferred to her name. He had the horse saddle broke so that she could ride with him. She squealed with delight. She always squealed when he made her happy. He always tried to make her happy. The summer was coming and with it the trip to the north. Should he ask her to go along? He talked to the family who had met her and had grown fond of the happy young lady that changed Karl's life. "Well it's certainly one way to find out if she really wants to spend the rest of her life with you or you with her. Why don't you see if she can take off from the school where she teaches and wants to go with you. Maybe she would rather stay at home." That night he told her that he would be taking a trip to Alaska. He could see the sadness in her face. Then he told her that it was for the family business. He spent the next week telling her the story of the family and the role that the north country played in its life. Then he told her of the mountain and his plan to follow the family tradition and go to the mountain for some answers. Some important answers. She looked lonely and forlorn and he could wait no longer and asked her to go with him. She squealed with delight. School would be over next week and then she was free for the rest of the summer.

They flew to San Francisco where they stayed at the "Mark." A Man named Lee Greenberg met them at the airport and told them that he would take care of all of their arrangements while they were in the city. All of the bills had been paid. Karl asked about this when he called his mother. She told him that his grandmother had made the arrangements and that Mr. Greenberg's family were part of the family fortune. Five days of taking in the sights of the city by the bay and the vineyards, redwoods and coastal towns left them tired and ready for the final trip to Anchorage. Arriving at the hotel Karl asked for a room near the top floor. One that had lots of windows and looked to the north. He didn't know why. He only knew that this was the way it must be. Karl and Sharyn had a room on the tenth floor of the Anchorage Hilton. The room had windows on two sides and it was here that they stood, her back pressed to him, into his strong stomach, as he put his arms around her and held her close.

as emotional for all of them. The biggest surprise came when Isaia202 202202ˆ:202:202“:202™:202$¦202&¦202®202+®202=• 202202 z202z202z202x20 22022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022 02202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202 202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202 202 202 202 202202 202202 202202 202202 202202- 202202¬ 202202í 202202,202202<202202R202202202202«202202V202202c202202:202202‚202202 202202¹ 202202° 202202•

203203z 203203vvvvvvvvvvmmmmmmmmmmm203203203§à 203203203§ð203§z 203203| 203203~ 203203Ž 203203 203203£ 203203² 203203´ 20320 3ߤ20 320320 3203 Y203203@µ203203üµ203203ã203203u203203w203203y203203{20 3203¨203203g203203i203203k203203Y 203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à Y 203203[ 203203] 203203 ! 203203§ "20320 3Ñ"20 3203Ô "20320 3Ö"20 3203Ø "20320 3Ú"20 3203Ü"203203Þ"203203à"203203â"203203ä"203203þ"203203>$203203F+203203è203203x.203203z.203203|. 203203ç0203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à ç0203203@22032035203203“8203203•8203203—8203203™8203203›8203203 820 3203Ÿ 820320 3¡8203203£8203203¥8203203§8203203¬8203203º8203203¼8203203è8203203;: 2032039 ;20320 3¥<203203µ=203203‘?203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à ‘?20 3203P A203203B203203wC203203±D2032036E203203¦E203203œF203203®H203203L203203§L 203203ÒN203203¯R203203S203203ôS203203¸T203203£U203203ÆW2032033Y203203Y2 03203I\20320 3”]203203&^203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à &^203203Ma203203°a203203Øc203203Ue203203üe203203ig203203 h203203i203203Üj203203¼k203203?l203203nm203203n203203.o203203Êq203203s2 03203xs203203@t203203€u203203w203203 x203203wy203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à wy203203bz203203Ë{203203203} 203203Š203203ë203203ë€203203(‚203203ƒ203203 ƒ203203„20320 3¦†203203b‡203203ö‡203203ʈ203203‹20 3203À Œ203203ҍ203203rŽ203203O203203§‘20320 3t’203203Ç’203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à Ç’20

4204É ’20420 4Ë’20 4204Í ’20420 4Ï’20 4204Ñ ’20420 4Ó’20 4204Õ’204204×’204204Ù’204204Û’204204Ý’204204ß’204204ì’204204@”204204C– 204204i–204204k–204204m– 204204. ˜204204J™204204ìœ204204l204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20 4204204204204204204§à l204204ÆŸ2042041¢20 42044 ¢20420 4Ý£20 4204¦ ¥20420 43¦204204T¦204204©204204ó©204204õ©204204÷©204204ª204204;«20 4204 ¡204204£20 4204 ¥20 4204 Å204204Y¯204204Ï°20 4204V ±204204X±204204Z±204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204204§à Z±20 4204â ±20420 4²204204ôµ204204η204204Ó·204204Õ·204204×·204204Ù·204204Û·204204Ý·20 4204ß·204204á·204204¸204204È»204204Ì»204204h½204204ð¾204204… ¿204204%Á204204<Â2042041Å204204ÌÅ204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20 4204204204204204204§à ÌÅ204204 Æ204204Ç2042041Ç2042043Ç2042045Ç204204È204204%Ê204204âÊ204204äÊ204204æÊ 204204%Ì204204Í204204žÐ204204ßÑ204204ÞÒ204204ñÔ204204µÕ204204mÖ204204¥ Ø204204)Ú204204,Ú204204gÛ204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204 204§à gÛ204204ºÜ204204OÝ204204âß204204Tà204204á204204Ñá204204Hâ204204«å204204ç 204204éç204204 ë204204éë204204204í204204¢í2042046ï204204ð2042041ò204204‰ò204204þó204204 ´ô204204áô204204ãô204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204204§à ãô204204åô204204õô204204÷ô204204rö204204 ´ù204204û204204Âý204204Fþ204204204 204Ö 204 204Z 204ø 204Á 204& 204» 204

205û

206†¤ 206Ĥ 206Þ 206— 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à — 206´ 206¸µ 206¢§ 206ú 2066 206 206’ 206Ç 206ﾁ 206W! 206Z" 2065# 206Ò$ 206& 206½& 206ä' 206ú) 206ü) 206þ) 206 * 206* 206* 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à * 206* 206 * 206* 206* 206E* 206ô+ 206- 206x. 206ﾍ/ 206ì0 206“2 206Ì3 206¶4 206G5 206z5 20608 206Ð8 206t: 206E< 206ý< 206ÿ< 206 = 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à = 206*= 206V? 206¬@ 206¯@ 206†C 206ûC 206‰D 206`E 2061F 206áG 206§H 206RI 206‰J 206~K 206 L 206®M 206úN 206%P 206pR 206 T 206¦V 206xW 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à xW 206¢W 206JY 206eY 206_Z 206fZ 206jZ 206qZ 206tZ 206ﾍ Z 206ﾐ Z 206‰\ 206T^ 206®_ 206[a 206³a 206µa 206·a 206§e 206©e 206«e 206©f 206hi 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à hi 206ji 206li 206“i 2069j 206Äk 206Ël 206úl 206ül 206þl 206Ûn 206zo 206èp 206„r 206Ät 206Æt 206Èt 206ùt 206sv 206Nw 206ãx 206ây 206| 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à | 206@| 206B| 206D| 206~ 206…~ 206¤€ 206¢ 206 ‚ 206„ 206Þ„ 2060† 206±† 206œ‡ 206Aˆ 206mŠ 206‹ 206L‹ 206‡Œ 206î 206\Ž 206æŽ 206èŽ 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à èŽ 206Ž 206 206 206 206 206  206

 207

 208 208 208µ 208 208 208 208 208- 208  208" 208$ 2083 208Ú’ 208*” 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à *” 208—– 208_— 208‹— 208ú— 208A™ 2080› 208cœ 2087ž 208+Ÿ 208ZŸ 208¢ 208¸¤ 208~¥ 208–¦ 208À¦ 208T§ 208ß© 208C¬ 208o¬ 2085 208T® 208V® 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à V® 208X® 208-¯ 208¼° 208ɱ 208*² 208[² 208³ 208Ú³ 208|µ 208Š¶ 208ⶠ208“¸ 208Eº 208¾ 208n¾ 208®¿ 208À 208o 208:Ä 208Å 208\Ç 208šÊ 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à šÊ 208öË 208°Ì 208#Í 208›Í 208 Ï 2080Ð 208bÐ 208ÆÒ 208AÔ 208ÿÔ 208ŽÖ 208× 208¤Ø 208ÉØ 208ÑÚ 208ÔÚ 208ÖÚ 208ØÚ 208ÚÚ 208ÜÚ 208ÞÚ 208àÚ 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à àÚ 208âÚ 208äÚ 208æÚ 208èÚ 208Ú 208ìÚ 208üÚ 208”Ü 208vÞ 208xÞ 208zÞ 208Ýß 208©à 208µâ 208Câ 208Eâ 208Gâ 208=ã 208hã 208Aä 208éå 208ëå 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à ëå 208íå 208iæ 208 ç 208Uè 208Àé 208Ÿí 208ïí 208ﾏ î 208

ï 209{ñ 209·ó 209hõ 209üö 209ú 209·ú 209¨ü 209×ü 209þ 209èþ 209z209209^ 209q209vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv209209209209209209209§à q209:209v209¤209] 209Q209S209U209W209Y209[209] 209_209a209c209e209g209i209k209m209o209~209¦209vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20 9209209209209209209§à ¦209P 209 209· 209à 209& 209S 209Ÿ

210"210 210˜210ÿµ2105§210v210µ210¢210 21062108210H-210-210Æ210ü 210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à ü 210b"210r#210µ%210&&210$'210÷(210©*210+210ä+210210'/210ï 0210x 1210‚ 3210È 4210e 5210í 5210D 7210!9210Ë9210Š:210Œ:210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à Œ:210Ž:210:210•:210—:210™:210©:210³:210V<2103>210–? 210Q@210MC210{D210QE210F210¨G210H210ÌH210ùH210aJ210áJ210RK210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv21 0210210210210210210§à RK210|L210ÛL210 M210MN210tO210éP210£Q210æR210ÍS210åT210U210‹W210Y210,Y210pZ210,]21 0W^210Â_210†`210í`210Ša210äb210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv21 0210210210210210210§à äb210éc210§d210©d210e210”f210lh210nh210„h210)j210Èj210ûj210ik210²l210n2 10jq210©t210ßu210ev210!w210ﾐ x210
211 211@ 211µ211É211Û211Ò211]µ211ºµ211§211ƒ§211…§211‡§211‰§211‹§211§211 §211‘§211“§211vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv211211211211211211211§à “§211•§211— §211™§211›§211Ÿ§211¡§211§§211©§211«§211¼§211¿§211ž211